seminar update (11jan07)

git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@3386 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751

26 files changed, 11071 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/2up.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/2up.doc
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..082efec0201
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/2up.doc
@@ -0,0 +1,549 @@
+%% BEGIN 2up.doc
+%%
+%% Documentation for 2up.tex/2up.sty.
+%% Run through LaTeX, with or without the NFSS.
+%%
+%% See below if you want to try out two-up printing.
+%%
+%% LaTeX version of this documentation courtesy of
+%%    H. David Todd <hdtodd@mockingbird.wesleyan.edu>
+%%
+%% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of
+%% the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.2 of this license
+%% or (at your option) any later version.  The latest version of this
+%% license is in:
+%% 
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% 
+%% and version 1.2 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version
+%% 1999/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%%
+\documentstyle[12pt,twoside]{article}
+
+\def\FileDate{January 28, 1993}
+\def\FileVersion{1.2}
+
+%% INSTRUCTIONS FOR TWO-UP PRINTING.
+%% 1. Change \iffalse below to \iftrue.
+%% 2. Uncomment \special{landscape} if using Rokicki's dvips, or otherwise
+%%      remember to print the document out in landscape mode.
+%% 3. Uncomment one of the booklet options, if desired.
+%%
+\iffalse
+  \input 2up.tex
+  \targetlayout{twosided}
+  \TwoupWrites
+  % \special{landscape}     %% This works with Rokicki's dvips
+  % \targetlayout{Booklet}  %% Booklet printing with 2-sided printer/copier.
+  % \targetlayout{booklet}  %% Booklet printing with 1-sided printer/copier.
+\fi
+
+\makeatletter
+
+%% PAGE NUMBERING:
+%% Adjust page numbering if using booklet layout option.
+\setcounter{page}{0}
+\def\next{\if@leftpage\else\stepcounter{page}\fi}
+\@ifundefined{target@stop}{}{\next}
+
+%% CONTENTS:
+\def\tableofcontents{%
+  \par\begin{center}
+  \large\bf Contents
+  \end{center}
+  \begin{quote}\@starttoc{toc}\end{quote}}
+
+%% PAGE PARAMETERS:
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}          % paragraph indent
+\setlength{\parskip}{4pt plus 1pt minus 1pt}
+\setlength{\topmargin}{0pt}
+\setlength{\headheight}{12pt}        % height of running head
+\setlength{\headsep}{30pt}           % distance between header and text
+\setlength{\textheight}{8.2in}        % height of text on page
+
+%% DATES, VERSIONS AND TITLES:
+\def\@maketitle{%
+ \begin{center}
+   {\Large\bf \@title \par}
+   \vskip 1.2em {\lineskip .5em
+   \begin{tabular}[t]{c}\@author\end{tabular}\par}
+   \vskip .8em {\@date}%
+  \end{center}
+  \par
+  \vskip .5em}
+
+%% Page Style:
+\pagestyle{myheadings}
+\markboth{Two-Up Style Guide}{Version \FileVersion, \FileDate}
+
+%% Special list:
+\newcommand{\namelistlabel}[1]{\mbox{\bf #1}\hfil}
+\newenvironment{namelist}[1]%
+  {\begin{list}{}%
+    {\let\makelabel\namelistlabel
+    \settowidth{\labelwidth}{#1}
+    \setlength{\leftmargin}{1.1\labelwidth}}}%
+ {\end{list}}
+
+%% VERBATIM:
+%%
+\begingroup
+  \catcode`\{=12 \catcode`\}=12
+  \catcode`\(=1 \catcode`\)=2
+  \catcode`\+=0 \catcode`\\=12
+  +gdef+|(\)          % \| = character \
+  +gdef+{({)          % \{ = character {
+  +gdef+}(})          % \} = character }
++endgroup
+\def\Backslash{\protect\|}
+%%
+%% Define some functional font commands:
+%%
+\def\MainFont{\tt}      % For macro definitions.
+\def\UsageFont{\tt}           % For in-line macro names.
+\def\InlineFont{\tt}          % For other in-line snipets of code.
+\def\MetaFont{\rm\it}            % For meta arguments.
+%%
+%% Short-cuts for font commands:
+%%
+\def\s#1{\string#1}
+\def\t#1{{\InlineFont\string#1}}   % For other in-line code.
+\def\m#1{{\MetaFont #1\/}}         % For just putting things in italics
+\def\M#1{{\InlineFont\{\m{#1}\}}}  % Arg is in italic, enclosed in tt braces.
+\let\N\t                           % For in-line macro names.
+\catcode`\<=13 \def<#1>{\m{#1}}    % <meta>
+\catcode`\"=13\def"{\verb"}        % Short verb
+%%
+%% This is for listing macro definitions in a quote-like environment.
+%%
+\begingroup
+  \catcode`\[=1 \catcode`\]=2
+  \catcode`\{=13 \catcode`\}=12
+  \gdef\@MD[%
+    \catcode`\{=13 \catcode`\}=12
+    \def{##1}[\{[\MetaFont ##1]\}]]
+\endgroup
+\def\MD{%
+  \quote
+  \begingroup
+    \@MD
+    \def\end{\endgroup\end}%
+    \def\\{\@centercr\s}%
+    \MainFont
+    \s}
+\def\endMD{\endquote}
+%%
+
+%% End preamble.
+\catcode`\@=12
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\title{Documentation for 2up.tex:\\
+  Two-up printing for Generic TeX}
+\author{Timothy Van Zandt\thanks{The documentation was put into
+  \LaTeX\ format by David Todd.}\\ Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu}
+\date{Version \FileVersion\\[3pt] \FileDate}
+
+\maketitle
+\thispagestyle{empty}
+
+  "2up.tex"/"2up.sty" allows one to print a document two-up, with
+considerable flexibility as to paper size and layout. It produces a standard
+dvi file, and does not involve an additional dvi or PostScript filter. It
+should work with most \TeX\ macro packages.
+
+  {\bf Usage:} Input "2up.tex", or include "2up" as a LaTeX style option.
+There is a good chance you will get the desired layout. (But you will probably
+need to generate new font bitmaps to get high quality output.) See the rest of
+this documentation for detailed information on controlling 2up.tex.
+
+\begingroup
+\def\baselinestretch{.8}\large\normalsize
+\tableofcontents
+\endgroup
+\clearpage
+
+\section{Comparison with other methods}
+
+There are other tools for two-up printing:
+\begin{description}
+\item[PostScript filters]
+These work well as long as you only use PostScript fonts (as opposed to the
+usual Metafont fonts). Otherwise, the PostScript filter scales bitmapped
+fonts, and the quality is lower than with "2up.tex".
+
+\item[Rokicki's dvidvi]
+"dvidvi" is a versatil tool that does much more than
+2up printing. However, if only rearranges the pages, and does not adjust the
+magnification to ensure that the pages fit properly in a two-up format. It
+also adds one more step to the \TeX-dvi-printer cycle. "2up.tex", on the other
+hand, combines the changes to \TeX's magnification and page layout with the
+rearranging of the pages, all with an easy-to-use interface and from within
+your \TeX\ document. (See Section \ref{dvidvi} on using both "2up.tex" and
+"dvidvi" together.)
+\end{description}
+
+\section{A warning about fonts}
+
+Two-up printing generally involves reducing a document, and thus using fonts
+sizes that are not typically found on your system. If you are using bitmapped
+fonts (standard for \TeX\ users), and you do not have and cannot generate the
+extra fonts bitmaps, you will find 2up.sty (and any other method of two-up
+printing) to give very poor quality output.
+
+If you are using a program like Rokicki's "dvips" that can generate extra font
+bitmaps as needed, you will find that it takes a long time to print your 2up
+document the first few times, as "dvips" is busy making the extra fonts. This
+problem will go away. Be thankful you have such an easy way to get extra font
+bitmaps.
+
+\section{Usage}
+
+Input "2up.tex". \LaTeX\ users can include "2up" as a style option.
+
+Then set the target and source layout:
+\begin{MD}
+  \source{mag}{width}{height}\\
+  \target{mag}{width}{height}
+\end{MD}
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item The ``source'' layout is the layout of your document
+the way it is usually printed.  The ``target'' layout is the layout when it
+is printed two-up.
+
+\item <width> and <height> are the true width and height of the paper,
+when looking at the output right-side-up.
+
+\item <mag> refers to the source and target magnification. It should be an
+integer, equal to 1000 times the magnification factor. There are also some
+magic magnification numbers:
+\begin{description}
+\item[$\setminus$magstep<n>] for a magnification of 1.2$^n$ (n=0,...,5), or
+
+\item[$\setminus$magstepminus<n>] for a magnification of 1.2$^{-n}$
+(n=0,...,5).
+\end{description}
+Using these magnification values will make best use of the available fonts on
+your system.
+\end{itemize}
+
+"2up.tex" takes each source page, and centers in half a target page. To get
+the pages to fit, the magnification of the document typically has to be
+reduced. If you find that the pages are too crowded, try reducing the target
+magnification. If they are too lonely, try increasing the target
+magnification.
+
+If you want to adjust the positioning of the scaled pages, try changing the
+values of "\hoffset" or "\voffset" with "\advance" or \LaTeX's "\addtolength".
+
+Don't change the magnification of your document after using the "\target"
+command, as you will override the settings made by 2up.tex.
+
+You can also specify some options:
+\begin{MD}
+  \targetlayout{options}
+\end{MD}
+where <options> is a comma separated list with no spaces. Valid
+options are:
+\begin{namelist}{topbottomxxx}
+
+\item [topbottom] The two source pages are printed one on top of the other.
+\item [twosided]  Odd pages are always printed on the right or the bottom.
+\item [booklet]   Pages are printed like a booklet. See Section \ref{booklet}.
+\item [Booklet]   Like "booklet", but for two-sided printers/copiers.
+\item [dvidvi]    For arranging in two-up layout with "dvidvi". See Section
+\ref{dvidvi}.
+
+\end{namelist}
+
+The only other changes you might want to make to your document are the
+following:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item You have to see to it that the target output is printed with the
+correct orientation (landscape or portrait). See the documentation for your
+dvi driver for details.
+
+\item "2up.tex" will inserts a line between pages if you change the following
+dimensions:
+\begin{namelist}{pagesepwidthxxx}
+\item [$\setminus$pagesepwidth]   Thickness of line. (Default 0pt)
+\item [$\setminus$pageseplength]  Length of line. (Default 6.5in)
+\item [$\setminus$pagesepoffset]  Distance from bottom of page to bottom of
+line, or (with "topbottom" layout) from side of page to beginning of line.
+(Default 1in)
+\end{namelist}
+
+\item You can, but do not need to, use the following commands:
+\begin{namelist}{twoupemptypagexxx}
+
+\item [$\setminus$twoupemptypage] inserts a completely blank half page
+in the target.
+
+\item [$\setminus$twoupclearpage] \LaTeX\ users: ejects a complete target
+page.
+
+\item [$\setminus$twoupeject] Plain \TeX users: ejects a complete target
+page.
+
+\end{namelist}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{Defaults}
+
+  The following commands set the parameters for some common sources and
+targets. The definitions of these commands are also useful examples.
+
+  For A4 paper, just replace "8.5in" and "11in" in the definitions below by
+the width and height of A4 paper.
+
+\begin{description}
+
+\item [$\setminus$twouparticle]
+
+This is the default for \LaTeX.
+\begin{namelist}{Sourcexx}
+
+\item [Source:] A portrait document on 8.5x11 inch paper with wide margins as
+used in \LaTeX's article style, and without marginal notes.
+
+\item [Target:] A landscape document on the same size paper, with the source
+pages printed side by side.
+
+\item [Definition:]\hspace{1pt}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\target{\magstepminus1}{11in}{8.5in}
+\source{\magstep0}{8.5in}{11in}}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{namelist}
+
+If you use narrower side margins, or if you use marginal notes, then you
+will need to use "\twoupplain" or \\ "\twouplegaltarget", defined below.
+
+\item [$\setminus$twoupplain]
+
+This is the default for non-\LaTeX.
+
+It is the same as "\twouparticle", but for source documents with narrower
+margins.
+\begin{namelist}{Sourcexxx}
+
+\item [Definition:]\hspace{1pt}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\target{\magstepminus2}{11in}{8.5in}
+\source{\magstep0}{8.5in}{11in}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{namelist}
+
+\item [$\setminus$twouplegaltarget]
+
+\begin{namelist}{Sourcexxx}
+\item [Source:] A portrait document on 8.5x11 inch paper with just about any
+margins and perhaps with marginal notes.
+
+\item [Target:] A landscape document on legal size paper (8.5x14 inches),
+with the source pages printed side by side.
+
+\item [Definition:]\hspace{1pt}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\target{\magstepminus1}{14in}{8.5in}
+\source{\magstep0}{8.5in}{11in}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{namelist}
+
+\item [$\setminus$twouplandscape]\hspace{1pt}
+\begin{namelist}{Sourcexxx}
+
+\item [Source:] A landscape document on 8.5x11 inch paper with just about any
+margins.
+
+\item [Target:] A portrait document on the same size paper, with the
+source pages stacked vertically.
+
+\item [Definition:]\hspace{1pt}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\target{\magstepminus2}{8.5in}{11in}
+\source{\magstep0}{11in}{8.5in}
+\targetlayout{topbottom}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{namelist}
+
+\end{description}
+
+
+\section{True Dimensions}
+
+\TeX\ lets you use `true' dimensions, as in
+\begin{verbatim}
+    \topmargin 1truein
+    \setlength{\topmargin}{1truein}
+\end{verbatim}
+This sets the length to 1 inch
+as it appears on the page, no matter what the magnification.
+
+Once you use `true' dimensions, it is impossible to change the
+magnification of your document, and hence it is almost impossible
+to use 2up.tex. You will get an error like:
+\begin{verbatim}
+    ! Incompatible magnification (833);
+      the previous value will be retained (2000).
+\end{verbatim}%
+
+The use of `true' dimensions might be hiding in macros or style files
+you are using. For example, Plain \TeX's "\magnification" command uses
+true dimensions; use "\mag" instead, and then set "\hsize" and
+"\vsize" appropriately scaled. If you can't find the culprit `true'
+dimension in your document or input files, try putting this on the
+(very) first line of your document:
+\begin{verbatim}
+    \mag 143 \voffset 1truein \mag 1000
+\end{verbatim}
+
+You will get the error listed above wherever true dimensions are used
+(and in some other places as well).
+
+
+\section{Page Cross-References}
+
+  Page cross-references (e.g., in an index or table of contents) will not be
+accurate with "2up.tex", because finished pages are not immediately shipped
+out. This can also cause problems with some special \LaTeX\ styles that have
+multiple ".aux" files (e.g., for each chapter).
+
+  To get better, but not perfect, page cross-references, try putting the
+command
+\begin{verbatim}
+    \TwoupWrites
+\end{verbatim}
+at the beginning of your document, after inputting "2up.tex". This is good for
+drafts, and may fix problems with \LaTeX\ styles that have multiple ".aux"
+files. "\TwoupWrites" makes "\write" and "\read" "\immediate", if you know
+what that means. It might cause problems of its own, but try it and see.
+
+  To get accurate page cross-references:
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item Run the job without "2up.tex", until all cross-references
+are properly resolved. Run any index utility at this point.
+
+\item Run the job ONE MORE TIME with "2up.tex"; it will use the
+correct cross-references from the previous runs. (In \LaTeX\ documents,
+it is useful at this point to include the "\nofiles" command, so that
+the correct cross-references are preserved.)
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\section{Booklets\label{booklet}}
+
+Here are some special considerations for making booklets:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+
+\item  Use the "booklet" target layout if your printer or copier cannot print
+two
+sides directly. "2up.tex" prints out the ``tops'' of the pages, and then the
+``bottoms'', so that you can copy or print on both sides by doing one side,
+flipping the output over, and doing the other side.
+
+\item Use "Booklet" if your printer or copier can print directly on two sides.
+
+\item You must have enough memory and box registers to hold all the pages in
+the document. A Big\TeX\ should be able to handle at least a 32-page booklet.
+
+\item Sometimes booklet printing is part of the design of a document, rather
+than an afterthought. In this case, you should set up the margins for the
+target half-page rather than using "2up.tex" to scale the document. For
+example, if using \LaTeX, 8.5x11 inch paper, \LaTeX's twoside style option,
+and headings, try the following page parameter changes:
+\begin{verbatim}
+    \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{-0.2in}
+    \setlength{\evensidemargin}{-0.5in}
+    \setlength{\textwidth}{4.2in}
+    \setlength{\textheight}{6.5in}
+    \setlength{\topmargin}{-.4in}
+\end{verbatim}
+If you do this, "2up.tex" isn't adjusting margins or scaling the
+document. You coould therefore get by without "2up.tex" by using "dvidvi".
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{Using dvidvi\label{dvidvi}}
+
+  With the "dvidvi" layout option, "2up.tex" takes care of adjusting the
+margins, and you then use "dvidvi" to arrange the pages in a two-up
+format. The advantage is that cross referencing comes out right.
+The disadvantage is that it involves one more step.
+
+Start by \TeX ing your document with "2up.tex" and the "dvidvi" layout option.
+Then run the dvi file through "dvidvi". Specify the offsets for "dvidvi" at
+the middle of the page. E.g., for
+a side-by-side layout on 8.5x11in paper, use
+\begin{verbatim}
+    dvidvi '2:0,1(5.5in,0in)' foo bar
+\end{verbatim}
+For other paper sizes, replace "5.5in" by half the target paper width. For the
+"topbottom" layout, reverse the dimensions, e.g.,
+(0in,5.5in). For booklet printing, see the
+the documentation for "dvidvi".
+
+
+\section{Compatibility\label{compatibility}}
+
+  These macros should work with most \TeX\ macro packages, except for
+the following possible but unlikely compatibility problems:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+
+\item If you use a macro package other than \LaTeX\ that does unusual things
+to end a document and/or that modifies the definition of "\end", you may
+find that the last page is nor printed or that an extra page with headings
+is inserted at the end of the document. This is fixable on a case-by-case
+basis. See the redefinition of "\end" in "2up.tex".
+
+\item "2up.tex" might not work if you meddle with \TeX's "\shipout" primitive
+after loading "2up.tex".
+
+\item If the first page of the source document is not on the first two-up
+target
+page (possible, for example, with two-sided printing and the "booklet"
+option, but generally unlikely), "\special"'s that come at the beginning
+of the document also do not get onto the first page of output. This can mess
+up "\special"'s for landscape printing or
+including a PostScript header file. In this case, you have to specify
+these things as command line options when using your dvi driver.
+
+\end{itemize}
+
+
+\section{Changes}
+\begin{namelist}{V0.9xxx}
+\raggedright
+
+\item [V0.9a] Everything redone. Too many differences to point out.
+
+\item [V0.9b] Interface redone again. "booklet" option added.
+
+\item [V0.9c] Pages ship out a little earlier. A few bugs fixed.
+
+  Parameters "\pageseplength" and "\pagesepthickness" added.
+
+\item [V0.9d] Fixed bug with "\twoupclearpage" and "\twoupeject".
+
+\item [V0.9e] Made pages be counted (from dvi driver's viewpoint) by the
+physical page number.
+
+\item [V0.9f] Parameter "\pagesepoffset" added, and "\pagesepthickness"
+changed to "\pagesepwidth".
+
+\item [V1.0]  None. Just seemed seemed like it was time to call it 1.0
+
+\item [V1.1] Added "Booklet" and "dvidvi" target layouts.
+
+  "\hoffset" and "\voffset" in source document now have expected effect.
+
+\item[V1.2] Fixed incompatibility problem with AmS-\TeX/AmS-\LaTeX.
+
+  Added "\TwoupWrites" command.
+
+\end{namelist}
+\end{document}
+%% END 2up.doc
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/fancybox.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/fancybox.doc
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0bd8aced4ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/fancybox.doc
@@ -0,0 +1,1279 @@
+%% BEGIN fancybox.doc
+%%
+%% COPYRIGHT 1992, by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu.
+%% For copying restrictions, see fancybox.sty.
+%%
+%% Documentation for fancybox.sty.
+%% Run through LaTeX, with or without the NFSS.
+%%
+%% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of
+%% the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.2 of this license
+%% or (at your option) any later version.  The latest version of this
+%% license is in:
+%% 
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% 
+%% and version 1.2 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version
+%% 1999/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%%
+\def\FileVersion{1.3}
+\def\FileDate{2000/09/19}
+%%
+%% This creates two temporary files: \jobname.ex1 and \jobname.tmp
+
+\documentclass[12pt]{article}
+
+\makeatletter
+
+%% INPUT FANCYBOX.STY HERE TO CHECK FILE VERSION.
+
+\usepackage{fancybox}
+
+\ifx\FileVersion\fileversion\else
+  \@latexerr{Fancybox style file and documentation do not have the same
+    version}\@ehd
+\fi
+
+%% DATES, VERSIONS AND TITLES:
+
+\def\expanddate#1/#2/#3/{\year=#1 \month=#2 \day=#3}
+\begingroup
+  \expandafter\expanddate\filedate/
+  \xdef\thefiledate{\today}
+\endgroup
+
+\title{Documentation for fancybox.sty:\\
+  Box tips and tricks for \LaTeX}
+\author{Timothy Van Zandt\\ Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu}
+\date{Version \fileversion\\ \thefiledate}
+
+\def\@maketitle{%
+ \begin{center}
+   {\Large\bf \@title \par}
+   \vskip 1.2em {\lineskip .5em
+   \begin{tabular}[t]{c}\@author\end{tabular}\par}
+   \vskip .8em {\@date}%
+  \end{center}
+  \par
+  \vskip .5em}
+
+%% PAGE STYLE:
+
+\pagestyle{myheadings}
+\if@twoside
+  \markboth{Documentation for fancybox.sty}%
+    {Version \fileversion, \thefiledate}%
+\else
+  \markright{fancybox.sty, Version \fileversion}
+\fi
+
+%% PAGE PARAMETERS:
+
+% Paragraphs are marked by large space rather than indentation:
+\parindent 0pt
+\parskip 7pt plus 1pt minus 1pt
+
+\setlength{\topmargin}{0pt}
+\setlength{\headheight}{12pt}        % height of running head
+\setlength{\headsep}{30pt}           % distance between header and text
+\setlength{\textheight}{8.2in}       % height of text on page
+
+%% TABLE OF CONTENTS
+
+\newskip\myskip
+
+\def\tableofcontents{%
+  \par\vfill
+  \begin{quote}
+    \begin{center} \Large\bf Contents \end{center}
+    \def\numberline##1{\hbox to 0pt{\hss##1\hskip 1em}}%
+    \let\oldaddvspace\addvspace
+    \def\addvspace##1{%
+      \myskip##1\relax
+      \oldaddvspace{.5\myskip}}
+    \@starttoc{toc}%
+  \end{quote}
+  \thispagestyle{empty}
+  \vfill
+  \clearpage}
+
+
+%% VERBATIM HACKS:
+
+\VerbatimFootnotes
+
+% Short meta (works in verbatim. Can't use < for other purposes.
+\catcode`\<=13 \def<#1>{{\rm\it #1\/}}    % <meta> (works in verbatim)
+
+% Short verbatim. " can appear in verbatim environments.
+\def\temp{\Verb"}
+\expandafter\def\expandafter\dospecials\expandafter{\dospecials\do\"}
+\catcode`\"=13
+\let"\temp
+
+% Verbatim item:
+\newcommand{\vitem}{\SaveVerb[{\def\bf{}\item[\UseVerb{\MyTemp}]}]{\MyTemp}}
+
+%% EXAMPLES:
+
+\setlength{\fboxsep}{6pt}
+
+\begin{VerbatimOut}{\jobname.ex1}
+% 1. Save example verbatim to \jobname.tmp,
+% 2. Input verbatim with \catcode`\"=14 (" is a comment).
+% 3. Input again with \catcode\`"=9 (" is ignored).
+
+\renewcommand{\EveryVerbatimLine}[2]{}
+
+\renewcommand{\EveryVerbOutLine}[2]{}
+
+\newcommand{\BeginExample}{%
+  \VerbatimEnvironment\begin{VerbatimOut}{\jobname.tmp}}
+
+\newcommand{\EndExample}{%
+  \end{VerbatimOut}%.
+  \renewcommand{\EveryVerbatimLine}{}%
+  \renewcommand{\EveryVerbatimCodes}{\catcode`\"=14}%
+  \LVerbatimInput{\jobname.tmp}%
+  \catcode`\"=9}
+
+\newenvironment{example}{\BeginExample}{\EndExample
+  \begin{center}\input{\jobname.tmp}\end{center}}
+
+\newenvironment{example*}{\BeginExample}%
+  {\EndExample \input{\jobname.tmp}}
+
+\newenvironment{example**}{\BeginExample}%
+  {\EndExample \globaldefs=1 \input{\jobname.tmp}}
+
+\end{VerbatimOut}
+
+\input{\jobname.ex1}
+
+%% END PREAMBLE:
+\makeatother
+
+\begin{document}
+\setcounter{page}{0}
+\maketitle
+\begin{quote}
+"fancybox.sty", together with its documentation, gives extensive answers to
+and solutions for many questions about how to frame or rotate this or that in
+\LaTeX. It also contains commands for shadow, double and oval frames.
+\end{quote}
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\section{Fancy frames}
+
+"fancybox.sty" has five variants of \LaTeX's "\fbox" command:
+\begin{quote}\raggedright
+"\shadowbox", "\doublebox", "\ovalbox" (with "\thinlines") and "\Ovalbox"
+(with "\thicklines").
+\end{quote}
+Here are examples:\footnote{In this documentation, the default value of
+"\fboxsep" has been changed from 3pt to 6pt.}
+\begin{example}
+  \shadowbox{\large\bf New Glarus Birdwatch}
+\end{example}
+\begin{example}
+  \doublebox{\large\bf New Glarus Birdwatch}
+\end{example}
+\begin{example}
+  \ovalbox{\large\bf New Glarus Birdwatch}
+\end{example}
+\begin{example}
+  \Ovalbox{\large\bf New Glarus Birdwatch}
+\end{example}
+
+The distance between the box and the frame is "\fboxsep", as with \LaTeX's
+"\fbox" command. The commands use other parameters as well:
+\begin{description}
+\vitem"\shadowbox" The width of the frame is "\fboxrule" (the same as with
+"\fbox"). The width of the shadow is "\shadowsize" (default: "4pt").
+
+\vitem"\doublebox" The width of the inner frame is .75"\fboxrule", and the
+width of the outer frame is 1.5"\fboxrule". The distance between the two
+frames is 1.5"\fboxrule" plus .5pt.
+
+\vitem"\ovalbox" The width of the frame is set by the "\thinlines"
+declaration. The diameter of the corner arcs is set with the "\cornersize"
+command.
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \cornersize{<num>}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+sets the diameter of the corners arcs to <num> times the lessor of the width
+and height of the box.
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \cornersize*{<dim>}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+sets the diameter of the corner arcs to <dim>. This is all approximate,
+because \LaTeX\ has a limited range of arc sizes to choose from. The default
+is
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \cornersize{.5}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+
+\vitem"\Ovalbox" This is like "\ovalbox", except that the width of the lines
+is set by the "\thicklines" declaration.
+\end{description}
+
+There are no analogs to \LaTeX's "\framebox" command, which has various
+optional arguments not supported by "\fbox". You can get the exact same
+functionality by putting the argument of the above framing commands in a
+"\makebox".
+
+There is also a variant "\fancyoval" of \LaTeX's "\oval" picture object. The
+difference is that "\oval" always makes the diameter of the corner arcs as
+large as possible, and "\fancyoval" uses the "\cornersize" command to set the
+diameter.
+
+\section{A short course on boxes}
+
+\begingroup\sloppy
+The "\shadowbox", "\doublebox", "\ovalbox" and "\Ovalbox" commands described
+in the previous section are examples of LR-box commands, meaning that their
+argument is processed in LR mode. \LaTeX\ LR-box commands include "\mbox",
+"\makebox", "\fbox", "\framebox", "\sbox" and "\savebox". All the PSTricks
+commands whose argument is text are LR-box commands, including, e.g, the
+framing, rotating, scaling and positioning commands, and some of the node
+commands. Any rotation command is an LR-box command.
+
+\endgroup
+
+The purpose of the rest of this documentation is to provide answers to, and
+solutions for, frequently asked questions about using LR-box commands with
+\LaTeX. I will use "\fbox" for the leading example of a box framing
+command,\footnote{In the examples using "\fbox", be aware that the default
+value of "\fboxsep" has been changed in this documentation from 3pt to 6pt.}
+and "\rotateleft" for the leading example of a box rotation command.
+("fancybox.sty" does not contain a "\rotateleft" command, as this must be
+implemented via "\special"'s, but there are numerous box-rotation style files
+around.) However, most of what is said here applies to any LR-box command.
+
+In each LR-box command, the text is processed in restricted horizontal mode,
+which is referred to as ``LR-mode'' in Lamport's {\em \LaTeX: User's Guide and
+Reference Manual}. In restricted horizontal mode, the input, consisting of
+regular characters and boxes, is made into one (long or short) line. There is
+no line-breaking, nor can there be vertical mode material such as an entire
+displayed equation. However, the fact that you can include another box means
+that this isn't really a restriction.
+
+For one thing, alignment environments such as \LaTeX's "tabular" are just
+boxes, and thus present no problem. Picture environments and the LR-box
+commands themselves are also just boxes. Entire paragraphs or other vertical
+mode material such as displayed equations can be nested in a "\parbox" or
+"minipage".
+
+\section{Defining LR-box environments}
+
+To frame a "minipage", you have to write
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \fbox{%
+    \begin{minipage}{3in}
+      blah
+    \end{minipage}}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+You might want to define an environment "fminipage" that frames its contents,
+but you can't use
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \newenvironment{fminipage}%
+    {\fbox{\begin{minipage}}%
+    {\end{minipage}}}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+because the braces are not balanced in the definition.
+
+"fancybox.sty" contains an "Sbox" environment that makes it easy to define
+your own LR-box environments. It is a variant of \LaTeX's "\sbox" command that
+saves the contents of the environment in a storage bin that can be retrieved
+with the command "\TheSbox".\footnote{The difference between
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \begin{Sbox}
+    blah
+  \end{Sbox}
+  \TheSbox
+\end{LVerbatim}
+and
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \newsavebox{\mybox}
+  \sbox{\mybox}{blah}
+  \usebox{\mybox}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+is that "Sbox" saves the contents globally, and "\TheSbox" erases the contents
+globally.}
+For example, here is a framed minipage:
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \begin{Sbox}
+    \begin{minipage}{3in}
+      blah
+    \end{minipage}
+  \end{Sbox}
+  \fbox{\TheSbox}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+and here is an "fminipage" environment that works:
+\begin{example**}
+  \newenvironment{fminipage}%
+    {\begin{Sbox}\begin{minipage}}%
+    {\end{minipage}\end{Sbox}\fbox{\TheSbox}}
+\end{example**}
+Let's see that it really works:
+\begin{example}
+  \begin{fminipage}{2in}
+    Since the former doesn't use braces to delimit
+    the contents of the box, $\ldots$
+  \end{fminipage}
+\end{example}
+
+
+\section{Math}
+
+In-line math, or pieces of a displayed equation (as opposed to a whole
+equation), are horizontal mode material, but most LR-box commands switch out
+of math mode when they occur in math mode. Thus, you have to explicitly switch
+back in to math mode when desired.\footnote{This is {\em not} true for the
+PSTricks LR-box commands.}
+For example:
+\begin{example}
+  $x + y = \fbox{$\Omega$}$
+\end{example}
+
+You also have to explicitly write
+\begin{quote}
+  "\scriptstyle", "\scriptscriptstyle" or "\displaystyle"
+\end{quote}
+if you want one of these special math styles. For example, here I will frame
+an equation, but not the equation number:
+\begin{example*}
+  \begin{equation}
+    \fbox{$\displaystyle
+      \int_{\Omega_0} \zeta(\omega) d\omega
+      \geq \bar{r}$}
+  \end{equation}
+\end{example*}
+
+Entire displayed equations or "eqnarray" environments work differently because
+they are vertical mode material. Thus, they have to go inside a "\parbox" or
+"minipage". E.g.,
+\begin{example*}
+  \newlength{\mylength}
+  \[
+    \setlength{\fboxsep}{15pt}
+    \setlength{\mylength}{\linewidth}
+    \addtolength{\mylength}{-2\fboxsep}
+    \addtolength{\mylength}{-2\fboxrule}
+    \fbox{%
+      \parbox{\mylength}{
+        \setlength{\abovedisplayskip}{0pt}
+        \setlength{\belowdisplayskip}{0pt}
+        \begin{equation}
+          x + y = z
+        \end{equation}}}
+  \]
+\end{example*}
+The outer "\[" "\]" are just used to display the boxed equation, rather than
+actually switch into math mode. Note how I set the width of the "\parbox" so
+that the displayed box would exactly have width "\linewidth".\footnote{That is
+what "\mylength" is for. It is better to define a single scratch length that
+you reuse rather than creating a new one each time.}
+
+ I also set the display skips to "0pt" and increased the size of "\fboxsep" so
+that I would have the same distance all around between the equation and the
+frame.
+
+This is again a mouthful, and so I might instead define:\footnote{The reason
+for using "\minipage" instead of "\begin{minipage}", and so on, is that with
+AmS-\LaTeX, "\begin" and "\end" cannot appear in the definition of a new
+equation environment.}
+\begin{example**}
+  \newenvironment{FramedEqn}%
+    {\setlength{\fboxsep}{15pt}
+      \setlength{\mylength}{\linewidth}%
+      \addtolength{\mylength}{-2\fboxsep}%
+      \addtolength{\mylength}{-2\fboxrule}%
+      \Sbox
+      \minipage{\mylength}%
+         \setlength{\abovedisplayskip}{0pt}%
+         \setlength{\belowdisplayskip}{0pt}%
+         \equation}%
+    {\endequation\endminipage\endSbox
+      \[\fbox{\TheSbox}\]}
+\end{example**}
+"fancybox.sty" doesn't bother defining any such environments, because there
+are too many possible designs. But let's see if the one above works:
+\begin{example*}
+  \begin{FramedEqn}
+    \Rightarrow P\sim\xi(P_\gamma)- \frac{1}{3}
+  \end{FramedEqn}
+\end{example*}
+
+"fancybox.sty" contains a "Beqnarray" environment, which is like the
+"eqnarray" environment but it is not vertical mode material. Instead, it
+produces a box just large enough to hold all the equations. For example:
+\begin{example}
+  \fbox{%
+    \begin{Beqnarray*}
+      x & = & y\\
+      y & > & x \\
+      \int_4^5 f(x)dx & = & \sum_{i\in F} x_i
+    \end{Beqnarray*}}
+\end{example}
+The unstarred version produces standard equation numbers on the right (even
+with the "leqno" style option and AmS-\LaTeX). It might not work with special
+equation numbering macros.
+
+
+\section{Floats}\label{floats}
+
+A common mistake is to put a whole "table", "figure" or other float
+environment inside an LR-box command. Instead, you should put everything that
+is {\em inside} the environment (including the "\caption", if you want that
+boxed too) inside a "minipage" of the desired width, and then put the
+"minipage" inside the LR-box command.
+
+For example:
+\begin{example*}
+  \begin{table}[h]
+    \begin{center}
+      \fbox{%
+        \begin{minipage}{.8\textwidth}
+          \begin{center}
+            \begin{tabular}{rl}
+              foo & bar
+            \end{tabular}
+          \end{center}
+          \caption{A table of foo and bar.}
+        \end{minipage}}
+    \end{center}
+  \end{table}
+\end{example*}
+Note how I had to use "center" twice: once to center the framed box, and again
+to center the stuff inside the box.
+
+That is a mouthful, and so I might define a "FramedTable" environment like the
+following, which sets the size of the "minipage" so that the framed box is
+exactly the width of the page (no need for the first "center" environment this
+time):
+\begin{example**}
+  \newenvironment{FramedTable}%
+    {\begin{table}[h]
+      \begin{Sbox}%
+      \setlength{\mylength}{\textwidth}%
+      \addtolength{\mylength}{-2\fboxsep}%
+      \addtolength{\mylength}{-2\fboxrule}%
+      \begin{minipage}{\mylength}}%
+    {\end{minipage}\end{Sbox}\fbox{\TheSbox}\end{table}}%
+\end{example**}
+Now let's see if it works:
+\begin{example*}
+  \begin{FramedTable}
+    \begin{center}
+      \begin{tabular}{rl}
+        foo & bar
+      \end{tabular}
+    \end{center}
+    \caption{A table of foo and bar.}
+  \end{FramedTable}
+\end{example*}
+
+The most common reason to want to rotate an entire float, caption and all, is
+to put it on a page by itself in landscape mode, centered both horizontally
+and vertically. Compared to the table framing we did above, we just have to
+replace "\fbox" by our box rotation command (e.g., "\rotateleft" or whatever),
+set the width of the minipage to "\textheight" (if you want to use the full
+size of the page), and use the float position specifier "[p]". "fancybox.sty"
+contains an environment,
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \begin{landfloat}{<float>}{<rotation command>}
+    ...
+  \end{landfloat}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+that automates this. It has two arguments: the name of the floating
+environment, and your rotation command. For example, if "\rotateleft{foo}"
+rotates "foo" by 90 degrees, and you want a landscape mode "table", then try
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \begin{landfloat}{table}{\rotateleft}
+    ...
+  \end{landfloat}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+If the whole document is in landscape mode, then "landfloat" gives you a
+portrait-mode float---good for a table that is too tall to fit in landscape
+mode.
+
+If you don't add a caption to a float, it doesn't matter much what floating
+environment you use (e.g., "table", "figure" or whatever). Thus, you can put
+anything in a landscape float. For example, suppose I have a very wide
+equation. Then I can write:
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \begin{landfloat}{table}{\rotateleft}
+    \begin{equation}
+      ...
+    \end{equation}
+  \end{landfloat}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+"fancybox.sty" defines a generic caption, "\GenericCaption", that doesn't
+affect the numbering of floats, doesn't make an entry in a list of floats, and
+doesn't add anything to the argument you give. I could have used this if I
+wanted to add a caption to the previous example.
+
+\section{Center, flushleft and flushright}
+
+There are two ways to box a "center", "flushleft" or "flushright" environment.
+If you have long lines and you want \TeX\ to do the line breaking, then put
+the environment inside a "minipage".\footnote{List and other such environments
+work best inside a "minipage" environment rather than a "\parbox".} If you
+have short lines and you want the frame to adjust itself to the size of the
+longest line, then use "fancybox.sty"'s
+\begin{quote}
+  "Bcenter", "Bflushleft" or "Bflushright"
+\end{quote}
+environment instead.
+
+These are basically just "tabular" environments with a single column, and so
+each line should end with "\\", or "\\["<dim>"]" to insert extra space, and
+the text on each line must be balanced. Also, each line is sitting in its own
+group, and so, e.g., if you want to change the font for the whole environment,
+you should do this before the environment rather than after.
+Like the "tabular" environment, the box that is produced has the baseline at
+the center, unless you include an optional argument "[t]" to align the box
+with the top line or "[b]" to align the box with the bottom line.
+
+For example:
+\begin{example}
+  \setlength{\fboxsep}{10pt}%
+  \fbox{%
+    \begin{Bcenter}
+      Love of life\\
+      and other short stories\\
+      by Policarpa Salabarrieta
+  \end{Bcenter}}
+\end{example}
+Compare this with:
+\begin{example}
+  \setlength{\fboxsep}{10pt}%
+  \fbox{%
+    \begin{minipage}{6cm}
+    \begin{center}
+      Love of life and other short stories
+      by Policarpa Salabarrieta
+    \end{center}
+    \end{minipage}}
+\end{example}
+
+In either case, if we want the resulting framed box centered, we have to
+include it inside another "center" environment.
+
+Here is another example:
+\begin{example}
+  My list: \fbox{%
+    \begin{Bflushleft}[b]
+      Galanga root\\
+      Coconut\\
+      Tempeh
+    \end{Bflushleft}}
+\end{example}
+
+
+\section{Lists}
+
+There are again two ways to box a list environment such as
+\begin{quote}
+  "itemize", "enumerate" or "description".
+\end{quote}
+You can put it in a "minipage" of pre-determined size and let \TeX\ do the
+line breaking, or you can use
+\begin{quote}
+  "Bitemize", "Benumerate" or "Bdescription"
+\end{quote}
+instead, and let the box adjust to the size of the longest line.
+
+For example.
+\begin{example}
+  \fbox{%
+    \begin{Bitemize}
+      \item Groceries
+      \item Clean hamster cages
+      \item Pick up Peter
+    \end{Bitemize}}
+\end{example}
+
+ Most of the usual list parameters are irrelevant except for "\itemsep" and
+"\labelsep". These environments are also based on the "tabular" environment,
+and so each item should be balanced text. You can't write "\vspace{4pt}"
+either, but you can insert an extra amount of space before an item by writing
+"\item(4pt)" (or "\item(4pt)[label]" if you have a label). Also, you can break
+lines within an item using "\\" or "\\[<dim>]". For example:
+\begin{example}
+  \fbox{%
+    \begin{Bdescription}
+      \item[David] Groceries
+      \item[Eli]  Hamster cages\\
+                  Surreal numbers
+      \item(3pt)[Doris] Pick up Peter
+    \end{Bdescription}}
+\end{example}
+
+These environments also have an optional argument, "[t]" to align the box with
+the top line, and "[b]" to align the box with the bottom line.
+\begin{example}
+  To do:
+  \fbox{\setlength{\itemsep}{0pt}%
+    \begin{Benumerate}[t]
+      \item Groceries
+      \item Hamster cages
+      \item Pick up Peter
+    \end{Benumerate}}
+\end{example}
+
+There is also a generic "\Blist" command that is analogous to \LaTeX's
+"\list".  It has the same two obligatory arguments, plus a third optional
+"[t]" or "[b]" argument for changing the alignment.
+
+\section{Superimposing boxes}
+
+The command
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \boxput*(<x>,<y>){<LR stuff1>}{<LR stuff2>}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+puts <LR stuff1> either behind (the default) or in front of (with the "*") <LR
+stuff2>.\footnote{You will only notice the difference between "\boxput" and
+"\boxput*" if you are using color implemented by "\special"'s} The resulting
+box has the dimensions of <LR stuff2>.
+
+The coordinates "(<x>,<y>)" determine where the center of <LR stuff1> is
+positioned. For example, "(0,0)" puts it at the center of <LR stuff2>, "(0,1)"
+puts it at the center-top, and "(-1,-1)" puts it in the bottom-left corner.
+
+More generally, the origin of the coordinate system is at the center of <LR
+stuff2>, one unit in the vertical direction is half the vertical size of <LR
+stuff2>, and one unit in the horizontal direction is half the width of <LR
+stuff2>. Thus, <x> and <y> should always be numbers (without units such as
+"pt" or "cm"), with one exception: If <y> is "b" or "B", <LR stuff1> is
+positioned vertically at the baseline of <LR stuff2>. "(<x>,<y>)" is
+optional---the default is "(0,0)".
+
+Except for the funny coordinate system, "\boxput" is like the "\put" command
+in a "picture". In particular, you can use "\makebox" in <LR stuff1> to
+fine-tune the positioning, and <LR-stuff1> can contain a "picture"
+environment.
+
+You might use "\boxput" to put a ``water mark'' in the background of a box, or
+to put a label next to a box, when you don't want this label to take up any
+space. Here is a lazy example:
+\begin{example}
+  \boxput{\makebox(0,0){\Huge Censored!}}{\parbox{3in}{%
+    The origin of the coordinate system is at the center of
+    {\em LR stuff2}, and one unit in the x-direction
+    is half the width of {\em LR stuff2}.}}
+\end{example}
+
+This would be a lot more interesting using PSTricks, with ``Censored!'' in the
+foreground, rotated 30 degrees, and red:
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \boxput*{\rput{30}{\Huge\red Censored}}{\parbox{3in}{%
+    blah blah}}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+
+Here is another example using PSTricks:
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \newcommand{\titledframe}[2]{%
+    \boxput*(0,1){\psframebox*{#1}}%
+      {\psframebox[framesep=12pt]{#2}}}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+\newcommand{\titledframe}[2]{%
+  \boxput*(0,1){#1}%
+    {\fboxsep=12pt \fbox{#2}}}
+The following example illustrated roughly how it works, but ``My title'' does
+not blot out the frame behind it because this documentation does not use
+PSTricks. \begin{example}
+  \titledframe{My title}{%
+    \parbox{2in}{The title is superimposed
+      on the top part of the frame.}}
+\end{example}
+
+\section{Framing a whole page}
+
+The commands
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \fancyput*(<x>,<y>){<LR stuff>}
+  \thisfancyput*(<x>,<y>){<LR stuff>}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+are pretty much like "\put" commands in a \LaTeX\ picture environment whose
+origin is 1 inch down and to the right from the top left corner of the
+page.\footnote{Don't blame me for \TeX's peculiar 1 inch margins.} The only
+differences are that (i) that any LR-mode material is permitted (including
+\LaTeX\ "picture" environment, of course), (ii) the coordinate is optional
+"(0pt,0pt)" is substituted by default), and (iii) if the coordinate is
+included, you {\em must} specify the units.
+
+"\thisfancyput" affects only the current page, and is a global declaration
+(analogous to "\thispagestyle").
+
+If you include the optional "*", then the command adds to, rather than
+replaces, other things that have been inserted with "\fancyput" or
+"\thisfancyput".
+
+These commands are particularly useful for framing a page, because you can get
+a frame that is, e.g., 1 inch from each side of the physical page without
+having to worry about what margins you are using for the document. Here is an
+example:
+\begin{example*}
+  \thisfancyput(3.25in,-4.5in){%
+    \setlength{\unitlength}{1in}\fancyoval(7,9.5)}
+\end{example*}
+You could also use "\fancyput" to add some kind of ``watermark'' or background
+image (e.g., a light gray ``DRAFT'').
+
+There are other commands that directly frame or in some other way box the page
+of text:
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \fancypage{<cmds1>}{<cmds2>}
+  \thisfancypage{<cmds1>}{<cmds2>}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+
+Each finished page, before adding the headers and footers, (and thus having
+width and height "\textwidth" and "\textheight", is boxed with
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  <cmds1>{<pagebox>}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+Thus, <cmds1> should be, or should end with, a command whose argument can be a
+box, such as "\fbox" or "\rotateleft".
+
+Then the headers and footers are added, using the new width of the page, and
+this is boxed with
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  <cmds2>{<pagebox>}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+The same rules apply to <cmds2> as to <cmds1>.
+
+Here is an example:
+\begin{example*}
+  \thisfancypage{%
+    \setlength{\fboxsep}{8pt}%
+    \setlength{\shadowsize}{8pt}%
+    \shadowbox}{}
+\end{example*}
+
+{\bf Warning:} The commands described in this section change \LaTeX's output
+routine, and may not work with document styles that do the same. Also, bad
+arguments can cause serious errors with uninformative error messages.
+
+\section{Switching to landscape mode midstream}
+
+The most common reason to switch to landscape mode midstream is to rotate a
+float, such as a table or figure. This was discussed in Section \ref{floats}.
+
+If you want to rotate one or more pages, without rotating the headers and
+footers, use the
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \begin{LandScape}{<cmd>}
+    ...
+  \end{LandScape}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+environment. <cmd> should be the command for rotating the page 90 degrees to
+the left or right. (E.g., "\rotateleft", or "\rotate[l]".)
+
+If you want to rotate the headers, footers and margins as well, use the
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \begin{Landscape}{<paperwidth>}{<paperheight>}{<cmd>}
+    ...
+  \end{Landscape}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+environment (the small "s" makes the difference) to rotate the pages left
+(counterclockwise), and use the "Landscape*" environment (same arguments) to
+rotate the pages right (clockwise). The three arguments are the width of the
+paper, the height of the paper, and the rotation command you are using. For
+example, if I have a portrait mode document using the US 8.5in by 11in paper,
+and if "\rotateleft{foo}" rotates "foo" 90 degrees counterclockwise, then I
+can write
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \begin{Landscape}{8.5in}{11in}{\rotateleft}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+
+You can use "\LandScape", "\Landscape" and "\Landscape*", rather then the
+"LandScape", "Landscape" and "Landscape*" environments, if you want the rest
+of the document to be in landscape mode.
+
+If your document is being printed in landscape mode, then these environments 
+switch to portrait mode.
+
+For example, suppose I have a landscape mode document, and I want to switch to
+portrait mode for the rest of the document, rotating the pages to the
+``right'' with "\rotateright". Then I would write
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \Landscape*{11in}{8.5in}{\rotateright}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+
+These environments switch the text width and height, leaving the margins
+exactly as they were before. It is quite possible that you want to make other
+changes to the page parameters after switching to landscape mode, but as
+Lamport points out the \LaTeX\ {\em User's Guide and Reference Manual}, this
+generally doesn't work right in the middle of the document. "fancybox.sty" has
+a command "\UsePageParameters" which gets around this. It should be used right
+after you change the page parameters (and the page parameter changes should
+come right after the beginning of the landscape environment, or "\clearpage").
+
+{\bf Warning:} The commands and environments described in this section change
+\LaTeX's output routine, and may not work with document styles that do the
+same. Also, bad arguments can cause serious errors with uninformative error
+messages.
+
+\section{Verbatim}
+
+If you try to frame some verbatim text by typing
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \fbox{%
+    \begin{minipage}{5cm}
+      \begin{verbatim}
+        \My \Program \Listing
+        if { foo } { bar } fi
+      \end{verbatim}
+    \end{minipage}}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+you will get nonsense at best. This is because the argument to "\fbox" is read
+before the "\begin{verbatim}" is processed. But then it is too late for \TeX\
+to go back and interpret the contents of the verbatim environment literally
+rather than as special \TeX\ commands and characters.
+
+One solution is to use the "Sbox" environment:
+\begin{example}
+  \begin{Sbox}
+  \begin{minipage}{5cm}
+  \begin{verbatim}
+  \My \Program \Listing
+  if { foo } { bar } fi
+  \end{verbatim}
+  \end{minipage}
+  \end{Sbox}
+  \setlength{\fboxsep}{8pt}
+  \fbox{\TheSbox}
+\end{example}
+
+"fancybox.sty" also contains a command that ``fixes'' \LaTeX's LR-box commands
+for use with verbatim text:
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \VerbBox{<cmd>}{<LR stuff>}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+This is like
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  <cmd>{<LR stuff>}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+but <LR stuff> can contain verbatim text.\footnote{Or other tricks that
+involve "\catcode" changes, as occurs with some foreign language macros.} For
+example:
+\begin{example}
+  \VerbBox{\fbox}{\verb+\foo{bar}+}
+\end{example}
+
+For footnotes, put the command "\VerbatimFootnotes" in the preamble, and then
+you can use verbatim commands or environments in the argument of "\footnote".
+This is an optional feature because it might conflict with somebody else's
+modification of the footnote system.
+
+If you try to define your own framed verbatim environment with
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \newenvironment{FramedVerb}%
+    {\begin{Sbox}\begin{minipage}{5in}\begin{verbatim}}
+    {\end{verbatim}\end{minipage}\end{Sbox}
+      \setlength{\fboxsep}{8pt}\fbox{\TheSbox}}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+and then type
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \begin{FramedVerb}
+    if { foo } { bar } fi
+  \end{FramedVerb}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+you will again run into trouble because after the "\begin{verbatim}", \LaTeX\
+is searching for the literal string "\end{verbatim}" as the end of the
+verbatim text. It just skips right over the "\end{FramedVerb}" and may well
+continue to the end of the file or until it throws up.
+
+"fancybox.sty" contains some verbatim environments that get around this
+problem and that have other advantages for LR-boxing verbatim listings, when
+compared to the standard \LaTeX\ "verbatim" environment. Admittedly, many of
+their special features have nothing to do with boxes.
+
+Here are the basic verbatim environments:
+\begin{description}
+  \vitem"Verbatim" Works pretty much like \LaTeX's "verbatim".
+  \vitem"LVerbatim" Like "Verbatim", but "list" rather than "trivlist" is used
+to display the listing, and so it is indented from the left margin. (This is
+what I am using for verbatim listings in this document.)
+  \vitem"BVerbatim[<pos>]" Produces a box with the same width as the longest
+verbatim line. The baseline is in the center, unless you include the optional
+argument "[t]" for alignment with the top line or "[b]" for alignment with the
+bottom line.
+  \vitem"VerbatimOut{<file>}" Writes the verbatim text to <file>.
+  \vitem"SaveVerbatim{<cmd>}" Saves the verbatim text as <cmd>. <cmd> is
+defined globally, without checking whether <cmd> is already defined. Use
+obviously innocuous names like "\MyTemp".
+\end{description}
+
+{\bf Important:} For any of these verbatim environments, or new verbatim
+environments you define yourself (see below), nothing should come after
+"\begin{Verbatim}" or before "\end{Verbatim}" on the same line --- not even
+spaces!%
+  \footnote{If you need to allow something to come before "\end{Verbatim}",
+then you have two options:
+  \begin{itemize}
+  \item Put the command "\AltGetVerbatim" in the preamble. This switches to a
+scheme where anything preceding "\end{Verbatim}" is simply ignored. This can
+cause problems if you do really weird things with active characters or other
+commands within the verbatim environment (e.g., active conditionals that are
+not balanced within a line of verbatim text), but in this case you are
+probably a good enough hacker to use the next option.
+  \item "\EndVerbatimTokens" is a token register that you can set to the
+tokens that should precede "\end{Verbatim}" on the same line, with their
+verbatim "\catcode"'s.
+  \end{itemize}}
+If you put something after "\begin{Verbatim}" on the same line, it is simply
+ignored. However, if you put something after "\end{Verbatim}" on the same
+line, or if you misspell "\end{Verbatim}", you will get an error such as
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  ! File ended while scanning use of \Verbatim.
+\end{LVerbatim}
+and the document will end at that point.
+
+You can define new verbatim environments using "\newenvironment". You just
+have to start the definition with
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \VerbatimEnvironment
+\end{LVerbatim}
+ For example, here is the framed verbatim environment we tried earlier:
+\begin{example**}
+  \newenvironment{FramedVerb}%
+    {\VerbatimEnvironment
+      \begin{Sbox}\begin{minipage}{5cm}\begin{Verbatim}}%
+    {\end{Verbatim}\end{minipage}\end{Sbox}
+      \setlength{\fboxsep}{8pt}\fbox{\TheSbox}}
+\end{example**}
+Let's give it a try:
+\begin{example}
+  \begin{FramedVerb}
+  if { foo } { bar } fi
+  \end{FramedVerb}
+\end{example}
+
+Here are three commands for inputting a whole file verbatim. The file must end
+with a new line.
+\begin{description}
+  \vitem"\VerbatimInput{<file>}" Like "\Verbatim".
+  \vitem"\LVerbatimInput{<file>}" Like "\LVerbatim".
+  \vitem"\BVerbatimInput[<pos>]{<file>}" Like "\BVerbatim".
+\end{description}
+
+Here are three commands for making use of verbatim text that has been saved to
+a command:
+\begin{description}
+  \vitem"\UseVerbatim{<cmd>}" Like "\Verbatim".
+  \vitem"\LUseVerbatim{<cmd>}" Like "\LVerbatim".
+  \vitem"\BUseVerbatim[<pos>]{<cmd>}" Like "\BVerbatim".
+\end{description}
+The "SaveVerbatim" environment and the "\UseVerbatim" commands are useful for 
+including verbatim text in the argument of "\marginpar", "\fbox" and other
+commands. For example, here is another way to define the "FramedVerb"
+environment:
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \newenvironment{FramedVerb}%
+    {\VerbatimEnvironment
+      \begin{SaveVerbatim}{\MyTemp}}%
+    {\end{SaveVerbatim}%
+      \setlength{\fboxsep}{8pt}%
+      \fbox{\begin{minipage}{5cm}\UseVerbatim{\MyTemp}
+        \end{minipage}}}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+
+Here are some verbatim commands for short-pieces of (in-line) verbatim text:
+\begin{description}
+  \vitem"\Verb<char> <literal> <char>" \ \\
+  Like \LaTeX's "\verb" command, but it will complain if it encounters a new
+line in <literal>.\footnote{Be careful that your word processing does not
+insert one for you.} For example:
+\begin{example*}
+  "\begin{quote}
+  The main use for the \Verb+SaveVerbatim+
+  environment and the \Verb+\UseVerbatim+
+  commands is to include $\ldots$
+  "\end{quote}
+\end{example*}
+  \vitem"\UseVerb{<cmd>}" Like "\UseVerbatim", but without any particular
+formatting. It is intended for including short pieces of literal text saved
+with "\SaveVerb" (below).\footnote{But it can also be used for multiple lines
+saved with the "SaveVerbatim" environment if you want to do the formatting
+yourself. E.g., try this in a tabbing environment with "\VerbatimTab"
+appropriately defined.}
+  \vitem"\SaveVerb[<whatever>]{<cmd>}<char> <literal> <char>"\ \\
+  This is like "\Verb", but it saves <literal> as <cmd>, and then returns to
+the optional argument <whatever>. Like the "SaveVerbatim" environment, it
+defines <cmd> globally without checking whether <cmd> is already defined.
+Without the optional argument, the most common use is for including verbatim
+text in a "\marginpar", "\section" or other command argument.
+
+  The optional argument can be used for special tricks. For example, all the
+listings of commands in this documentation use "\vitem" in a "description"
+environment, where "\vitem" is defined by:\footnote{The braces enclosing the
+optional argument of "\SaveVerb" prevent the "]" inside the argument from
+being mistaken for the end of the argument.}
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \newcommand{\vitem}%
+    {\SaveVerb[{\item[\UseVerb{\MyTemp}]}]{\MyTemp}}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+Whereas
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \item[\Verb"\foo"]
+\end{LVerbatim}
+would not work because after "\item" reads its argument it is too late to
+interpret "\foo" literally,
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \vitem"foo"
+\end{LVerbatim}
+does work because it is equivalent to
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \SaveVerb{\MyTemp}"foo"\item[\UseVerb{\MyTemp}]
+\end{LVerbatim}
+\end{description}
+
+
+These environments and commands use various parameters that make it easy to
+customize their behavior. However, until you want to find the need for such
+customization, you might as well ignore the rest of this section.
+
+Internally, "fancybox.sty" separates the reading and formatting of verbatim
+text. Most of the environments and commands perform both functions, but
+"SaveVerbatim" and "\SaveVerb" only read the text, while "UseVerbatim" (and
+company) and "\UseVerb" only format the text. "VerbatimOut" gets special
+treatment. The parameters that apply to each class of verbatim environment or
+command is listed in Table \ref{verbtable}.
+
+\begin{table}
+\begin{center}
+\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{0}
+\setlength{\tabcolsep}{7pt}
+\newcommand{\vs}{& \\[\tabcolsep]}
+\newcommand{\VS}{\\ \vs \hline \vs}
+\begin{tabular}{|l|l|}
+\hline \vs
+{\em Where} & {\em What}
+\\ \vs \hline
+\hline \vs
+  \begin{Bflushleft}
+    Environments\\
+    that format
+  \end{Bflushleft}
+&
+  \begin{Bflushleft}
+    "\VerbatimSpace"\\
+    "\VerbatimTab"\\
+    "\VerbatimFont"\\
+    "\VerbatimFuzz"\\
+    "\EveryVerbatimLine"\\
+    "\EveryVerbatim"\\
+    "\ThisVerb"
+  \end{Bflushleft}
+\VS
+  \begin{Bflushleft}
+    Environments\\
+    that read
+  \end{Bflushleft}
+&
+  \begin{Bflushleft}
+    "\EveryVerbatimCodes"\\
+    "\ThisVerbCodes"
+  \end{Bflushleft}
+\VS
+  \begin{Bflushleft}
+    "\Verb" and\\
+    "\UseVerb"
+  \end{Bflushleft}
+&
+  \begin{Bflushleft}
+    "\VerbSpace"\\
+    "\VerbTab"\\
+    "\VerbFont"\\
+    "\EveryVerb"\\
+    "\ThisVerb"
+  \end{Bflushleft}
+\VS
+  \begin{Bflushleft}
+    "\Verb" and\\
+    "\SaveVerb"
+  \end{Bflushleft}
+&
+  \begin{Bflushleft}
+    "\EveryVerbCodes"\\
+    "\ThisVerbCodes"
+  \end{Bflushleft}
+\VS
+  \begin{Bflushleft}
+    "VerbatimOut"
+  \end{Bflushleft}
+&
+  \begin{Bflushleft}
+    "\EveryVerbOutCodes"\\
+    "\ThisVerbCodes"\\
+    "\EveryVerbOutLine"\\
+    "\ThisVerb"
+  \end{Bflushleft}
+\\ \vs \hline
+\end{tabular}
+\caption{Parameters for the verbatim environments and
+commands.\label{verbtable}}
+\end{center}
+\end{table}
+
+All the parameters, including "\VerbatimFuzz", are ordinary commands, and
+should be changed with "\renewcommand".
+
+Here is a description of each of the parameters for environments that format
+the verbatim text:
+\begin{description}
+  \vitem"\VerbatimSpace" The insertion text for spaces. The default is "\ ",
+which produces a blank space. Change it to "\ttspace" to get \ttspace.
+  \vitem"\VerbatimTab" The insertion text for tabs. The default is
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \
+\end{LVerbatim}
+  \vitem"\VerbatimFont" The font to use for verbatim text. The default is
+"\tt"
+  \vitem"\VerbatimFuzz" This is the amount by which lines can be too long in a
+"Verbatim" or "LVerbatim" environment before you get overfull "\hbox"
+warnings. This threshold is usually .1pt, but the default definition of
+"\VerbatimFuzz" is "2pt" because verbatim lines won't break and are therefore
+often too long.
+  \vitem"\EveryVerbatimLine" This is inserted at the beginning of each line of
+verbatim environments or verbatim files. By default it does nothing. I like to
+indent each line in the verbatim environment in the input file by 2 spaces, so
+I define
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \renewcommand{\EveryVerbatimLine}[2]{}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+to eat those spaces. (But I have to remember to put in two spaces or space
+markers for blank lines too.) You might also use it to number the lines. For
+example:
+\begin{example}
+  \newcounter{VerbLineNo}
+  \renewcommand{\EveryVerbatimLine}%
+    {\makebox[10pt][r]{%
+       \stepcounter{VerbLineNo}%
+       \tiny\rm\arabic{VerbLineNo}}%
+    \hspace{10pt}}
+  \renewcommand{\EveryVerbatim}%
+    {\setcounter{VerbLineNo}{0}}
+  \begin{SaveVerbatim}{\MyTemp}
+  \setlength{\fboxsep}{15pt}
+  \setlength{\mylength}{\linewidth}
+  \end{SaveVerbatim}
+  \fbox{\BUseVerbatim{\MyTemp}}
+\end{example}
+  \vitem"\EveryVerbatim" Whatever else you want to say before formatting the
+verbatim text. By default, it does nothing.
+  \vitem"\ThisVerb" This is executed before any of the commands above, and
+then its value is cleared. Use this to customize a single verbatim formatting
+environment.
+\end{description}
+
+Here is a description of the parameters for environments that read the
+verbatim text:
+\begin{description}
+  \vitem"\EveryVerbatimCodes" This command is inserted just before reading the
+verbatim text. Use it to play with "\catcode"'s (see the {\em \TeX book}). For
+example, I might type
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \renewcommand{\EveryVerbatimCodes}{\catcode`\"=14}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+if I want to use \Verb+"+ as a comment character in verbatim text.%
+%% The use of SaveVerbatim and \SaveVerb is not necessary here because
+%% \VerbatimFootnotes is in effect. This is just a test.
+\begin{SaveVerbatim}{\MyTemp}
+  \def\MyQuote{"}    % \MyQuote is now the character ",
+  \def\temp{\Verb"}  %    in case I need it.
+  \catcode`\"=13     % Now " is like a command.
+  \let"\temp         % Now "foo" is like \Verb"foo"
+  \def\do{\noexpand\do\noexpand}      % Now " can be used in verbatim
+  \edef\dospecials{\dospecials\do\"}  % environments anyway.
+\end{SaveVerbatim}\SaveVerb{\Foo}+"+\SaveVerb{\FFoo}+\Verb"foo"+%
+\footnote{Here is another "\catcode" trick. We make \UseVerb{\Foo} a short
+verbatim command, so that we can say \UseVerb{\Foo foo\Foo} instead of
+\UseVerb{\FFoo}:
+\LUseVerbatim{\MyTemp}}
+  \vitem"\ThisVerbCodes" This command is executed before "\EveryVerbCodes",
+and then it is cleared. Use this to fool with the "\catcode"`s of a single
+verbatim environment.
+\end{description}
+
+The parameters for "\Verb", "\UseVerb" and "\SaveVerb" and the "VerbatimOut"
+environment are analogous to the similar commands for other environments.
+
+Here is an example of the use of "\ThisVerb" to define a variant of "\Verb"
+that uses \ttspace\ to mark spaces:
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \newcommand{\SVerb}{%
+    \renewcommand{\ThisVerb}%
+      {\renewcommand{\VerbatimSpace}{\ttspace}}%
+    \Verb}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+
+Finally, without further comment, here are the definitions of the "example"
+and "example*" environments that were used for the examples in this document:
+{\renewcommand{\EveryVerbatimLine}{}\LVerbatimInput{\jobname.ex1}}
+
+\section{Changes}
+\raggedright
+
+\paragraph*{Version 0.9, November 23, 1992} First release.
+
+\paragraph*{Version 0.91, November 25, 1992}
+\begin{enumerate}
+  \item "\shadowsize" is now a length, to be set with "\setlength" or
+"\addtolength".
+  \item "\fancypage" split into "\fancypage" and "\fancyput"
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\paragraph*{Version 0.92, December 20, 1992}
+\begin{enumerate}
+  \item New "\boxput" command for superimposing boxes.
+  \item New "\VerbatimFootnotes" command.
+  \item New "\VerbBox" command for verbatim boxes.
+  \item New "Sbox" environment. Makes "\beginsbox" and "\endsbox"
+    obsolete, but the latter have been retained for compatibility.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\paragraph{Version 0.93, January 20, 1993}
+\begin{enumerate}
+  \item New "\EndVerbatimTokens" for tokens that precede "\end{Verbatim}".
+  \item New "\AltGetVerbatim", to allow any tokens to precede
+"\end{Verbatim}".
+  \item Fixed bug in "\BVerbatimInput" that caused second line to be repeated.
+  \item New "LandScape" environment, for rotating pages without rotating
+headers and footers.
+  \item Slide frames "Oval", "oval", "shadow" and "double" are defined when
+"seminar.sty" v0.93 (and maybe later) is loaded.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\paragraph{Version 1.0, February 10, 1993}
+\begin{enumerate}
+  \item Fixed bugs in "\boxput".
+  \item New "Beqnarray" environment.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\paragraph{Version 1.1, 1997 (D.G./S.R.)}
+\begin{enumerate}
+  \item Minimal adaptations for \LaTeX{} 2e compatibility (macros
+  "\fancypage", "\thisfancypage", "\fancyput", "\thisfancyput",
+  "\@Landscape", "\LandScape").
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\paragraph{Version 1.2, February 27, 1998 (D.G./S.R.)}
+\begin{enumerate}
+  \item Other adaptations for \LaTeX{} 2e.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\paragraph{Version 1.3, September 19, 2000 (D.G./S.R.)}
+\begin{enumerate}
+  \item Corrections of the output routine for \LaTeX{} 2e compatibility
+  (from Marcin Wolinski and Heiko Oberdiek).
+  \item Add a "\ProvidesPackage" command (from Heiko Oberdiek).
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\end{document}
+%% END fancybox.doc
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/read-me.2e b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/read-me.2e
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..01bb2885263
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/read-me.2e
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+THIS IS A SUPPLEMENTARY READ-ME FOR V1.0e OF THE SEMINAR PACKAGE
+
+***********************************************************************
+****    "readme" file for the Seminar package, v1.0e, 94/09/12     ****
+***********************************************************************
+
+COPYRIGHT 1993, 1994 by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu
+%%
+%% These files may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of
+%% the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.2 of this license
+%% or (at your option) any later version.  The latest version of this
+%% license is in:
+%% 
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% 
+%% and version 1.2 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version
+%% 1999/12/01 or later.
+%%
+
+BUGS: If you have problems using this seminar package with LaTeX2e,
+      report them to Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu. The problem probably lies
+      with seminar.cls. You can probably continue to use the seminar
+      package with LaTeX2e in compatibility mode, while waiting for a bug
+      fix, by renaming seminar.cls to something else.
+
+ABOUT V1.0e:
+
+  The V1.0e distribution is identical to v1.0 of 93/04/01,
+  except for a few changes so that Seminar can work with
+  NFSS2 and LaTeX2e:
+
+   - semhelv.sty and semlcmss.sty have been modified to work
+     with NFSS2 and LaTeX2e (but they still work with NFSS).
+
+   - seminar.cls has been added. This is a LaTeX2e document class,
+     derived from seminar.sty v1.0 by Sebastian Rahtz.
+
+  If you already have have seminar.sty v1.0e, then all you need
+  are this read-me file plus these files from the inputs
+  directory:
+
+    seminar.cls semhelv.sty semlcmss.sty
+
+USING SEMINAR WITH LATEX2E:
+
+  !!! YOU MUST BE USING A LATEX2E RELEASED AFTER 19 FEBRUARY 1994
+
+  You can either use seminar.sty in compatibility mode:
+    \documentstyle{seminar}
+  Or use the seminar.cls document class:
+    \documentclass{seminar}
+
+  Unless you are using other macros that only work in
+  compatibility mode, you might as well use the document class.
+
+  You can use the following options with \documentclass{seminar}:
+
+    article  slidesonly  notes  notesonly  notesonly*
+    noxcomment  portrait  a4 (or a4paper) semhelv semlcmss
+    semlayer semrot semcolor slidesec
+  
+  plus appropriate options for the article document class
+  (e.g., 11pt)
+
+  NOTE: Use `a4' or `a4paper', not `sem-a4'.
+
+  `seminar.cls' is a minimal modification of seminar.sty. The
+  next release will take advantage of more of LaTeX2e's special
+  capabilities.
+
+
+Tim Van Zandt
+August 24, 1994
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/readme.pst b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/readme.pst
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8d489f677e7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/readme.pst
@@ -0,0 +1,204 @@
+			       ---------------
+			       | PSTricks 97 |
+			       ---------------
+
+
+
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+PSTricks is the work of  Timothy van Zandt <tvz@nwu.edu>
+
+PSTricks 97 is edited by Denis Girou <Denis.Girou@idris.fr>
+  and Sebastian Rahtz <sebastian.rahtz@computing-services.oxford.ac.uk>
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+
+1 - Copyright
+    ---------
+
+COPYRIGHT 1993, 1994, 1999 by Timothy Van Zandt, tvz@nwu.edu.
+
+This program can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt.
+
+2 - Introduction
+    ------------
+
+This package is a re-release of PSTricks, incorporating all of the
+beta releases and bug fixes made up to March 1997. It is *not*
+intended as a full new release of PSTricks, but as a consolidation and
+cleaned distribution. Because Timothy van Zandt does not currently have
+enough time to work on PSTricks, he gave permission for Denis Girou
+and Sebastian Rahtz to produce this interim solution.
+
+No new features have been added in PST97, except the release of the
+small pst-fill package for filling (tiling) arbitrary regions and the
+various evolving contributions, but we have merged in all the bug fixes
+and beta addons which Timothy produced.
+
+We have renamed some of the files that make up PSTricks, for consistency.
+
+
+3 - Installation
+    ------------
+
+3.1 - (La)TeX files
+
+      a - You have to move all the files from the "generic" subdirectory
+to a directory part of your TEXINPUTS environment variable, or to add it
+in your TEXINPUTS list of paths.
+
+      b - If you are a LaTeX user (and not only a plain TeX one), you have
+to do the same thing for the "latex" subdirectory, which define LaTeX
+wrappers for all the PSTricks files.
+
+3.2 - PostScript header files
+
+      a - If you use the "dvips" DVI to PostScript converter, you have
+to move all the files from the "dvips" subdirectory to a directory part
+of your DVIPSHEADERS environment variable, or to add it in your DVIPSHEADERS
+list of paths.
+
+      b - If you use the Y&Y's "dvipsone" DVI to PostScript converter,
+you have to rename generic/dvipsone.con to generic/pstricks.con and to move
+all the files of the "dvips" subdirectory to the TeX input folder.
+
+      c - If you use the MicroPress "VTeX" DVI to PostScript converter,
+you have to rename generic/vtex.con to generic/pstricks.con and to move
+all the files of the "dvips" subdirectory to the TeX input folder.
+
+      d - If you use the "textures" (version 1.7 or 1.8) DVI to PostScript
+converter (for Macintosh), you should proceed as follows:
+          * create a new folder PSTricks97 (for instance) as a subfolder in
+Textures' TeX inputs folder,
+          * copy the "generic", "dvips", "latex" and "contrib" subfolders
+from the "pst97" folder to the newly created "PSTricks97" folder,
+          * open the "generic" folder and remove the file pstricks.con,
+then rename the file textures.con to pstricks.con,
+          * open the "dvips" folder and change the following line in the file
+pstricks.pro (courtesy Michael J. Sharpe <msharpe@euclid.ucsd.edu>):
+/STV { SDict begin normalscale end STP  } def
+by
+/STV { Mag 72.27 72 div mul dup neg scale STP  } def
+          It was also reported that the `pst-text' package (to put text
+along paths) doesn't work with the "textures" driver.
+          Textures's users must also look at the page kindly maintained
+by Michael Sharpe: http://math.ucsd.edu/~msharpe/pst-textures.html
+
+      d - If you use another driver than these four ones, you have to adapt
+a pstricks.con file for it, if the one for "dvips" doesn't work for it.
+You can also look at the instructions of the old obsolete/src/pstricks.con
+file. And if nothing work, ask for help on the PSTricks mailing list,
+hopping that somebody on the list has the same configuration than you...
+
+3.3 - Test of the installation
+
+The file doc/test-pst.tex allow you to test all your installation and the
+various components of PSTricks. It is the concatenation of most of the
+examples of the PSTricks chapter of "The LaTeX Graphics Companion".
+You must take care (mainly if you are "normally" a user of plain TeX only,
+that it require LaTeX and some packages of it distribution (namely `calc',
+`ifthen' and `graphicx'). It also require the `random' and `subfigure'
+packages, which can be found on CTAN or the TeXLive cdrom - see the README
+file of the doc subdirectory).
+
+3.4 - Known pitfalls
+
+      a - To use the standard `color' package (which is available both
+for plain TeX and LaTeX) with PSTricks, you must load the `pstcol' extra
+package written by David Carlisle, which interface the two packages,
+loading them in the right order, and overriding some small parts of PSTricks
+to allow it to use the `color' package system for specifying color.
+We strongly recommend that you use the `color' package today.
+
+      b - Don't try to load the `color' package if you use `pst-all'
+(it is already loaded in the correct order).
+
+      c - If needed, preferably load the `graphics' / `graphicx' package
+after PSTricks, and in this case use the `graphics' syntax of \scalebox
+(not the one described in the PSTricks documentation).
+
+      d - If you load `graphics' / `graphicx' before PSTricks, you must use
+the PSTricks syntax of \scalebox in all cases (not the one described
+in the `grfguide' document).
+
+      e - We have rename some package files for consistency. But the reference
+documentation in obsolete/doc subdirectory still refer to the old names.
+So, take care that `pst2eps' is now `pst-eps', `charpath' is now `pst-char',
+`gradient' is now `pst-grad', `textpath' is now `pst-text' and `pstree' is
+now `pst-tree'.
+
+
+4 - Contents
+    --------
+
+4.1 - Subdirectories
+
+The distribution contain the following subdirectories:
+
+contrib : various contributions
+doc     : documentations (up to date ones - the obsolete/doc subdirectory
+          contain the reference documentation for the version 0.93a and
+          the additional old Beta material, which is still necessary to use...)
+dvips   : PostScript header files
+generic : TeX generic sources
+latex   : LaTeX wrappers
+obsolete: documentation and sources for the version 0.93a and the
+          additional old Beta material
+
+4.2 - PSTricks core files
+
+The generic subdirectory contain the core files of PSTricks (and the latex
+subdirectory contain the corresponding wrapper files). By alphabetic order:
+
+multido : loop facility for Generic TeX (in fact independant of PSTricks)
+pst-3d  : 3d projections
+pst-char: stroking and filling character paths
+pst-coil: coils and zigzags
+pst-eps : conversion of PSTricks graphics to EPS files
+pst-fill: fillings and tilings
+pst-grad: gradients
+pst-node: nodes and node connections
+pst-plot: plots
+pst-text: texts along a path
+pst-tree: trees
+
+In addition, there is a LaTeX package `pst-all' in the latex subdirectory,
+which loads all of the PSTricks components, plus `pstcol', in one go
+(`pstcol' require also a color.cfg file defined; make sure you do _not_ load
+the `color' package by itself). The only reason for _not_ using this is that
+it uses extra memory for facilities you might not need.
+
+
+5 - Documentation
+    -------------
+
+There is NOT a complete up to date _reference_ documentation for PSTricks 97.
+You must still refer to the reference documentation of the version 0.93a and
+the additional old Beta material, available in the obsolete/doc subdirectory
+(it was put in the "obsolete" subdirectory to clearly show that it is not up
+to date nor supported by actual mainteners). Take care to notice what has
+changed in additional old Beta documents (betadoc?.ps files) comparing to the
+ones for 0.93a version (pst-usr?.ps files).
+
+Denis Girou maintain a list of known errors in both version 0.93a and
+additional old Beta documentations, in obsolete/doc/pst-doc.err
+
+A large chapter of "The LaTeX Graphics Companion", by Goossens, Rahtz and
+Mittelbach, Addison Wesley 1997, is dedicated to PSTricks, and this
+currently forms the only systematic description of the integration of
+the basic PSTricks and the beta additions of 1993. The source of all examples
+from that book is also on CTAN/info/lgc and most of them in the doc/lgc
+subdirectory of the PST97 distribution.
+
+There is also a supporting set of Web pages, actually maintained
+by Denis Girou, on http://www.tug.org/applications/PSTricks with various
+pointers and examples classified by categories.
+
+And there is also a mailing list devoted to discussions on PSTricks usage.
+The informations to subscribe to this list and to consult the archives can
+be found on the Web page.
+
+--
+Denis Girou and Sebastian Rahtz (updated May 5, 1999)
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/sem-read.me b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/sem-read.me
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3003ea40b81
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/sem-read.me
@@ -0,0 +1,299 @@
+-------------------------------------------------------
+IMPORTANT NOTE
+
+With the agreement of Timothy Van Zandt  (now Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu),
+the distributions conditions on seminar are now relaxed to:
+%%
+%% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of
+%% the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.2 of this license
+%% or (at your option) any later version.  The latest version of this
+%% license is in:
+%% 
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% 
+%% and version 1.2 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version
+%% 1999/12/01 or later.
+%%
+
+June 3rd 1999 (last updated September 2005)
+Sebastian Rahtz <sebastian.rahtz@oucs.ox.ac.uk>
+Denis Girou <denis.girou@idris.fr>
+
+(Tim's helpers on earth)
+-------------------------------------------------------
+
+%% BEGIN sem-read.me
+***********************************************************************
+****    "readme" file for seminar.sty package, v1.0, 93/04/01      ****
+***********************************************************************
+
+COPYRIGHT 1993, by Timothy Van Zandt
+
+DESCRIPTION:
+
+  seminar.sty is a LaTeX document style for typesetting slides or
+  transparencies, and accompanying notes. It has many advantages over
+  SliTeX. Here are some of the style's special features:
+   *  It is a LaTeX style, rather than another format.
+   *  It is compatible with AmS-LaTeX.
+   *  You can use any fonts that work with LaTeX, including PostScript
+      fonts and AmSFonts.
+   *  Slides can be landscape and portrait within the same file.
+   *  Color is supported through PostScript.
+   *  The slides can have a frame and a colored background.
+   *  The magnification can be changed with a single command.
+   *  Overlays can be produced from a single slide environment.
+   *  Accompanying notes, such as the text of a presentation, can be put
+      outside the slide environments. The slides, notes or both together
+      can then be typeset in a variety of formats.
+  Some of these features require a PostScript output device.
+
+FILES:
+
+  Inputs:
+    seminar.sty  : The main style file.
+    sem-page.sty : Page parameters.
+    semlayer.sty : The semlayer style option (overlays and color layers).
+    semhelv.sty  : The semhelv style option .
+    semlcmss.sty : The semlcmss style option.
+    semcolor.sty : The semcolor style option.
+    semrot.sty   : THe semrot style option.
+    slidesec.sty : The slidesec style option.
+    sem-a4.sty   : The sem-a4 style option.
+    xcomment.sty : The macros for omitting notes.
+    2up.tex      : Macros for printing documents two-up.
+    2up.sty      : The same as 2up.tex, but with .sty extension.
+    npsfont.sty  : Macros for defining new PostScript fonts with the NFSS.
+    fancybox.sty : Box tips and tricks for LaTeX.
+
+  Documentation:
+    sem-user.tex : User's guide for seminar.sty.
+    sem-user.ind : Index for sem-user.tex.
+    semsamp1.tex : A sample document for seminar.sty.
+    semsamp2.tex : Another sample document for seminar.sty.
+    2up.doc      : Documentation for 2up.tex.
+    fancybox.doc : Documentation for fancybox.sty.
+    tvz-hax.sty  : For typesetting sem-user.tex and sem-code.tex.
+    tvz-code.sty : For typesetting sem-code.tex.
+    tvz-user.sty : For typesetting sem-user.tex.
+    sem-read.me  : This file.
+    read-me.pst  : The read-me file for the PSTricks package.
+
+  Sources:
+    seminar.doc  : Documented code for seminar.sty.
+    semlayer.doc : Documented code for semlayer.sty.
+    xcomment.doc : Documented code for xcomment.sty.
+    sem-make.tex : For extracting code from seminar.doc and semlayer.doc.
+    sem-code.tex : For typesetting seminar.doc and semlayer.doc.
+    xc-make.tex  : For extracting code from xcomment.doc.
+    xcomment.tex : For typesetting xcomment.doc.
+
+GETTING STARTED:
+
+  1. Put the input files in a directory where your TeX looks for inputs.
+
+  2. Typeset and print sem-user.tex.
+
+  3. Read the preface "Getting Started", and then the appendices.
+
+  4. Typeset semsamp1.tex and semsamp2.tex.
+
+  5  If upgrading from v0.92, see the changes listed at the end of this
+     file. If upgrading from v0.91 or earlier, good luck.
+
+HACKERS:
+
+  The files seminar.doc, semlayer.doc and xcomment.doc contain the
+  documented code, using Frank Mittelbach's doc system.
+  See sem-code.tex and xcomment.tex for instructions on typesetting
+  these files.
+  See sem-make.tex and xc-make.tex for instruction on extracting
+  stripped input (.sty) files from these .doc files.
+
+MORE ABOUT THE SUPPLEMENTAL STYLES AND MACROS:
+
+  The following styles and macros are not specifically for use
+  with seminar.sty, and hence are not described in detail in
+  the seminar.sty User's Guide. You do not need to read the
+  documentation of these files in order to use seminar.sty.
+  If you have versions on your system that are older than the
+  ones distributed with seminar.sty, be sure to replace these.
+
+  FANCYBOX.STY:
+  fancybox.sty is a LaTeX style option with tips and tricks for LR-box
+  commands. The documentation, fancybox.doc, is extensive.
+
+  2UP.TEX:
+  2up.tex/2up.sty contains macros for typesetting documents in a
+  two-up format. seminar.sty's \twoup command provides an interface.
+  2up.doc is the documentation for 2up.tex.
+
+  NPSFONT.STY:
+  npsfont.sty contains macros for defining new PostScript fonts
+  with the New Font Selection Scheme. The documentation is in
+  npsfont.sty itself.
+
+  XCOMMENT.STY:
+  xcomment.sty, a LaTeX style option, permits one to typeset only
+  selected environments, omitting input outside these environments.
+  See xcomment.tex if you want to typeset the documentation.
+
+  SLIDESEC.STY
+  slidesec.sty is an experimental file contains sectioning commands
+  for slide type documents. The documentation is in slidesec.sty
+  itself.
+
+
+SEMINAR.STY AND PSTRICKS.TEX:
+
+  pstricks.tex is a collection of PostScript macros that is compatible
+  with most TeX macro packages, including Plain TeX and LaTeX. Included are
+  macros for color, graphics, rotation, overlays, nodes and much more.
+
+  seminar.sty, combined with the semcolor option, the PSTricks package,
+  and your favorite macros for including EPS files, make a complete
+  TeX presentation software package.
+
+  You can probably obtain the PSTricks package from wherever you got
+  the Seminar package, or try
+    Princeton.EDU:/pub or Princeton.EDU:/pub/tvz
+
+  You must install the PSTricks package before using the semcolor option.
+
+  seminar.sty will work with pstricks.tex v0.92, and maybe later
+  versions.
+
+
+ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS:
+
+ The author is thankful to Frank Mittelbach for his documentation system.
+
+ Thanks to Sebastian Rahtz for bits of advice, and many users for
+ comments and bug reports.
+
+BUGS:
+
+  Too many to list, and who knows what they are anyway. These files are all
+  preliminary and unstable. Not responsible for neck injuries.
+
+
+  Thanks.
+
+CHANGES:
+
+  v1.0: Included sem-a4.sty file, as a way to let the default papersize
+     be A4 (The a4 option still works). Added \epsfslidesize to make
+     it easier to set the slide of eps files with epsf.sty. Fixed bug
+     which caused the width of second pages of a multi-page slide to
+     end up too small if the page only contained a quote or similar
+     environment with reduced margins.
+
+  v0.93a: Fixed bugs so that slides would come out properly with the
+          2-up,article and portrait options (together), and so that
+          slides would be positioned correctly with the portrait style
+          option.
+
+  v0.93:
+
+  INCOMPATIBLE CHANGES:
+
+    !  Use the a4 option instead of sem-a4. There is not longer a
+       separate file for a4.
+
+    !  No more \fewnotes, \nonotes. Use \slideplacement instead.
+
+    !  No more \layerstyle, \overlaystyle.
+
+    !  Slide styles are now "left" and "bottom".
+
+    !  No more \ifslides. Use \ifarticle\else.
+
+    !  You must now use the semlayer option to use overlays (in addition
+      to the semcolor option).
+
+    !  No "down" slide rotation (only "none", "left" and "right".
+
+    !  portrait option is no longer a separate file.
+
+    !  \paperwidth and \paperheight are now ordinary commands, to be set
+      with \renewcommand.
+
+    !  \slidefonts is now always invoked in slide environments, and never in
+      the preamble. (But semhelv.sty and semlcmss.sty have changed to
+      reflect this.)
+
+    !  Method for customizing the slide frames has changed.
+       \slideframecolor, \slideframearc, \slidefillcolor and
+       \slideshadowcolor are obsolete.
+
+    ! \landscape command replaced by \printlandscape to avoid conflict with
+      other style files. (E.g., \def\printlandscape{\special{landscape}}).
+
+  NEW FEATURES:
+
+    +  A slide environment can have multiple `pages'. \extraslideheight{len}
+      controls page cutting. See user's guide for details.
+
+    +  \centerslidestrue (default) causes the contents of partially full
+      slides to be vertically centered in the slide. \centerslidesfalse
+      causes it to be flush top.
+
+    +  New \raggedslides[len] command, for setting
+      whether right margin in slides is ragged or justified. Default is
+      \raggedslides. \raggedslides[0pt] gives justified slides.
+
+    +  \slideplacement
+
+    +  \onlynotestoo
+
+    +  \slideskip and \slideshrink for added control over interline space.
+
+
+    +  New: \slideleftmargini, \slideleftmarginii, \slideleftmarginiii,
+      \slidelabelsep, \slideitemsep, \slidepartopsep,
+      \slideparskip, \slideparindent, \slidefootins, \slidefootnotesep,
+      \slidedisplayskips, \theslidefootnote
+
+    +  \input and \endinput now supported for the slidesonly selection.
+
+    +  New conditional: \ifportrait
+
+    +  \newslideframe
+
+    +  \leftsliderotation, \rightsliderotation.
+
+    +  New \slidetopmargin, \slidebottommargin, \slideleftmargin,
+       \sliderightmargin.
+
+    +  New notesonly* selection.
+
+    +  New \slidesclearpagetrue
+
+    +  New \semcm and \semin.
+
+    +  New note environment and \noxcomment command, as an alternative
+       to treating everything outside slide environments as notes.
+
+
+  BACKWARDS-COMPATIBLE CHANGES:
+
+    *  \maketitle now uses LaTeX's default from article.sty in notes.
+
+    *  Bug in article option with the \twoup command fixed.
+
+    *  \topmargin in sem-a4 changed from -.75in to 1in.
+
+    *  \slidefontsizes is obsolete (but still works). Use \ptsize instead.
+
+    *  Page parameters are now in a separate file sem-page.sty. sem-a4.sty
+      has been changed to reflect this.
+
+  v0.92:
+    Mostly bug fixes, plus some extra options. The PSTricks package
+    is no longer distributed with seminar.sty.
+
+  Pre v0.91:
+    Entirely rewritten. Too many changes to list. Note especially
+    that system of formats and selections has changed.
+
+%% END sem-read.me
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/sem-user.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/sem-user.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2227746eae3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/sem-user.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/sem-user.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/sem-user.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..94aef0b7f01
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/sem-user.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,1932 @@
+%% BEGIN sem-user.tex
+\def\FileDate{93/04/01}
+\def\FileVersion{1.0}
+%%
+%% COPYRIGHT 1993, by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu
+%%
+%%
+%% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of
+%% the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.2 of this license
+%% or (at your option) any later version.  The latest version of this
+%% license is in:
+%% 
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% 
+%% and version 1.2 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version
+%% 1999/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%% This LaTeX file prints the User's Guide for seminar.sty.
+%% You must have my tvz-hax.sty, tvz-user.sty, and fancybox.sty,
+%% which are distributed with seminar.sty.
+%%
+%% This is distributed with the index file sem-user.ind.
+%% To make an new index, run, e.g.:
+%%   makeindex sem-user.idx
+%%
+%% STYLE OPTIONS:
+%%   `a4'       : For A4 paper.
+%%   `twoside'  : For two-sided printing.
+%%   `2up'      : For two-up printing. (Uses non-standard font magnifications.
+%%                                      See 2up.doc for details.)
+%%
+
+\documentstyle[12pt]{tvz-user}
+
+\makeindex
+
+% Used with twoside option:
+\def\theheadertitle{seminar.sty: User's Guide}
+
+% No headers, 1in top margin
+\setlength{\topmargin}{0pt}
+\setlength{\headheight}{0pt}
+\setlength{\headsep}{0pt}
+\setlength{\textheight}{8.75in}
+\setlength{\footskip}{.625in}
+\papersizeadjust
+
+% Change part environment:
+\renewcommand{\part}[1]{%
+  \clearpage
+  \refstepcounter{part}
+  \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\protect\numberline{\thepart}#1}%
+  \hrule height 1pt\relax
+  \vskip 1ex
+  \hbox to\columnwidth{\strut\huge\bf\thepart\hfil#1}%
+  \vskip 1ex
+  \hrule height 1pt\relax
+  \vskip 3ex}
+
+\def\MainFont{\tt}            % For macro definitions.
+
+\ShortVerb
+\ShortMeta
+
+\let\filedate\FileDate
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\thispagestyle{empty}
+
+\null
+\vfill
+
+\begin{center}
+  {\huge\bf seminar.sty}\\[9pt]
+  {\LARGE\bf A \bLaTeX\ style for slides and notes}\\[14pt]
+  {\LARGE\bf User's Guide}\par
+  \vskip 1.5em
+  \large
+  \renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}
+  Timothy Van Zandt\\
+  {\normalsize\tt Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu}
+  \vskip 1em
+  \thefiledate\\ Version \FileVersion\par
+\end{center}
+\par
+\setlength{\unitlength}{1cm}
+\thicklines
+\centerline{\lower.8in\hbox{%
+\begin{picture}(0,0)
+\put(2,-11){\framebox(4,2){}}
+\put(2,-11){\line(-2,3){1}}
+\put(2,-9){\line(-2,3){1}}
+\put(6,-9){\line(-2,3){1}}
+\put(1,-9.5){\line(0,1){2}}
+\put(1,-7.5){\line(1,0){4}}
+\put(5.8,-8.7){\line(0,1){2}}
+\put(5.0,-6.7){\oval(1.6,1.6)[tr]}
+\put(5.0,-5.9){\line(-1,0){.7}}
+\put(3.1,-6.4){\framebox(1.2,1){}}
+\put(3.1,-6.4){\line(-1,2){.3}}
+\put(3.1,-5.4){\line(-1,3){.3}}
+\put(4.3,-5.4){\line(-1,3){.3}}
+\put(2.8,-5.8){\line(0,1){1.3}}
+\put(2.8,-4.5){\line(1,0){1.2}}
+\put(0,6.2){\oval(14,10)}
+\put(.02,6.18){\oval(14,10)}
+\thinlines
+\put(2.8,-5.8){\line(-4,3){9.6}}
+\put(2.8,-4.5){\line(-3,5){9.35}}
+\put(4,-4.5){\line(1,6){2.6}}
+\put(6.8,1.4){\line(-1,-3){2.5}}
+\end{picture}}}
+\par
+\bigskip
+\rightskip=0pt plus 2em\relax
+\parshape=20
+0cm 2.3cm
+0cm 2.9cm
+0cm 3.5cm
+0cm 4.1cm
+0cm 4.7cm
+0cm 5.3cm
+0cm 5.9cm
+0cm 6.5cm
+0cm 7.1cm
+0cm 7.7cm
+0cm 8.3cm
+0cm 8.3cm
+0cm 8.3cm
+0cm 7.3cm
+0cm 7.3cm
+0cm 7.3cm
+0cm 7.3cm
+0cm 7.3cm
+0cm 7.3cm
+0cm 7.3cm
+seminar.sty is a \LaTeX\ style for typesetting slides or
+transparencies, and accompanying notes. Here are some of its special features:
+It is compatible with \AmS-\LaTeX, and you can use PostScript and \AmS{}
+fonts. Slides can be landscape and portrait. There is support for color and
+frames. The magnification can be changed easily.
+Overlays can be produced from a single slide environment. Accompanying notes,
+such as the text of a presentation, can be put
+    outside the slide environments. The slides, notes or both together
+    can then be typeset in a variety of formats.
+
+\vfill
+
+\twosideclearpage
+\pagenumbering{roman}
+\tableofcontents
+
+\twosideclearpage
+
+\section*{Getting Started}
+\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Getting Started}
+\markboth{Getting Started}{Getting Started}
+
+"seminar.sty" is a \LaTeX{} document style for typesetting slides, and more.
+
+You should know how to use \LaTeX, as described in Leslie Lamport's \LaTeX:
+{\em User's Guide and Reference Manual}.
+
+Let's get started:
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item If you are installing "seminar.sty", read the the accompanying read-me
+file, and put the input files where your \TeX\ looks for inputs.
+
+\item Typeset the sample file, "semsamp1.tex", to see that everything is
+working. You can use \LaTeX\ or \AmS-\LaTeX.
+
+\item Read Appendix \ref{short-fonts}, on page \pageref{short-fonts}.
+
+\item To start making landscape slides, use
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \documentstyle{seminar}
+  \begin{document}
+  \begin{slide}
+    foo
+  \end{slide}
+  \end{document}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+and print out your document in landscape mode.
+
+\item To start making portrait slides, include the \o{portrait} style option,
+and use the \e{slide*} environment instead of \e{slide}:
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \documentstyle[portrait]{seminar}
+  \begin{document}
+  \begin{slide*}
+    foo
+  \end{slide*}
+  \end{document}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+
+\item If you have used \SliTeX, see Section \ref{slitex}.
+
+\item For A4 paper, use the "a4" style option.
+
+\item When you are ready to explore "seminar.sty"'s special features, skim the
+{\em User's Guide}, including the appendices.
+
+\item Play around with the sample file "semsamp2.tex" to try out some of
+"seminar.sty"'s special features.
+
+\item When you run into problems, look for help in Part \ref{Help}.
+
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\twosideclearpage
+
+\pagenumbering{arabic}
+
+\part{Just slides}
+
+\section{Landscape and portrait slides}
+
+"seminar.sty" is a \LaTeX\ (or \AmS-\LaTeX) document style. Thus, begin your
+document with
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \documentstyle{seminar}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+
+The slide environments are\MainEnvIndex{slide}\MainEnvIndex{slide*}%
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \begin{slide}    ...    \end{slide}
+  \begin{slide*}   ...    \end{slide*}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+\e{slide} is for landscape slides and \e{slide*} is for portrait slides.
+
+By default, the document is typeset in landscape mode, but if you include the
+\O{portrait} style option, the document is typeset in portrait mode.
+Typesetting the document in landscape mode is different from printing it in
+landscape mode; you may have to take care of the latter when printing with
+your dvi driver (see Appendix \ref{S-landscape}).
+
+If you have both landscape and portrait slides in your file, there are two
+ways to print the slides:
+\begin{itemize}
+  \item If you dvi driver supports rotation, then you can print all the slides
+at once. See Appendix \ref{S-landscape} for details.
+  \item You can first print your landscape slides by putting the command
+\begin{MD}
+  \landscapeonly
+\end{MD}
+in the preamble, and then print the portrait slides by inserting instead the
+command
+\begin{MD}
+  \portraitonly
+\end{MD}
+and including the \o{portrait} style option.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{The height and width of slides\label{slidedim}}
+
+The dimensions of the slides are set by the lengths
+\begin{MD}
+  \slidewidth\\
+  \slideheight
+\end{MD}
+The ``width'' refers to the width of a slide when looking at it in landscape
+orientation, whether it is a landscape or portrait slide (and the same goes
+for ``height''). The default width is 8.5 inches and the default height is 6.3
+inches.
+
+The slide environments have an optional argument that lets you change the
+dimensions of a single slide, as in
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \begin{slide*}[7.5in,6in]
+\end{LVerbatim}
+The first dimension is the slide's ``width'', and the second dimension is the
+slides ``height''. If you remember what we said about what ``width'' and
+``height'' mean, you will see that the above example begins a portrait slide
+that is 7.5 inches high and 6 inches wide.
+
+
+\section{Margins within a slide}
+
+When a slide is not full, the material is vertically centered within the
+slide. The command
+\begin{MD}
+  \centerslidesfalse
+\end{MD}
+cause the material to be flush to the top, instead. The command
+\begin{MD}
+  \centerslidestrue
+\end{MD}
+switches back to vertical centering.
+
+The right margin in slides is ragged by default. You can change this with the
+command
+\begin{MD}
+  \raggedslides[len]
+\end{MD}
+<len> should be the maximum space between the end of the line and the right
+margin. The argument is optional; \n\raggedslides\ is equivalent to
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \raggedslides[1fil]
+\end{LVerbatim}
+which gives a ragged right margin, as in \LaTeX's "flushleft" environment (the
+default). On the other hand,
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \raggedslides[0pt]
+\end{LVerbatim}
+gives a justified margin, and
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \raggedslides[2em]
+\end{LVerbatim}
+gives a semi-ragged margin. Note that as a margin becomes less ragged,
+hyphenation becomes more likely and more material fits on a slide.
+
+\section{Page breaking within a slide environment\label{S-pagebreak}}
+
+A slide environment can contain more than one ``page'' of slides; \TeX\ will
+break slides into pages automatically.
+
+If the mere idea disturbs you, put the command
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \extraslideheight{10in}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+in your document. You can then divide slides into pages yourself by starting
+new slide environments or using the
+\begin{MD}
+  \newslide
+\end{MD}
+command within a slide environment. And you need read this section no further.
+
+If instead you use the command
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \extraslideheight{0pt}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+then \TeX\ will break pages the way you would expect. This is a quick and
+dirty way to break a whole paper or a long proof into slides.
+
+However, dividing material into slides is usually too delicate a matter to be
+left up to \TeX, and ultimately you will make all the page breaks yourself. On
+the other hand, automatic page breaking can still be helpful at the early
+stages, letting \TeX\ find preliminary page breaks for you.
+
+Setting the "\extraslideheight" to "0pt" doesn't give you much flexibility
+about where to put the page breaks. Of course, you can always put a page break
+earlier than the one found by \TeX, but occasionally you will prefer to let a
+slide overflow by a small amount rather than rewrite the whole slide.
+
+Therefore, by default, "seminar.sty" uses\MainIndex{\extraslideheight}%
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \extraslideheight{10pt}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+This adds on an extra "10pt" to the target slide height (as determined by
+"\slideheight" for landscape slides and "\slidewidth" for portrait slides)
+{\em for the purpose of page-breaking only}.
+
+If the resulting slide exceeds the slide height, you will get a message like
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  LaTeX Error: Slide 3 overfull by 9pt.
+\end{LVerbatim}
+"seminar.sty" then tries to reduce the slide to its maximum height by
+squeezing out rubber vertical space (e.g., tightening up the interline
+spacing). If the slide is still too full, you will get another warning like:
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  Overfull \vbox by 4.4pt while output was active.
+\end{LVerbatim}
+You can go back and look for a way to make the slide shorter, or you can
+insert a "\newslide" command to change the page-break, or you can just ignore
+these warnings.
+
+The recommended value to give in the argument of "\extraslideheight" is the
+largest length by which you might be willing to let  a slide overflow.
+
+After you have decided on the page breaks, you can shut up the warnings about
+overfull slides and "\vbox"'s with
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \renewcommand{\slidefuzz}{1in}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+The value of \n\slidefuzz\ (which should be length, even though \n\slidefuzz\
+is an ordinary command sequence) is the threshold above which "seminar.sty"
+gives a warning about an overfull slide. The default definition is "2pt".
+
+
+\section{Margins on the page\label{S-slidemargins}}
+
+After "seminar.sty" makes a slide (or a slide page) as described above, it
+(optionally) frames the slide. This is described in Section \ref{S-frames}.
+For making and framing the slide, "seminar.sty" does not need to know anything
+about the paper you are printing on, or the margins you want. Hence, none of
+\LaTeX's standard page parameters are relevant within a slide environment.
+(However, for the sake of consistency, "seminar.sty" sets "\textwidth" to the
+width of the slide and "\textheight" to the height of the slide within a slide
+environment.)
+
+Now "seminar.sty" has to do something with the finished slide. As you read
+this User's Guide, you will find that there are various options. However,
+right now we are making slides for printing on transparencies, and so we have
+to position the slide on the transparency and add headers and footers.
+"seminar.sty" does not use \LaTeX's page parameters for this either. Instead,
+it uses the following parameters:
+\begin{center}
+  \begin{tabular}{lc}
+  {\em Parameter:} & \em Default:\\
+    \N\slideleftmargin & .5in\\
+    \N\sliderightmargin & .5in\\
+    \N\slidetopmargin & .5in\\
+    \N\slidebottommargin & .5in
+  \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+There are commands, to be set with "\renewcommand".\footnote{The only true
+length parameters (meaning that thay should be set with "\setlength") in
+"seminar.sty" are \n\slidewidth, \n\slideheight, \n\slideframewidth,
+\n\slideframesep, \n\semin, and \n\semcm.}
+
+\begin{figure}
+\hrule  height 1pt\relax
+\begin{center}
+\setlength\unitlength{.7cm}
+\begin{picture}(13,11.5)(-1,-1.5)
+\thicklines
+\put(0,0){\framebox(11,8.5){\Huge My slide}}
+\put(5.5,4.25){\fancyoval(8.5,6){}}
+
+\thinlines
+\put(0,8.65){\line(0,1){.3}}
+\put(.75,8.65){\line(0,1){.3}}
+\put(.5,8.8){\vector(1,0){.25}}
+\put(.5,8.8){\vector(-1,0){.5}}
+\put(.375,9.1){\makebox(0,0)[b]{\n\slideleftmargin}}
+
+\put(10.25,8.65){\line(0,1){.3}}
+\put(11,8.65){\line(0,1){.3}}
+\put(10.75,8.8){\vector(1,0){.25}}
+\put(10.75,8.8){\vector(-1,0){.5}}
+\put(10.625,9.1){\makebox(0,0)[b]{\n\sliderightmargin}}
+
+\put(0,-.15){\line(0,-1){.3}}
+\put(11,-.15){\line(0,-1){.3}}
+\put(5.5,-.3){\vector(1,0){5.5}}
+\put(5.5,-.3){\vector(-1,0){5.5}}
+\put(5.5,-.6){\makebox(0,0)[t]{\n\paperheight}}
+
+\put(-.15,0){\line(-1,0){.3}}
+\put(-.15,.75){\line(-1,0){.3}}
+\put(-.3,.5){\vector(0,1){.25}}
+\put(-.3,.5){\vector(0,-1){.5}}
+\put(-.6,.375){\makebox(0,0)[r]{\n\slidebottommargin}}
+
+\put(-.15,8.5){\line(-1,0){.3}}
+\put(-.15,7.75){\line(-1,0){.3}}
+\put(-.3,8){\vector(0,1){.5}}
+\put(-.3,8){\vector(0,-1){.25}}
+\put(-.6,8.125){\makebox(0,0)[r]{\n\slidetopmargin}}
+
+\put(11.15,0){\line(1,0){.3}}
+\put(11.15,8.5){\line(1,0){.3}}
+\put(11.3,4.25){\vector(0,1){4.25}}
+\put(11.3,4.25){\vector(0,-1){4.25}}
+\put(11.6,4.25){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\n\paperwidth}}
+
+\put(.75,7.75){\makebox(0,0)[bl]{Here is my header}}
+\put(10.25,7.75){\makebox(0,0)[br]{9/30/99}}
+\put(.75,.75){\makebox(0,0)[tl]{Here is my footer}}
+\put(10.25,.75){\makebox(0,0)[tr]{7-9}}
+\end{picture}
+
+\caption{Slide margins.\label{SlideMargins}}
+\end{center}
+\hrule  height 1pt\relax
+\end{figure}
+
+Look at Figure \ref{SlideMargins}. Note that the headers and footers lie {\em
+inside} the top and bottom margins, respectively. The slide is then centered
+horizontally and vertically between the margins.
+
+
+\section{Magnification and lengths}
+
+"seminar.sty" changes \TeX's magnification so that the output is larger than
+when typesetting an article. This means, for example, that if you paste some
+input from a paper you are writing with \LaTeX\ into a slide, it will look
+pretty much the same in the slide, except that it is magnified. For example,
+"\vspace{.5in}" produces a space that gets bigger along with the fonts and
+everything else. Of course, it won't look identical, since "seminar.sty" uses
+its own spacing parameters and margins.
+
+\TeX's standard magnifications are in magsteps. $n$ magsteps means a
+magnification of $1.2^n$. "seminar.sty"'s default magnification is 4 magsteps,
+but you can change this with the command
+\begin{MD}
+  \slidesmag{n}
+\end{MD}
+<n> should be an integer between $-5$ and 9.
+
+As noted above, lengths grow with the magnification. For spacing, like the
+parameter "\parindent" or using "\\[2pt]" to add a little extra space between
+lines, this is great, because it is easier to think in unmagnified dimensions.
+Setting "\parindent" to ".5cm" will look the same (relative to everything
+else) whatever the magnification.
+
+However, if you want to set the unit in a "picture" environment to 1cm, {\em
+as it appears on the slide}, use
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \setslidelength{\unitlength}{1cm}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+"\setslidelength" is like \LaTeX's "\setlength", but it scales the size down
+so that the resulting size after magnification is, in this example, 1cm (in
+the process, it removes any stretch from rubber lengths).%
+\footnote{If you know what {\tt true} dimensions are, you may be wondering why
+they haven't been mentioned. These are not recommended because you will not be
+able to print the slides two-up or use the {\tt article} format.}
+There is also a
+\begin{MD}
+  \addtoslidelength{cmd}{len}
+\end{MD}
+command.
+
+"seminar.sty" also provides the lengths
+\begin{MD}
+  \semin\\
+  \semcm
+\end{MD}
+which are equal to an inch and a centimeter, scaled down to ``before
+magnification'' size. For example,
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \rule{1pt}{4\semcm}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+makes a line 4 centimeters long on the transparency,.\footnote{Suppose you
+want to use another unit, such as millimeters, instead of centimeters. Then
+try this:
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \newcommand{\semmm}{\semcm}
+  \renewcommand{\semcmlength}{1mm}
+  \setslidelength{\semmm}{1mm}
+\end{LVerbatim}}
+
+"\textwidth", "\textheight", "\columnwidth" and "\linewidth" all have the
+expected values in slides. (But "\slidewidth" and "\slideheight" do not.)
+Thus, this would
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \rule{1pt}{.5\textwidth}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+make a line that is 1/2 the width of the slide.
+
+For help getting an EPS file to be the right size, see page \pageref{EPS}.
+
+Finally, there are some parameters that "seminar.sty" scales for you, and
+hence you can (and should) set them at their magnified values (the actual size
+on transparencies):
+\begin{itemize}
+  \item "\slidewidth" and "\slideheight"
+  \item "\slideframewidth" and "\slideframesep" (see Section \ref{S-frames}).
+  \item The slide margin parameters (see Section \ref{S-slidemargins}).
+  \item The \LaTeX\ page parameters, {\em when they are set in the
+preamble}.\footnote{The \LaTeX\ page parameters are listed on page 163 of
+Lamport's {\em \LaTeX\ User's Guide and Reference Manual}. They are used for
+notes (see Section \ref{S-notes}) and the \o{article} option (see Sections
+\ref{S-twoup} and \ref{S-article}), but not for printing slides onto
+transparencies. Lamport warns that resetting page parameters in the middle of
+the document is tricky; here it is more so, because you do have to worry about
+scaling them. But you can use "\setslidelength" for this.}
+\end{itemize}
+
+Note that the warnings about overfull slides (see Section \ref{S-pagebreak})
+report unmagnified dimensions.
+
+
+\section{Font sizes}
+
+The "\slidesmag" command lets you change the magnification of your document.
+You can effectively fine tune the magnification by using the "11pt" and "12pt"
+style options. For example, instead of increasing the magnification from 4 to
+5, you can switch to the "12pt" style option. There are differences---e.g.,
+magnification affects the space you get from "\hspace{1in}"---but the fonts
+will at least be roughly the same size either way. The "11pt" option gives a
+half-step, somewhat like "\slidesmag{4.5}", if the latter were permitted.
+
+Sometimes you want to use smaller font sizes for a single slide, in order to
+fit in that little bit of extra material, or to use larger font sizes, so that
+the few things you have to say on a slide don't look too lonely. You can't
+changing the magnification in the middle of the document, but you can change
+the size of the fonts with the command
+\begin{MD}
+  \ptsize{n}
+\end{MD}
+This switches to the font sizes that are in effect when you use the "<n>pt"
+option. Actually, <n> can be 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14 or 17, whether you have
+"art<n>.sty" or not.
+
+
+\section{Spacing parameters\label{S-spacing}}
+
+\begin{figure}
+\hrule height 1pt
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}{llc}
+{\em Command:} & {\em Initializes:} & {\em Default} \\[2pt]
+\N\slideparskip & "\parskip" & "1ex minus .2ex"\\
+\N\slideparindent & "\parindent" & "0pt"\\
+\N\slidefootnotesep & "\footnotesep" & "1.2ex"\\
+\N\slideleftmargini & "\leftmargini" & "1.8em" \\
+\N\slideleftmarginii & "\leftmarginii" & "1.4em" \\
+\N\slideleftmarginiii & "\leftmarginiii" & "1em" \\
+\N\slidelabelsep & "\labelsep" & ".5em" \\
+\N\slideitemsep & "\itemsep" & ".8ex minus .2ex" \\
+\N\slidepartopsep & "\partopsep" & "1ex minus .2ex" \\
+\N\slidestretch & "\baselinestretch" & "1.2"\\
+\N\slidearraystretch & "\arraystretch" & "1.2"
+\end{tabular}
+
+\caption{Slide spacing parameters.\label{SpacingDefaults}}
+\end{center}
+\hrule height 1pt
+\end{figure}
+
+The commands in Figure \ref{SpacingDefaults} are used to initialize some of
+the spacing parameters at the beginning of each slide environment and when
+"\ptsize" is used in a slide environment. These are spacing parameters that
+should depend on the size of fonts and that in \LaTeX's "article" style would
+be set in "art10.sty", etc. These commands should all be changed with
+"\renewcommand", even though, except for the "stretch" parameters, their
+values should be lengths.
+Note that "ex" and "em" units are used because these are the units that depend
+of font sizes.
+
+Outside a slide environment, redefine the commands on the left if you want to
+change these spacing parameters. Within a slide environment, reset the
+parameters directly, or redefine the commands on the left and then use the
+"\ptsize" command.
+
+In other \LaTeX\ styles, the extra distance between lines that is inserted
+when "\baselinestretch" exceeds 1 is eaten up by tall or deep lines. E.g., if
+the line  contains a table or a large math operator, there is probably no
+extra space at all. The advantage of this system is that the distance between
+baselines does not fluctuate with every tilde. The disadvantage is that lines
+can end up too close.
+
+In "seminar.sty", on the other hand, fraction
+\begin{MD}
+  \slideskip
+\end{MD}
+of the extra space cannot be eaten, but up to fraction
+\begin{MD}
+  \slideshrink
+\end{MD}
+of this extra space that cannot be eaten can be removed if there is too much
+material on the slide. This gives you added flexibility about how much
+material to include on a slide. Both \n\slideskip\ and \n\slideshrink\ can be
+set with "\renewcommand" to a number between 0 and 1. The default value of
+\n\slideskip\ is ".75" and the default value of \n\slideshrink\ is ".25". Set
+\n\slideskip\ to "0" to revert to \LaTeX's usual behavior, as described above.
+
+For example, suppose you are using a 10pt font, \n\slidestretch\ is "1.2",
+\n\slideskip\ is ".75", and \n\slideshrink\ is ".25". The "\baselineskip" for
+a 10pt font is normally 12pt, leaving a little space between the lines. Then
+"\baselineskip" is set to
+\begin{center}
+  "\slidestretch" $\times$ "12pt" $=$ 1.2$\times$12pt $=$ 14.4pt
+\end{center}
+The extra space between lines that is inserted is thus 2.4pt, and
+\begin{center}
+  "\slideskip" $\times$ 2.4pt $=$ .75$\times$2.4pt $=$ 1.8pt
+\end{center}
+of this cannot be eaten by tall or deep lines. However, the space between
+lines can be reduced by up to
+\begin{center}
+  "\slideshrink" $\times$ 1.8pt $=$ .25$\times$1.8pt $=$ .45pt
+\end{center}
+if the slide would otherwise be too long.
+
+
+\section{Slide frames\label{S-frames}}
+
+Slides can be framed. The command
+\begin{MD}
+  \slideframe[commands]{style}
+\end{MD}
+specifies the frame style to use. Valid frame styles are "none" and "plain",
+unless you use macros that define additional styles. For example, the
+\o{fancybox} style option defines the frames "shadow", "double", "oval" and
+"Oval" (corresponding to the "\shadowbox", "\doublebox", "\ovalbox" and
+"\Ovalbox" commands defined in that style option). The \o{semcolor}
+ option defines the styles "scplain", "scdouble", and "scshadow".
+
+All the frame styles use the lengths
+\begin{MD}
+  \slideframewidth\\
+  \slideframesep
+\end{MD}
+which are the (magnified) width of the line (default 4pt) and the distance
+between the slide and the frame (default .4in), respectively.
+
+\n\slideframe's optional argument is for commands that you want to use to
+customize the slide frame style. For example:
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \slideframe[\setlength{shadowsize}{12pt}]{shadow}\\
+  \slideframe[\psset{fillstyle=gradient}]{scplain}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+
+If you want to build your own custom slide frame, use the command
+\begin{MD}
+  \newslideframe{style}[commands]{frame command}
+\end{MD}
+<style> is the name of the frame, "[<commands>]", which is optional, will be
+inserted before the frame command and before the <commands> given by
+"\slideframe"'s optional argument. These commands can be used to set some
+default parameter values. Then the final argument should frame "#1".
+
+For example, if "\myframe{foo}" frames "foo", and if "\myframe" uses the
+length "\baldness" as a parameter, then you might write
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \newslideframe{wildframe}[\setlength{\baldness}{.2cm}]%
+    {\myframe{#1}}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+You can still override the default value of "\baldness", as in
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \slideframe[\setlength{\baldness}{.1cm}]{wildframe}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+
+There is a starred version of \n\slideframe\ that adds the frame to previously
+specified frames.\footnote{If using color or PostScript images, note that each
+frame gets added to the background.} This can be used for special tricks. For
+example, if you are using the \o{fancybox} and \o{semcolor} options, then
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \newslideframe{draft}%
+    {\boxput{\rput{30}{\Huge\gray DRAFT}}{#1}}
+  \slideframe{draft}
+  \slideframe*{scdouble}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+puts the word ``DRAFT'' in the background of each slide, gray and rotated 30
+degrees, and then adds a double frame.\footnote{Use "\boxput*" to put "DRAFT"
+in the foreground. See "fancybox.doc" for details.}
+
+
+\part{Advanced Features}
+
+\section{Counters}
+
+The counter for slides is \C{slide}. The default definition of \N\theslide\ is
+"\arabic{slide}". You can use "\label" and "\ref" to cross-reference slides,
+and the page number in slide environments is set to
+\n\theslide.\footnote{However, these page or slide cross-references are not
+always accurate when you let \TeX\ break pages for you within a slide.} Thus,
+you can write, for example,
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  See equation (\ref{foo}) on Slide \pageref{foo}.
+\end{LVerbatim}
+
+You may want some counters, such as equation counters, to be reset with each
+new slide environment or \n\newslide\ command. By default, only the "footnote"
+counter is reset this way, but you can specify your own (comma-separated) list
+of counters to be reset with the command
+\begin{MD}
+  \slidereset{list}
+\end{MD}
+If you want to reset additional counters, rather than replace the list
+entirely, use
+\begin{MD}
+  \addtoslidereset{list}
+\end{MD}
+
+There is another way in which the footnote counter gets special treatment. The
+command
+\begin{MD}
+  \theslidefootnote
+\end{MD}
+is used for the counter text instead of "\thefootnote". The default definition
+is
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \alph{footnote}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+
+\section{Selectively including or excluding slides}
+
+The commands
+\begin{MD}
+  \onlyslides{list}\\
+  \notslides{list}
+\end{MD}
+can be used to include or exclude only those slides in the given list. The
+argument should expand to a comma-separated list of numbers or ranges. The
+numbers do not need to be in order, the list can contain numbers that do not
+correspond to any slide, and there can be duplicate numbers. Negative numbers
+should be enclosed in curly braces. Since the argument is first expanded, you
+can use the "\ref" command in the argument. For example,
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \onlyslides{{-2},\ref{dp}-10,\ref{chart},0,17-999}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+is legal. If "\label{dp}" appears in slide 5 and "\label{chart}" appears in
+slide 12, this is equivalent to:
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \onlyslides{{-2},5-10,12,0,17-999}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+
+\section{Printing your slides two-up\label{S-twoup}}
+
+Printing your slides two-up is useful both for previewing slides and for
+making hard copies to distribute or for proofreading.
+
+One way to print your slides two-up is to include the \O{article} style
+option. This is described further below.
+
+Another way is to include the command
+\begin{MD}
+  \twoup[n]
+\end{MD}
+in the preamble. This inputs "2up.tex", which contains generic macros for
+two-up printing, and sets the parameters to values that are likely to work.
+Including the optional argument "[<n>]" increases the two-up magnification by
+$n$ magsteps. $n$ can be a positive or negative integer. If you are not able
+to get the right layout, then include the \O{2up} style option, read the
+documentation of "2up.tex", and set the parameters yourself, rather than using
+the \n\twoup\ command.
+
+The \o{article} style option is also called the article {\em format} (as
+opposed to the slides format). In the article format without the \o{portrait}
+option, the slides are centered horizontally and vertically, two to a page (if
+they fit---landscape slides do fit by default). With the portrait option, the
+slides are printed side-by-side, two to a page. In the \o{article} format, you
+can mix landscape and portrait slides with different orientations, but this
+does not work well with the \o{portrait} option.
+
+You can change the article format's magnification with
+\begin{MD}
+  \articlemag{n}
+\end{MD}
+This command works like the "\slidesmag" command (page \pageref{+slidesmag}).
+The default is
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \articlemag{0}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+Increase the article magnification if the slides look too lonely; decrease it
+if they are not coming out two-up.
+
+The size of the slides depends on the {\em difference} between the
+magnifications in the slides and article format. E.g., since the default
+slides magnification is 4 magsteps, the slides are scaled down in the article
+format by 4 magsteps. When you change the slides magnification with
+\n\slidesmag, you also have to change the article magnification with
+\n\articlemag\ by the same amount if you want the size of the slides in the
+article format to remain the same. However, when the article magnification in
+magsteps is negative , you will be using non-standard font magnifications
+(which will produce terrible results if you cannot generate the needed
+fonts---see Appendix \ref{bitmaps} for advice).
+
+Whether or not landscape slides (or rotated portrait slides) come out two-up
+in the article format without the \o{portrait} option depends on (i) the
+difference between the slides and article magnification, (ii) the values of
+\n\slidewidth\ and \n\slideheight\, (iii) the size of the slide frame, and
+(iv) the article format's page parameters. With the default values of
+(ii)--(iv), the slides will still come out two-up if you change the difference
+between the slides and article magnification to 3 (e.g., increase the value of
+\n\articlemag\ by 1). Try this if you want the slides to be larger.
+
+If you use the \o{article} option {\em and} the \n\twoup\ command, then your
+slides should be printed four-up!
+
+You will notice labels on the side or bottom of each slide in the \o{article}
+format. The command
+\begin{MD}
+  \slidestyle{style}
+\end{MD}
+determines where these labels go. There are three predefined slide styles:
+\begin{description}
+\item[\tt empty] No captions or labels are used.
+\item[\tt left]  The labels go on the left of each slide (the default when the
+\o{portrait} option is not used).
+\item[\tt bottom] The labels go on the bottom (the default with the
+\o{portrait} option).
+\end{description}
+The label you get is the value of \N\slidelabel. The default definition of
+\n\slidelabel\ is
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \bf Slide \theslide
+\end{LVerbatim}
+
+\section{Notes\label{S-notes}}
+
+In addition to slides, you can include a few comments following each slide to
+remind you of what to say, or even the entire text of your presentation for
+your own benefit or to be distributed to others. These comments or text,
+referred to in this documentation as ``notes'', do not go inside any special
+environment. However, a slide cannot go in the middle of a paragraph of notes.
+
+To include notes this way, you have to use one of the following style options,
+which determine what is printed:
+\begin{quote}
+  \begin{tabular}{ll}
+    \O{slidesonly} & Only the slides are printed.\\
+    \O{notes} & Both notes and slides are printed.\\
+    \O{notesonly} & Only the notes are printed.\\
+  \end{tabular}
+\end{quote}
+These style options are referred to as {\em selections} in this documentation.
+
+The pages of notes following slide 5 are numbered 5.1, 5.2, etc.
+
+You can use the "portrait" option to print out your notes, even if you don't
+use this option when printing the slides.
+
+With the "notesonly" selection, the slides are not printed, but they are
+processed. This means that one can still refer in the notes to slides or to
+equations in slides.
+
+The fact that various spacing parameters are initialized at the beginning of
+each slide (see Section \ref{S-spacing}) means that when you reset these
+parameters outside a slide environment, only the notes are affected. This lets
+you use different values for notes and slides. The command \N\slidefonts\ can
+be used for any special font commands that should apply only to slides. Also,
+the command \N\everyslide\ is executed at the beginning of every slide, and
+you can use this for any other customizations you want to include.
+
+You can also use the "11pt" or "12pt" style option for your notes, without
+changing the size of the fonts in the slides, by using the "\ptsize" command
+to set the font sizes for slides. For example, suppose that the "12pt"
+document style option is used, but the preamble contains  the command
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \ptsize{11}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+and the second slide begins with the command
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \ptsize{9}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+Then the notes use the "12pt" font size declarations, all the slides but the
+second one use the "11pt" font size declarations, and the second slide uses
+the "9pt" font size declarations.
+
+Notes are typeset using \LaTeX's standard output routines, and \LaTeX's
+standard page parameters.
+
+ Finally, it is even possible to use a different page style for notes and
+slides. The page style for notes is set by the "\pagestyle" and
+"\thispagestyle" commands. The command
+\begin{MD}
+  \slidepagestyle{style}
+\end{MD}
+sets a different page style for the slides. If the argument is empty, then the
+page style for slides reverts to the one for notes.\footnote{There is no
+"\thisslidepagestyle" command.}
+
+With the command
+\begin{MD}
+  \onlynotestoo
+\end{MD}
+the "\onlyslides" and "\notslides" commands apply to the notes as well.
+
+
+\section{How notes are omitted\label{omit}}
+
+In the previous section, it was stated that notes are not enclosed in a
+special environment. "seminar.sty" omits notes using special
+macros\footnote{Defined in {\tt xcomment.sty}} that comment out everything
+{\em outside} the slide environments (and a few other environments mentioned
+below). Global declarations that should be processed even when slides are
+omitted go in \e{allversions*} environments, described below.
+
+"seminar.sty" also let you use a more conventional approach to notes. If you
+put the command
+\begin{MD}
+  \noxcomment
+\end{MD}
+in the preamble, then the notes go inside \E{note} environments, and you can
+put all the global declarations outside any environment. "xcomment.sty" is
+used to make \e{note} a comment environment when note should be omitted, and
+otherwise the \e{note} environment does nothing. This mode of operation is
+more robust than omitting everything outside the slide environments, but
+remembering to insert the
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \begin{note} ... \end{note}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+is more tedious.
+
+Here are a few technicalities that have to do with "xcomment.sty" and that
+apply whether or not you use \n\noxcomment.
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item The text that follows the beginning of a slide environment (when not
+using \n\noxcomment) or the end of a \e{note} environment {\em must have
+balanced curly braces}.
+\item "\input" and "\include" commands are followed, even when found in
+omitted notes, but you must use the \LaTeX\ syntax "\input{<file>}" (as
+opposed to \verb*+\input <file> +), and the inputted file must end with
+"\endinput" (this is a good practice anyway).
+\item In omitted text, "%" is still a comment character (hence it is possible
+to comment out a slide or note environment).
+\item A temporary file, "\jobname.tmp", is created (this is of no
+consequence---just in case you wanted to know where it comes from).
+\end{enumerate}
+
+The rest of this section deals with special considerations when omitting
+everything outside the slide environments.
+
+If you might want to make a global change to one of the slide parameters after
+the document preamble, you cannot include it in a slide environment because
+the change will be local, and you cannot include it in the notes because the
+change won't be processed when the notes are omitted.
+
+To get around this problem, an environment \E{allversions*} is provided. It is
+processed even when notes are omitted, and any parameter changes or command
+definitions made within the environment are global. Don't generate any output
+within this environment.
+
+On a rare occasion you might want to include some text that should be typeset
+even when the other notes are omitted (e.g.,  a list of the slides, or a cover
+page). The \E{allversions} environment is provided for this purpose.
+
+If you do any serious hacking, you might want to add to the list of
+environments that should be included with the "slidesonly" selection. Do this
+with the command
+\begin{MD}
+  \addtoslidelist{list}
+\end{MD}
+where <list> is a comma separated list of environments, without spaces.
+
+\section{The article format\label{S-article}}
+
+The \o{article} style option was described in Section \ref{S-twoup} as a way
+to print your slides two-up. This option is also a good way to print your
+notes.
+
+The \o{article} option gets its name because your document is typeset somewhat
+like it would be with \LaTeX's "article" style. (It uses \LaTeX's standard
+page parameters, but some of the default values are different.) It is also
+called the article {\em format}; the slides format is what you get without the
+\o{article} option.
+
+You probably don't want to use the \o{portrait} style option with the
+\o{article} format except when you are only printing portrait slides. But you
+are welcome to experiment.
+
+With the \o{notesonly} selection, you can make the notes as big as you want
+using the \n\articlemag\ command (e.g., for easy reading while giving a
+presentation). Just as in the \o{slides} format, the page parameters are
+scaled at the beginning of the document so that they can be set with their
+true dimensions in the preamble.
+
+The commands
+\begin{MD}
+  \setartlength{cmd}{len}\\
+  \addtoartlength{cmd}{len}
+\end{MD}
+are analogous to "\setslidelength" and "\addtoslidelength", but they scale the
+lengths so that they end up at the specified size after magnification in the
+"article" format. You never would use such a command in slide environments or
+to set slide parameters, but you might use these in the notes if you were
+planning on typesetting your notes with the "article" format rather than the
+"slides" format.
+
+You can change the placement of slides in the \o{article} format using the
+\begin{MD}
+  \slideplacement{name}
+\end{MD}
+command. Here are the valid placement names:
+\begin{description}
+  \item[float] The slides are floated. This is the default with the \o{notes}
+selection and the \o{portrait} option.
+  \item[float*] Like "float", but if the notes are printed in a two-column
+format the slides extend across both columns (e.g., like "table" versus
+"table*"). This is the default with the \o{notes} selection without the
+\o{portrait} option.
+  \item[onepercol] Each slide is centered horizontally and vertically within a
+single column. This is the default when only slides are printed and the
+\o{portrait} option is used.
+  \item[twopercol] Each slide is centered horizontally, two or one per column,
+depending on how many fit. This is the default when only slides are printed
+and the \o{portrait} option is not used.
+  \item[here] Each slide is centered horizontally, separated from adjoining
+text or other slides by the rubber length \N\slidesep.  The default value of
+\n\slidesep\ is "\intextskip". This is useful with the \o{notes} selection
+when you want the slides to precede accompanying comments and when you do not
+mind large spaces at the bottom of pages.
+  \item[here*] This is like "here*", but with "here*" the length \n\slidesep\
+is not lost when it falls at the beginning of a page or after a slide.
+\end{description}
+
+If you want each slide environment to begin a new page (with any of the
+selections), put the command
+\begin{MD}
+  \slideclearpagetrue
+\end{MD}
+in the preamble.
+
+The \o{notesonly} selection has a starred version, \O{notesonly*}, which
+produces a slide marker for each slide environment, like this one:
+\begin{center}
+\leavevmode
+\vbox{%
+\hrule height 1pt
+\kern 8pt
+\hbox to \linewidth{\hss \LARGE\bf Slide 4 \hss}%
+\kern 8pt
+\hrule height 1pt}
+\end{center}
+
+
+Commands that are irrelevant in the "article" format are simply ignored. The
+idea is that it should be possible to switch back and forth between the two
+formats without making any other changes in the document. However, this is not
+entirely possible. Changing "\parindent" or "\textwidth" in the preamble
+affects both formats. You can get around this using the \n\ifarticle\
+conditional. For example,
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \ifarticle
+    blah blah
+  \else
+    blee blee
+  \fi
+\end{LVerbatim}
+The "\else" part is optional.
+
+
+\section{Page styles}
+
+The page styles "empty", "plain", "headings" and "myheadings" work like in
+\LaTeX's article style. There is also a page style "align" which puts "+"
+signs in the corners, like in \SliTeX.\footnote{See question \ref{Pagestyle}
+in Section \ref{tips} for suggestions on defining new page styles.} You can
+change the size of the fonts used in headers and footers in the slides format
+by setting the commands
+\begin{MD}
+  \slideheadfont\\
+  \slidefootfont
+\end{MD}
+to the desired size, using "\renewcommand" (but any explicit font declarations
+in a page style override these commands). The default definition of these
+commands is "\scriptsize".
+
+
+\section{Other style options\label{options}}
+
+The style options described so far, "portrait", "article", "slidesonly",
+"notes", and "notesonly", were designed specifically for "seminar.sty". There
+are other such style options described elsewhere in this documentation: 
+"semrot" (page \pageref{o+semrot}), \o{semlayer} (page \pageref{o+semlayer}).
+\o{semcolor} (page \pageref{o+semcolor}), "semhelv" (page
+\pageref{o+semhelv}), "semlcmss" (page \pageref{o+semlcmss}), and "a4" (page
+\pageref{o+a4}).
+
+Here are two more style options that are part of the "seminar.sty" package,
+but that can be used with other document styles:
+\begin{description}
+\item[fancybox] "fancybox.sty" is specific to slides, but it contains commands
+and documentation that are useful for making slides.
+
+\item[slidesec] This sets up some sectioning/heading commands for slides, and
+lets you print a list of slides or a table of contents. See the file
+"slidesec.sty" for details.
+\end{description}
+
+It is impossible to predict, much less describe, the consequences of using all
+the other available \LaTeX{} style option with each selection and format.
+Since this document style is an extension of \LaTeX's "article" style, style
+options and commands that do not work with \SliTeX{} may well work here. Just
+about any style option that works with \LaTeX's "article" style will work with
+the "article" format. When unsure of the effect of an option, just try it and
+see for yourself what happens.
+
+\section{Overlays\label{S-overlays}}
+
+For overlays, you must use both the \O{semlayer} and \o{semcolor} style
+options (see page \pageref{o+semcolor}).
+
+Overlays have two purposes. First, you can use overlays to gradually add
+layers of information on a slide during a presentation. Second, you can use
+overlays to make color layers; each layer is printed in black-on-white on
+paper, and then you use some kind of color copying service to put each layer
+on a transparency in a different color. This is not nearly as nice as having a
+color printer or using a color printing service, but it's the next best thing.
+
+"seminar.sty" lets you make both types of overlays (and the main slide) from a
+single slide environment. The command\footnote{You can also write
+\begin{Ex}
+  "\begin{overlay}{<n>}" $\ldots$ "\end{overlay}"
+\end{Ex}}
+\begin{MD}
+  \overlay{n}
+\end{MD}
+puts whatever is in its scope (\TeX\ group) on overlay $n$, where
+$n=0,\ldots,9$. Actually, overlay 0 refers to the main slide, but you might
+use "\overlay{0}" because overlay commands can be nested. As implemented by
+the "semcolor" style option, these overlay commands can be used just about
+anywhere, including in math mode, tables, and around an included graphics file
+(if it is a conforming EPS file, at least). Also, it is all right to use
+non-consecutive overlay numbers.
+
+For color layers, you have to start by defining some colors using the command
+\begin{MD}
+  \colorlayers{colors}
+\end{MD}
+<colors> should be a comma separated list of color names, without spaces, as
+in
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \colorlayers{red,green,blue}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+Then you can use the command "\red" just like the command \n\overlay"{<n>}";
+everything in its scope goes on a red color layer.
+
+The "\colorlayers" command obeys the usual rules on scope. You can use this
+command any time, including in a slide environment. The command is cumulative,
+meaning that previously defined color layers continue to exist. The command
+was purposely defined so that it does not complain when a color name is
+already defined; this makes it easier to switch from some other color system
+to a layer system. However, you should be careful not to inadvertently
+redefine some command that you need. Fortunately, there are no \TeX{}
+primitives whose names are the names of colors.
+
+When you print out the slides, the main slide is printed, followed by each of
+the color layers (if any) for the main slide. Then each of the overlays is
+printed, together with each of its color layers. Only overlays or color layers
+that are actually used (i.e., that are not empty) are printed.
+
+You can turn overlays and color layers on and off with the commands
+\begin{MD}
+  \overlaystrue\\
+  \overlaysfalse\\
+  \layerstrue\\
+  \layersfalse
+\end{MD}
+These commands can be used at any time, and they obey the usual scoping rules.
+The default is for overlays to be active in the "slides" format and suppressed
+in the "article" format.
+
+The counter \C{overlay} keeps track of the overlays. The default definition of
+\N\theoverlay\ is:
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \theslide-\alph{overlay}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+Overlays can be cross-referenced.
+
+The command \N\currlayer\ is set to the name of the current color layer.
+\N\thelayer\ makes a label for layers; its default definition is:
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \theoverlay-\currlayer
+\end{LVerbatim}
+Color layers cannot be cross-referenced.
+
+For example, if slide 7 has overlays 1 and 2 and colors "red" and "green",
+then the main slide is numbered 7, followed by layers 7-red and 7-green,
+followed by overlay 7-a, followed by layers 7-a-red and 7-a-green, followed by
+overlay 7-b, followed by layers 7-b-red and 7-b-green.
+
+The caption used in the slide styles is \n\overlaylabel\ for overlays and
+\N\layerlabel\ for layers. The defaults are, respectively,
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \bf Overlay \theoverlay
+  \bf Layer \thelayer
+\end{LVerbatim}
+
+By default the overlays and layers use the same page styles in the "slides"
+format as their ``owner.'' You can specify special page styles with the
+commands:
+\begin{MD}
+  \overlaypagestyle{style}\\
+  \layerpagestyle{style}
+\end{MD}
+
+Finally, by default the overlays and layers use the same frame style as their
+``owner.'' You can specify special frame styles with the commands:
+\begin{MD}
+  \overlayframe[commands]{style}\\
+  \layerframe[commands]{style}
+\end{MD}
+
+
+\part{Help\label{Help}}
+
+Road map:
+\begin{itemize}
+  \item If you just want to figure out how to do something, check Section
+\ref{tips}, ``Tips and tricks.''
+  \item If you are trying to decipher an error message, check Section
+\ref{errors}, ``Errors.''
+  \item If you are trying to solve some system-dependent problem that has
+arisen, check Section \ref{trouble}, ``Troubleshooting.''
+  \item To convert \SliTeX\ files, see Section \ref{slitex}, ``Converting
+\SliTeX\ files''.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{Tips and tricks\label{tips}}
+
+\faq{How can I fit more material in the slides?}
+
+Or alternatively, make the little material you have fill up the slide.
+
+Let us count the ways:
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item Change the magnification with \n\slidesmag"{<n>}" (affects all the
+slides).
+\item Change the height and/or width of one or all the slides.
+\item Use "\ptsize{<n>}".
+\item Change \n\slidestretch.
+\item Use the \n\raggedslides\ command, which changes the propensity to
+hyphenate.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\faq{How do I include an Encapsulated PostScript figure?\label{EPS}}
+
+The only thing tricky about including EPS files is getting the size right. For
+example, suppose the you want to include a postscript file in a slide using
+the "epsf.sty" macros, and you want it to be 6 inches wide. Then this will do
+the trick:
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \setslidelength{\epsfxsize}{6in}
+  \epsffile{mypic.eps}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+
+If you include the command
+\begin{MD}
+  \espfslidesize
+\end{MD}
+(e.g., in the preamble), then "epsf.sty" will take care of scaling the size
+for you, and so you can just set "\epsfxsize" and "\epsfysize" to their
+magnified sizes (using "\setlength" rather than "\setslidelength"). Or you can
+not set these parameters at all, and then the eps file  appears at its natural
+size on the slide.
+
+Either way, this will have the expected effect:
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \setlength{\epsfysize}{.8\textheight}
+  \epsffile{mypic.eps}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+
+"psfig.tex" does not handle magnification properly. By using magnified
+dimensions, without "\setslidelength", as in
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \psfig{file=mypic.eps,width=6in}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+the picture should appear correctly within a slide, but then it will not scale
+properly if you try to use the \o{article} option or the \n\twoup\ command.
+The solution, if using Rokicki's "dvips", is to use "epsf.sty" (written by the
+man himself).
+
+\faq{How can I print just selected overlays, layers or pages of notes in the
+{\tt slides} format?}
+
+The "\onlyslides" and "\notslides" commands affect only slides. If a slide is
+omitted, so are all its overlays and color layers. To be more selective, you
+have to use your dvi driver to select the pages to be printed.
+
+In the "slides" format, the page numbers recognized by dvi drivers correspond
+to the numbers of the slides. This means that a slide and all the overlays,
+layers and notes that correspond to that slide have the same page number. Some
+drivers allow one to select occurrence $n$ of a page number. E.g., with
+"dvips",
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  dvips -p2.1 -l2.4 myslides
+\end{LVerbatim}
+will print the first through fourth page of overlays or notes that follow
+slide 2.
+
+If your dvi driver does not support such selection, and you would prefer that
+the driver recognize physical page numbers, then put the command
+\N\truepagenumbers\ in the preamble.
+
+
+\faq{How do I define custom page styles?}
+\label{Pagestyle}
+
+There is nothing special about defining new page styles in "seminar.sty".
+However, to make it easier to do this in the preamble, the commands
+\begin{MD}
+  \newpagestyle{style}{header}{footer}\\
+  \renewpagestyle{style}{header}{footer}
+\end{MD}
+are provided.\footnote{%
+  You can also use the macros in "fancyheadings.sty", which is available from
+various archives. However, you have to set the pagestyle {\em after}
+"\begin{document}".
+Otherwise, the dimensions get screwed up. If using the \o{slidesonly}
+selection, then you also need to enclose the "\pagestyle" command in
+an \e{allversions*} environment. E.g.,
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \begin{allversions*}
+    \pagestyle{fancy}
+  \end{allversions*}
+\end{LVerbatim}}
+
+<style> is the name of the page style, and <header> is the header, and
+<footer> is the footer. These can only be used for simple page styles that are
+the same for odd and even pages, and that do not do anything special with
+section marks.
+
+Headers and footers are set in an "\hbox" the width of the page
+("\textwidth"). You can use stretchable space such as "\hspace*{\fill}" or
+"\hfil" to center some information or put it flush against the margins. See
+the definitions of page styles in "latex.tex" and "article.sty" for examples.
+
+Here is an example: Professor Starr wants lots of information in the headers
+and footers for the slides, and so she defines the page style
+"mypagestyle":\footnote{{\tt\string\thedate} is set with the {\tt\string\date}
+command.}
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \newpagestyle{mypagestyle}%
+    {\sl Big U \hfil \thedate \hfil \thepage}%
+    {\hfil File \jobname.tex; printed \today\hfil}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+Prof.\ Starr wants to use the standard "headings" page style for notes and the
+"mypagestyle" page style for slides, and she wants overlays to just have the
+overlay number. Therefore, she defines another page style for the overlays:
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \newpagestyle{myoverlays}{\hfil \thepage}{}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+and she puts
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \pagestyle{headings}
+  \slidepagestyle{mypagestyle}
+  \overlaypagestyle{myoverlays}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+in the preamble.
+
+\faq{How do I change a parameter only for the {\tt slides} format?}
+\label{conditionals}
+
+The conditionals
+\begin{MD}
+  \ifarticle\ $\ldots$ "\else" $\ldots$ "\fi"\\
+  \ifslidesonly\ $\ldots$ "\else" $\ldots$ "\fi"\\
+  \ifnotes\ $\ldots$ "\else" $\ldots$ "\fi"\\
+  \ifnotesonly\ $\ldots$ "\else" $\ldots$ "\fi"\\
+  \ifportrait\ $\ldots$ "\else" $\ldots$ "\fi"
+\end{MD}
+allow one to select for what versions material is to be processed. "\ifnotes"
+is true if and only if the "notes" selection is in effect, and so on. The
+"\else" clause is optional. See {\em The \TeX book}, Chapter 20, for more
+information about using conditionals.
+
+For example, the first line below sets the slide rotation to "right" in the
+"article" format only. The second line changes the page style for the "notes"
+and "notesonly" selections and "article" format:
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \ifarticle\sliderotation{right}\fi
+  \ifarticle\ifslidesonly\else\pagestyle{myheadings}\fi\fi
+\end{LVerbatim}
+
+\faq{Why does extra space get inserted at the top of a slide when I begin the
+slide with a color or overlay command (when using the \o{semcolor} option)?}
+
+Color and overlay commands with the "semcolor" option use "\special"'s. \TeX{}
+adds the space "\parskip" between the "\special"'s and the first material in
+the slide.
+
+Here is the workaround: If that material is an ordinary paragraph, put the
+command "\leavevmode" just after the color or overlay command. In other cases,
+if you are sure this is the problem, put "\vskip-\parskip" just before the
+color or overlay command.
+
+\section{Errors\label{errors}}
+
+There are several errors that identify themselves as being from "seminar.sty",
+but the error messages are so self-explanatory that that there is no need to
+describe them here. Instead, this section explains a few especially cryptic
+\TeX{} error messages that can arise when using "seminar.sty". These errors
+may also arise for reasons that are not particular to the "seminar.sty"
+macros. See your favorite \TeX{} and \LaTeX{} manuals for more help in
+debugging your documents.
+
+\error"! File ended while scanning use of \next."
+
+You are missing an "\end{document}" on the main file or an "\endinput" on a
+file that is input.
+
+
+\error"! File ended within \read."
+
+You may have an unmatched curly brace following "\begin{slide}" on the same
+line. See Section \ref{omit}.
+
+
+\error"! Paragraph ended before \begin@slide was complete."
+
+You have not specified the optional argument for the "slide" or "slide*"
+environment correctly (see Section \ref{slidedim}), or the first character in
+a slide environment is a "[" (put a pair "{}" of braces before the "[").
+
+\section{Troubleshooting\label{trouble}}
+\setcounter{faq}{0}
+
+\faq{A few slides do not come out two-up with the \o{article} option.}
+
+First, read Section \ref{S-twoup} carefully. If the slides still do not come
+out twoup, it might be that there is extraneous output between the slides. Try
+putting the commands
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \slideplacement{here*}
+  \setlength{\slidesep}{8pt plus 1fill}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+in the preamble ("8pt" should be one-half the minimum distance between
+slides). If this solves the problem, look for the extraneous output, or just
+leave those commands in the preamble.
+
+
+\faq{What kind of incompatibilities are there between {\tt seminar.sty} and
+other macros?}
+
+Of course, whenever you load macros that are not part of the standard \LaTeX{}
+distribution and that were not designed to work with "seminar.sty", problems
+may arise because of name conflicts. What are listed here are changes made to
+\LaTeX{} commands that may conflict with other macros that also redefine these
+command. The problems listed here are very unlikely to occur, however, unless
+you have a habit of seriously hacking the standard \LaTeX{} macro files.
+
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item This style modifies the definitions of the \LaTeX{} primitive
+"\document". It generally will not be upset by, nor will it void,
+modifications to "\document" made before "seminar.sty" is input. However,
+subsequent modifications of "\document" may cause problems.
+
+\item "xcomment.sty", which is input by "seminar.sty" with the "slidesonly"
+selection, modifies the definition of "\end" within included environments.
+This is generally compatible with modifications to "\end" made outside
+environments, but may conflict with modifications to "\end" made inside
+environments.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\faq{Why are the landscape slides displayed sideways and the portrait slides
+displayed upside down on my previewer?}
+
+This document style makes frequent use of landscape mode. Some DVI-to-PS
+converters, such as older versions of Rokicki's "dvips", use their own
+PostScript macros to print a landscape document, rather than simply
+instructing PostScript to use landscape mode.
+If the PostScript output of such a converter is viewed using a PostScript
+previewer that does not allow you to choose the orientation of the display,
+the output will be positioned correctly on the page, but the page will always
+be displayed in portrait mode. When viewing slides without the "portrait"
+option, the landscape slides will be sideways, and the portrait slides will be
+upside-down!
+
+There is nothing this style can do to coerce the page to be displayed in
+landscape mode. There are various ways to minimize neck strain, however:
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item The direction in which the portrait slides are rotated can be reversed,
+so that they end up right-side-up. Just put
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \sliderotation{right}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+before the beginning of the document (assuming that you are using rotation
+macros).
+\item You can also get the portrait slides to be displayed right-side-up by
+using the "portrait" style option (Section \ref{options}).
+\item In the "article" format, the document is typeset in portrait mode
+(unless the "portrait" option is used), and so the landscape slides are
+right-side-up. You can use this format when composing and proof-reading the
+slides.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\faq{Why is my dvi driver soooo slow?}
+
+Probably it cannot find the right font bitmaps, and so it is either
+automatically generating new ones, or it is scaling the ones it can find.
+Either way, as long as you can somehow generate the missing font bitmaps, this
+problem is transitory. See Appendix \ref{bitmaps} for details.
+
+\faq{Why does \TeX{} complain about missing circle fonts?}
+
+Older versions of the NFSS use the names "circle10" and "circlew10" for the
+\LaTeX circle fonts, instead of the otherwise standard names "lcircle10" and
+"lcirclew10". You can copy your ".pk" and ".tfm" files to the new names, or
+get a new version of the NFSS.
+
+\section{Converting \SliTeX\ files}\label{slitex}
+
+"seminar.sty" can do everything \SliTeX\ can do, and much
+more\footnote{However, color layers and overlays require PSTricks and a
+PostScript printer.} Here is a brief and incomplete description of how to do
+with "seminar.sty" what you can do with \SliTeX, and how to convert \SliTeX\
+files.
+
+\begin{itemize}
+  \item Use "seminar" as your document style, instead of "slides".
+
+  \item Run \LaTeX\ or \AmS-\LaTeX, instead of \SliTeX.
+
+  \item With "seminar.sty", the preamble and slides can all go in the same
+file.
+
+  \item The default in "seminar.sty" is to get landscape slides. If you want
+to convert a \SliTeX\ file containing portrait slides, add the "portrait" 
+style option, and replace your "slide" environments by "slide*" environments.
+
+  \item With "seminar.sty", notes do not need to go in a separate environment.
+To convert a \SliTeX\ file containing "note" environments, define a note
+environment that does nothing:
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \newenvironment{note}{}{}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+
+  \item For color layers:
+  \begin{itemize}
+    \item Use the "\colorlayers" command instead of the "\colors" command.
+    \item Delete the argument to the "slide" and "slide*" environments that
+lists the color layers.
+    \item Include the \o{semlayer} style option.
+  \end{itemize}
+
+  \item "seminar.sty" does not use separate environments for overlays:
+  \begin{itemize}
+    \item Remove the "overlay" environments.
+    \item Replace "\invisible" commands by "\overlay{1}", "\overlay{2}", etc.
+    \item Include the \o{semlayer} style option.
+  \end{itemize}
+
+  \item To actually produce the overlays and color layers, you have to have
+PSTricks and a PostScript printer, and you must include the \o{semcolor} style
+option.
+
+  \item Use \n\onlyslides"{<list>}" and \n\onlynotestoo\ instead of
+"\onlynotes".
+\end{itemize}
+
+
+\begingroup
+\def\addcontentsline#1#2#3{}%
+\def\thepart{Appendices:}
+\part{Configuration}
+\endgroup
+\begingroup
+\def\thepart{}
+\addcontentsline{toc}{part}{Appendices:\hspace{1em}Configuration}
+\endgroup
+\appendix
+
+Before reading this appendix, you should follow the installation instructions
+in the file "sem-read.me" that is distributed with "seminar.sty".
+
+\section{The short story about fonts}\label{short-fonts}
+
+"seminar.sty" is a \LaTeX{} style, and you can use whatever fonts that are
+compatible with \LaTeX\ (or \AmS-\LaTeX). However, you are likely to want to
+use special fonts with "seminar.sty"; see Appendix \ref{fonts} for help.
+Furthermore, you are likely to want to use fonts in sizes that are larger than
+the standard sizes; see Appendix \ref{bitmaps} for help.
+
+But if you don't want to read these appendices, you can just use whatever
+\LaTeX\ fonts you know how to use (e.g., the standard Computer Modern fonts).
+To be sure you need only standard font magnifications:\footnote{This is not a
+consideration if you are using only PostScript or other scalable fonts.}
+\begin{itemize}\label{font-res}
+  \item Don't use the "11pt" or "12pt" style options  (or the \n\ptsize{}
+command).
+  \item Don't change the document magnification (or only use 0--4 magsteps).
+  \item Don't use any font size larger than "\large".
+  \item Don't use the \n\twoup\ command.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{Choosing fonts\label{fonts}}
+
+So that you can use different fonts for the notes and the slides (if you
+want), the command "\slidefonts" is invoked at the beginning of every slide
+environment. Define it to set up any special fonts for the slides.
+
+Here are the font configurations that come ready-to-use with "seminar.sty".
+You might also use these as a starting point for your own configurations.
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item You can just use the regular old Computer Modern fonts that you probably
+grew up on. For this, you don't have to do anything at all. Ain't that easy?
+But see the next section about font bitmaps.
+
+\item The \O{semhelv} style option sets up the PostScript Helvetica text fonts
+for the slides. The Computer Modern fonts are still used for math and for the
+notes with the \o{article} format. You need a PostScript printer, a dvi-to-ps
+driver that supports PostScript fonts (e.g., Rokicki's "dvips"), and the New
+Font Selection Scheme. You should also check the font file names used in
+"semhelv.sty", and change them if necessary to match the names on your system.
+
+This combination of fonts is highly recommended because sans serif fonts look
+good for slides, Helvetica is a resident font in just about all PostScript
+printers, and the fonts are scalable and thus there is no problem of needing
+new bitmaps.
+
+\item The \O{semlcmss} style option sets up the \SliTeX\ sans serif fonts for
+the slides, and uses the Computer Modern fonts for notes with the \o{article}
+format. The \SliTeX\ fonts are ugly, but they might be the only usable sans
+serif font you have on your system and you are really dying for that kind of
+font. Also, they usually come ready for printing magnified documents, and so
+you won't need too many new font bitmaps. You must have the New Font Selection
+Scheme. "semlcmss" uses
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \slidesmag{4}
+  \ptsize{10}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+Deviating from this will increase the need for new font bitmaps.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+The New Font Selection Scheme (NFSS) mentioned above is a macro package for
+\LaTeX{} that greatly simplifies using non-standard fonts. The NFSS was
+written by Frank Mittelbach and Rainer Sch\"opf, and is available from various
+archives, including:
+\begin{center}
+"ftp.uni-stuttgart.de"
+\end{center}
+It is far easier to take the 10 minutes or so that are required (in theory, at
+least) to install the NFSS, than it is to try to muck around with \LaTeX's
+font primitives.
+
+
+\section{Font bitmaps\label{bitmaps}}
+
+If you are only using PostScript or other scalable fonts, or if you obey the
+restrictions listed on page \pageref{font-res}, then you can ignores this
+appendix.
+
+To use "seminar.sty", you may need font bitmap sizes that are not currently
+found on your system. This section describes how to avoid this and what to do
+about it. First, a few paragraphs about magnification and font bitmaps.
+
+\TeX's Metafont fonts are designed for a type size, such as 5pt. Most font
+families are available at least in the sizes 5pt, 6pt, 7pt, 8pt, 9pt and 10pt.
+Some are also available in the sizes 12pt and 17pt (and others), but often any
+size above 10pt is obtained by scaling the 10pt fonts. Table \ref{font-mag}
+lists the possible magnifications for fonts, depending on which option you are
+using ("10pt", "11pt" or "12pt"), and depending on the \LaTeX{} type size
+declaration that is in effect (e.g., "\small"). The magnifications are given
+in magsteps, which is \TeX's standard unit for font magnifications. $n$
+magsteps means a magnification of $1.2^n$.
+
+\begin{table}
+\hrule  height 1pt\relax
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}{l|c|c|c|}
+\multicolumn{1}{l}{size} &
+\multicolumn{1}{c}{default (10pt)} &
+  \multicolumn{1}{c}{11pt option}  &
+  \multicolumn{1}{c}{12pt option}\\
+\cline{2-4} "\tiny"       & 0  & 0 & 0\\
+\cline{2-4} "\scriptsize" & 0  & 0 & 0\\
+\cline{2-4} "\footnotesize" & 0 & 0 & 0 \\
+\cline{2-4} "\small"        & 0 & 0 & 1/2 \\
+\cline{2-4} "\normalsize" & 0 & 1/2 & 1 \\
+\cline{2-4} "\large"      & 1 & 1 & 2 \\
+\cline{2-4} "\Large"      & 2 & 2 & 3 \\
+\cline{2-4} "\LARGE"      & 3 & 3 & 4\\
+\cline{2-4} "\huge"       & 4 & 4 & 5\\
+\cline{2-4} "\Huge"       & 5 & 5 & 5\\
+\cline{2-4}
+\end{tabular}
+
+\caption{Font magnification in magsteps ($n$ means a magnification of $1.2^n$)
+for a font that is available in 5pt, 6pt, 7pt, 8pt, 9pt and 10pt
+sizes.\label{font-mag}}
+\end{center}
+\hrule  height 1pt\relax
+\end{table}
+
+Both the "article" and the "slides" formats may also magnify the document. By
+default, the magnification of the "slides" format is 4 magsteps, and the
+magnification of the "article" format is 0. To find the total font
+magnification, add the magnification listed in the table to the magnification
+of the document. E.g., in the "slides" format with the "12pt" option (or the
+command "\ptsize{12}" at the beginning of a slide), the "\large" command may
+invoke fonts that  have a magnification of up to 7 magsteps.
+
+Most systems have font bitmaps for 0, 1/2, 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 magsteps. If you
+obey the restrictions listed on page \pageref{font-res}, then you will only
+need fonts in these standard magnifications. However, if you want to use other
+font magnifications, then check with your system administrator to determine
+which of the following applies to you (or just plunge ahead and see what
+happens):
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item If you have Metafont and "dvips" or some other driver that automatically
+generates font bitmaps as needed, and if this feature is enabled, then you
+will simply notice that it takes a long time to print documents at first,
+because the driver has to wait for the new font bitmaps to be made.
+Eventually, you will have generated all the extra bitmaps you need, and this
+delay will go away.
+\item If you have Metafont, but your dvi driver does not automatically
+generate needed bitmaps, then you just need to keep track of what font bitmaps
+you are missing as you use "seminar.sty" and occasionally run Metafont to make
+them. You will also notice a delay when a font bitmap is missing, because your
+driver will probably scale the closest bitmap it finds, and this can take time
+on some systems.
+\item If you do not even have Metafont, then you have to try to get by without
+the extra bitmaps. Scaled fonts look lousy, but an occasional scaled font in a
+heading is not so bad.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+Of course, PostScript and other scalable fonts do not present any problem, and
+so it is a good idea to use these as much as possible. The Computer Modern
+fonts are available from Blue Sky Research in PostScript Type I format. If you
+do not have PostScript versions of the CM fonts, and you instead use other
+PostScript fonts for text, then you are likely to still need bitmapped fonts
+for mathematics. However, since mathematics is usually set at "\normalsize" or
+smaller, this is not a big problem.
+
+If you are installing "seminar.sty" on a multi-user system, then hopefully you
+will make the needed fonts available.
+
+\section{Color}
+
+You can use whatever color commands you ordinarily use with \LaTeX. You might
+try the \o{semcolor} style option, which lets you use the PSTricks color
+commands for printing on a color PostScript printer. The \o{semcolor} option
+combined with the \o{semlayer} option (see Section \ref{S-overlays}) lets you
+print color layers.
+
+\section{Landscape printing and slide rotation\label{S-landscape}}
+
+If your dvi driver supports a "\special" for landscape printing, then you can
+define \N\printlandscape\ in the preamble of your document to invoke this
+command. E.g., for "dvips" put the line
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \renewcommand{\printlandscape}{\special{landscape}}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+in the preamble. Otherwise, "seminar.sty" will display a message reminding you
+to print your document in landscape mode, when appropriate.
+
+You can print both landscape and portrait slides in one shot if you can rotate
+the portrait slides when printing in landscape mode or the landscape slides
+when printing in portrait mode. If you are using a PostScript printer, you
+probably are using a dvi driver that supports rotation; otherwise, you
+probably are not. Here are suggestions for setting up rotation:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item The \o{semcolor} option provides an interface to the rotation macros in
+PSTricks (see Appendix \ref{S-semcolor}); it works with many popular dvi-to-ps
+drivers.
+
+\item If you are using Rokicki's "dvips" and want rotation but do not want to
+load the entire PSTricks package, then use the \O{semrot} option instead of
+the \o{semcolor} option.
+
+\item If the \o{semcolor} and \o{semrot} options do not work for you, but you
+have your own rotation macros, then you have to define the commands
+\begin{MD}
+  \leftsliderotation\\
+  \rightsliderotation
+\end{MD}
+so that they rotate something left and right, respectively. For example,
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \renewcommand{\leftsliderotation}[1]{\rotateleft{#1}}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+\end{itemize}
+
+In any case, you can determine the direction of rotation using
+\begin{MD}
+  \sliderotation{direction}
+\end{MD}
+where valid directions are "none", "left" and "right". The default is "left".
+
+By default, the headers and footers aren't rotated, but you can switch between
+rotating and not rotating the headers with the commands:
+\begin{MD}
+  \rotateheaderstrue\\
+  \rotateheadersfalse
+\end{MD}
+
+\section{The semcolor style option\label{S-semcolor}}
+
+The \O{semcolor} option sets up an interface between "seminar.sty" and the
+PSTricks package. PSTricks is a collection of PostScript macros for \TeX. It
+works with Rokicki's "dvips", and several other dvi-to-ps drivers. You can
+probably get the PSTricks package from wherever you obtained "seminar.sty", or
+check the archives listed in the PSTricks read-me file, "read-me.pst", which
+is distributed with "seminar.sty".
+
+What the \o{semcolor} style option gives you, compared to just using the
+PSTricks package, is:
+\begin{description}
+\item[Color] A small patch to make the PSTricks color commands more robust in
+slides.
+\item[Rotation] The rotations "left" and "right" are defined. "left" is the
+default.
+\item[Framing] The frame styles "scplain" (using "\psframebox"), "scdouble"
+(using "\psdblframebox") and "scshadow" (using "\psshadowbox").
+\item[Overlays] Overlays and layers, when used in conjunction with the
+\o{semlayer} option.
+\end{description}
+
+\section{A4 and other paper sizes\label{S-papersizes}}
+
+Use the \O{a4} option when using A4 paper. Note that this option does not
+correspond to an independent file.
+
+If you want to configure seminar.sty for A4 paper by default (without having
+to include style options), then you can do one of the following:
+\begin{enumerate}
+
+  \item Add the following line to "seminar.con" (see Appendix
+\ref{S-configfile}):
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \input{sem-a4.sty}
+\end{LVerbatim}
+
+  \item Add the following lines to "seminar.con" (these lines are just the
+contents of "sem-a4.sty"):
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \def\paperwidth{210mm}
+  \def\paperheight{297mm}
+  \input sem-page.sty
+  \slidewidth 222mm
+  \slideheight 152mm
+\end{LVerbatim}
+
+  \item Create a file such as "mysem.sty", to be used as a document {\em
+style} (rather than style {\em option}), with the following lines:
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \def\paperwidth{210mm}
+  \def\paperheight{297mm}
+  \input seminar.sty
+  \slidewidth 222mm
+  \slideheight 152mm
+\end{LVerbatim}
+
+\end{enumerate}
+
+For other paper sizes, you can create a style option by modifying
+"sem-a4.sty". Then any of the options described above is available to you,
+(with the appropriate parameter values). However, this will give satisfactory
+results only for paper sizes that are close to A4 or 8.5in by 11in.
+
+Note that for any paper size, even 8.5in by 11in, the page parameters that are
+set this way are just suggested defaults, and most people will want to
+customize them. Because of the variety of ways in which "seminar.sty"
+documents can be printed, this is a little more complex than with most
+document styles. Examine "sem-page.sty" to see what page parameters need to be
+set, and when.
+
+\section{Configuration file\label{S-configfile}}
+
+You can put customizations to "seminar.sty" in a file named "seminar.con".
+This file is optional. It is loaded by "seminar.sty" if it exists, {\em
+before} loading the style option files.  E.g., "seminar.con" might contain the
+following lines:
+\begin{LVerbatim}
+  \input semhelv.sty
+  \input semcolor.sty
+  \renewcommand{\printlandscape}{\special{landscape}}
+  \endinput
+\end{LVerbatim}
+
+\clearpage
+\PrintUserIndex
+
+\end{document}
+%% END sem-user.tex
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/semsamp1.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/semsamp1.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b6c8a3459ed
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/semsamp1.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,109 @@
+%%
+%% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of
+%% the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.2 of this license
+%% or (at your option) any later version.  The latest version of this
+%% license is in:
+%% 
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% 
+%% and version 1.2 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version
+%% 1999/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% BEGIN semsamp1.tex
+%
+% This is a sample document for seminar.sty, v0.93 (and maybe later).
+%
+% Try this with and without the article option:
+
+\documentclass[fancybox,article]{seminar}
+
+\def\printlandscape{\special{landscape}}    % Works with dvips.
+
+\articlemag{1}
+
+%\twoup   % Try me.
+
+\newpagestyle{327}%
+  {Economics 327 \hspace{\fill}\rightmark \hspace{\fill}\thepage}{}%
+\pagestyle{327}
+
+\markright{Choice under uncertainty}
+
+\slideframe{Oval}
+
+\newcommand{\heading}[1]{%
+  \begin{center}
+    \large\bf
+    \shadowbox{#1}%
+  \end{center}
+  \vspace{1ex minus 1ex}}
+
+\newcommand{\BF}[1]{{\bf #1:}\hspace{1em}\ignorespaces}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+
+\begin{slide}
+\heading{A heading}
+
+One thing this example illustrates is how the {\tt article} style option is
+good for printing slides two-up, for distribution to a seminar audience or
+class, or just for proofreading.
+
+\BF{Definition}
+$p$ (weakly) first-order stochastically dominates $q$ if for every $\bar z\in
+Z$,
+\[
+  p(z\leq \bar z) \leq q(z\leq \bar z)
+\]
+\end{slide}
+
+
+\begin{slide}
+\heading{Problems with stochastic dominance as a DT}
+
+\begin{center}
+  \begin{tabular}{|r|l|}\hline
+    $z$ & $p(z)$\\ \hline
+    \$999 & .01\\ \hline
+    \$1,000,000 & .99 \\ \hline
+  \end{tabular}%
+  \hspace{1cm}%
+  \begin{tabular}{|r|l|}\hline
+    $z$ & $q(z)$\\ \hline
+    \$1,000 & 1\\ \hline
+  \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+\end{slide}
+
+\begin{slide}
+\heading{Candidate Theory \#3: Expected utility}
+
+Let $Z$ be an arbitrary set of outcomes. Let $u:Z\rightarrow R$ be a utility
+representation of the DM's preferences over the elements of $Z$ as certain
+outcomes. (I.e., $u(y)\geq u(z)$ iff $y \geq z$.)
+
+\end{slide}
+
+
+\begin{slide}
+\heading{Expected utility \& the St.\ Petersburg Paradox}
+
+This can get around even St.\ Petersburg Paradox, because we don't require
+that utility be linear in money:
+
+\begin{center}
+  \begin{tabular}{r|c|c|c|c|c}\cline{2-6}
+    Prize & \$2 & \$4 & \$8 & \$16 & $\ldots$\\ \cline{2-6}
+    $u(z)=\log_2(z)$ & 1 & 2 & 3 & 4 & $\ldots$ \\ \cline{2-6}
+    Prob. & 1/2 &  1/4 & 1/8 & 1/16 & $\ldots$\\ \cline{2-6}
+  \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+
+Expected utility is $\sum_{k=1}^\infty k/2^k = 2$, and so lottery gives same
+expected utility as getting \$4 for sure.
+\end{slide}
+
+
+\end{document}
+%% END semsamp1.tex
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/semsamp2.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/semsamp2.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0cb70611611
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/semsamp2.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,297 @@
+%%
+%% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of
+%% the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.2 of this license
+%% or (at your option) any later version.  The latest version of this
+%% license is in:
+%% 
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% 
+%% and version 1.2 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version
+%% 1999/12/01 or later.
+%%
+
+%% BEGIN semsamp2.tex
+% This is a sample document for seminar.sty, v0.93 (and maybe later).
+%
+% This file contains both landscape and portrait mode slides.
+% Choose one of the following to print them out:
+%  - If using PSTricks, try the semcolor style option.
+%  - If using Rokicki's dvips, try the semrot style option.
+%  - To print the landscape slides, put \landscapeonly in the preamble.
+%    To print the portrait slides, include the portrait style option and
+%    put \portraitonly in the preamble.
+%
+%
+\documentclass[%
+  slidesonly,%  Try notes or notesonly instead.
+  %notes,%      Use instead of slidesonly to typeset the notes.
+  %notesonly,%  Use instead of slidesonly to typeset notes and slides.
+  %semcolor,%   Try me if using PSTricks.
+  %semrot,%     Try me if using Rokicki's dvips.
+  %semhelv,%    Try me if using a PostScript printer.
+  %article,%    Try me.
+  %portrait,%   Try me.
+  %sem-a4,%     Try me if using A4 paper.
+  semlayer%     This must be included, but you need the semcolor option to
+  ]{seminar}                                  % actually see the overlays.
+
+\slidesmag{5}
+\articlemag{1}
+
+%\twoup                     % Try me for twoup printing.
+
+%\portraitonly              % To print only portrait slides
+%\landscapeonly             % To print only landscape slides
+
+%\notslides{\ref{questions}-7,1}   %Try me: The slides are omitted.
+%\onlyslides{\ref{questions}-7,1}  %Try me: Only these slides are included.
+%\onlynotestoo                     %Try me: For selecting notes as well.
+
+\colorlayers{red,blue}      % Try deleting this if using the semcolor option,
+                            % to get \blue and \red to use PostScript color.
+
+%\overlaysfalse             % Suppress overlays with semcolor option.
+%\layersfalse               % Suppress color layers with semcolor option.
+
+\rotateheaderstrue          % Try this out if using rotation macros.
+
+
+\title{Example for seminar.sty}
+\author{Policarpa Salabarrieta}
+\date{July 21, 1991}
+
+\newcommand{\sref}[1]{SLIDE \ref{#1}}
+\newcommand{\heading}[1]{\begin{center}\large\bf #1\end{center}}
+
+\newpagestyle{MH}%
+  {University of Guaduas, March 13, 1998\hfil\thepage}{}
+\pagestyle{MH}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle          % This won't show up when \onlynotestoo is in effect.
+
+\begin{slide}
+  \ifslidesonly              % Title slide only for slidesonly selection.
+    \maketitle
+    \addtocounter{slide}{-1}
+    \slidepagestyle{empty}
+  \fi
+\end{slide}
+
+This is a lot of gobbledy-gook intended only to illustrate some of the
+features of seminar.sty.
+
+ The phrase information overload rings a bell with just about anyone.
+Certainly you all receive more working papers or more applications for
+graduate school than you can readily read. Nevertheless, the term information
+overload is ill-defined. (\sref{too_much}, top)
+
+ A message like this when you check your email conjures up the notion of
+information overload. More generally, information overload always means too
+much information, in some sense or another. But what does ``too much'' mean?
+(\sref{too_much}, bottom) It might just mean that people cannot process all
+the information they receive. That is certainly true for everyone. A claim
+that is much stronger, and that is implicit when people complain about
+informaton overload, is that people {\em should} receive less information, by
+some criterion.
+
+\begin{slide}\label{too_much}%
+\begin{center}
+  \large\bf
+ Information overload = ``Too much'' information
+\end{center}
+\smallskip
+
+\begin{verse} \bf\tt
+  You have 134 unread messages:\\
+  Do you want to read them now?
+\end{verse}
+
+\begin{enumerate}
+  {\overlay2
+  \item People {\overlay1 cannot process all} the information they receive.}
+  \item People {\em should} receive less information.
+ \end{enumerate}
+\end{slide}
+
+  In this paper, I use the term ``information overload'' in both senses.
+(\sref{overload}, bottom). Specifically, I say that an {\em individual} is
+overloaded with information if she receives more information than she can
+process. But I say that there is information overload in a {\em network} if
+there is some mechanism that  makes the senders and/or receivers better off by
+restricting the flow of  information. This latter notion of information
+overload is an equilibrium property, and it depends on what we mean by
+``better off.''
+
+\begin{slide*}\label{overload}
+\ptsize{12}
+
+\begin{itemize}{\overlay1
+  \item There is information {\overlay0 overload in a network if} there is
+some mechanism that, compared to the {\em status quo}, makes the senders
+and/or receivers better off by restricting the flow} of information.'
+
+  \item There is information overload in a network if there is some mechanism
+that, compared to the {\em status quo}, makes the senders and/or receivers
+better off by restricting the flow of information.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\end{slide*}
+
+(\sref{questions})
+  The purpose of my paper is to show why there can be information overload in
+a network and what kind of mechanisms can make the receivers and/or senders
+better off. Since the cost of communication is one factor that restricts
+communication, I am thus also going to look at how the welfare of the senders
+and receivers depends on the cost of communication.
+
+  Most messages don't become jumbled and we can choose which ones to process. 
+But some of us may have a bias towards choosing to process more information
+than we should, like the graduate student who feels compelled to read every
+article on the usual lengthy reading list, and just ends up getting confused
+and ruffling through the papers.
+
+
+\begin{slide}[7.3in,5.5in] \label{questions}
+\heading{Questions}
+
+\begin{itemize}
+  {\overlay1\item When could {\blue there be overload} in networks?}
+  \item What mechanims make the receivers and senders better off?
+  \item How does the welfare {\red of the senders} and receivers depend on the
+cost of communication?
+\end{itemize}
+\end{slide}
+
+
+However, experiments in consumer research and psychology have failed to find
+that such a bias is prevalent. This is in spite of the fact that it is common
+for stress and cognitive strain to increase with information load. We may
+incur such stress and strain because the information we choose to process is
+valuable to us.
+
+More commonly, then, we can and do choose to process roughly as much
+information as we can handle efficiently. This is called screening. But when
+we choose which messages to begin to process, we're ignorant of their
+contents, since otherwise there would be no reason to process them in the
+first place. Therefore, if we receive more junk mail, then some of the
+important mail gets crowded out, and we are effectively less informed.
+
+\begin{slide} \label{informed}
+\begin{center}
+  {\bf Being more informed} \par
+    \smallskip
+  is always better,\par
+    \medskip
+  \overlay1{but it's not the same as \par
+    \smallskip
+  {\bf receiving more information}}
+\end{center}
+\end{slide}
+
+  Why would the senders communicate too many messages in the first place? If I
+present too much material in this seminar, you have to choose which parts to
+ignore and I would rather make that decision myself, since I know what I most
+want to get across. Thus, it is in my interest not to overload you with
+information. Generally, whenever there is a single sender of messages, that
+sender will prefer to screen rather than have the receiver screen, because the
+sender has an interest in which messages the receiver processes.
+But when there are more senders, one sender's  messages tend to crowd out the
+messages of the other senders, as in this example here. If the senders don't
+take this external cost into account when sending messages, they may
+collectively overload the receiver. (\sref{akbar})
+
+There are several reasons that our scarcity of attention, that is, our limited
+capacity to process information, can mean that we become less informed when we
+receive  more information. I have a cartoon here to illustrate these reasons.
+(\sref{akbar})
+
+\begin{slide}\label{akbar}\def\slidefuzz{15pt}
+  {\large A tax $\tau$ on communication is said to support
+$\tilde{\cal{X}}(c)$ if $\tilde{\cal{X}}(c)$ is an equilibrium for
+$\Gamma(c+\tau)$.}
+\medskip
+
+ {\bf Proposition 6.} {\em Assume $\tilde{\cal{X}}(c)$ is not an equilibrium
+for $\Gamma(c)$.\vspace{-3pt}
+\begin{enumerate}
+ \item If $\mbox{supp}(\gamma)=[0,1]^n$, there is no tax that supports
+$\tilde{\cal{X}}(c)$.
+ \item If $\mbox{supp}(\gamma)=S^{n-1}$, there is a tax that supports
+$\tilde{\cal{X}}(c)$ if and only if $m=1$, $p_j>c\, \forall j$, and
+   \begin{enumerate}
+     \item $n=2$; or
+     \item $n=3$ and $p_i^{-1}+p_j^{-1}\geq p_k^{-1}$ for all distinct
+$i,j,k$; or
+     \item $n=4$ and $p_1=p_2=p_3=p_4$.
+\end{enumerate}
+\end{enumerate}}
+\end{slide}
+
+  If, by restricting communication, we eliminate the less relevant messages,
+then we can become more informed. But how can we achieve this? Restricting the
+flow of information shifts the task of screening messages from the receivers
+to the senders. Unlike the receivers, the senders do know the contents of the
+messages they originate. If the senders' interests coincide with those of the
+receiver and if the senders have sufficient knowledge about the receivers,
+then the senders will choose the messages which are most relevant to the
+receivers. This may make the receivers, and even the senders, better off.
+
+  The network in Slide \ref{architectures} attains the minimal delay $c(8,24)
+= 6$ using 8 processors. It is an example of the efficient one-shot networks
+described by Foo. We will focus on a class of networks that are similar to the
+Foo networks but that may differ slightly. For $q$, $c$ and $n$ such that $1
+\leq q \leq \lfloor n/2 \rfloor$ and $c(q,n) \leq c \leq n$, let $R_{nqc}$ be
+the class of essential networks for adding $n$ items using  $q$ processors in
+$c$ cycles that have the following  properties:
+
+\begin{slide*}\label{architectures}
+\heading{Architecture}
+
+\begin{center}
+\setlength{\unitlength}{1.65in}
+\begin{picture}(1.1,1.6)(3.5,5.0)
+\put(4.0,6.5){\circle*{.04}}
+\put(4.1,6.5){1}
+\put(4.0,6.0){\circle*{.04}}
+\put(4.1,6.0){2}
+\put(4.0,6.1){\vector(0,1){.3}}
+\put(3.5,6.0){\circle*{.04}}
+\put(3.6,6.0){3}
+\put(3.6,6.1){\vector(1,1){.3}}
+\put(4.0,5.5){\circle*{.04}}
+\put(4.1,5.5){4}
+\put(4.0,5.6){\vector(0,1){.3}}
+\put(4.5,6.0){\circle*{.04}}
+\put(4.6,6.0){5}
+\put(4.4,6.1){\vector(-1,1){.3}}
+\put(4.5,5.5){\circle*{.04}}
+\put(4.6,5.5){6}
+\put(4.4,5.6){\vector(-1,1){.3}}
+\put(3.5,5.5){\circle*{.04}}
+\put(3.6,5.5){7}
+\put(3.5,5.6){\vector(0,1){.3}}
+\put(4.0,5.0){\circle*{.04}}
+\put(4.1,5.0){8}
+\put(4.0,5.1){\vector(0,1){.3}}
+\end{picture}
+\end{center}
+\end{slide*}
+
+Why would the senders communicate too many messages in the first place? If I
+present too much material in this seminar, you have to choose which parts to
+ignore and I would rather make that decision myself, since I know what I most
+want to get across. Thus, it is in my interest not to overload you with
+information.
+
+Generally, whenever there is a single sender of messages, that sender will
+prefer to screen rather than have the receiver screen, because the sender has
+an interest in which messages the receiver processes. But when there are more
+senders, one sender's  messages tend to crowd out the messages of the other
+senders, as in this example here. If the senders don't take this external cost
+into account when sending messages, they may collectively overload the
+receiver. (\sref{architectures})
+
+\end{document}
+%% END semsamp2.tex
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/tvz-code.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/tvz-code.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..68a52701aa9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/tvz-code.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,291 @@
+%% BEGIN tvz-code.sty
+%% 93/04/01
+%% Tim Van Zandt Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu
+%%
+%% Lousy hacks for typesetting the documented code for the
+%%
+%% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of
+%% the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.2 of this license
+%% or (at your option) any later version.  The latest version of this
+%% license is in:
+%% 
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% 
+%% and version 1.2 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version
+%% 1999/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% seminar.sty and PSTricks packages.
+
+\input tvz-hax.sty
+\input doc.sty         % Tested with v1.7k
+\input art11.sty
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% PAGE PARAMETERS %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+% Paragraphs are marked by space rather than indentation:
+\parindent 0pt
+\parskip 4pt plus 1pt minus 1pt
+
+% Textwidth just wide enough for 78 characters of code.
+\setbox\@tempboxa=\hbox{\small\tt f}
+\textwidth 78\wd\@tempboxa
+\oddsidemargin\paperwidth\relax
+\advance\oddsidemargin -\textwidth
+\divide\oddsidemargin 2
+\advance\oddsidemargin -1in
+\setbox\@tempboxa=\hbox{\tiny 999\ }
+\advance\oddsidemargin\wd\@tempboxa
+\evensidemargin\oddsidemargin
+
+\if@twoside
+  \advance\oddsidemargin .3in
+  \advance\evensidemargin -.3in
+\fi
+
+% No headers, 1in top margin
+\topmargin 0pt
+\headheight 0pt
+\headsep 0pt
+
+% Total bottom margin 1in, text height 9in
+\textheight 9in
+\footskip .625in
+
+% Now adjust for different paper size:
+\@tempdima=\paperheight
+\advance\@tempdima-11in
+\divide\@tempdima 2
+\advance\topmargin \@tempdima
+
+% Marginal notes always on left.
+\marginparwidth 3.5cm
+\marginparsep .5cm
+\reversemarginpar
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% MACROCODE PATCH FOR SHORT META %%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\expandafter\def\expandafter\macrocode\expandafter{%
+  \expandafter\DeleteShortMeta
+  \macrocode}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% DOC PREAMBLE %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\newbox\junkbox
+\def\DocInput#1{%
+  \MakePercentIgnore
+  \setbox\junkbox=\hbox\bgroup
+    \input{#1}%
+  \MakePercentComment}
+\let\EndDocPreamble\egroup
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% VERBATIM %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+% Use fancybox.sty's LVerbatim environment. Each line should contain
+% percent plus three spaces (or other char), including blank lines. E.g.,
+% \begin{LVerbatim}
+%   foo
+%   bar
+% \end{LVerbatim}
+
+\def\EveryVerbatimLine#1#2#3#4{}
+\begingroup
+  \catcode`\%=12
+  \catcode`\ =\active
+  \global\EndVerbatimTokens{% }
+\endgroup
+\AltGetVerbatim
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% INDEXING %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+% Things are faster without \MakeIndex
+
+\def\MakeIndex{\makeindex\EnableCrossrefs}
+\DisableCrossrefs
+
+% Use \codelabel[int]{foo} to label last line of code plus int.
+% E.g., to label first and then last line of some code:
+%  \codelabel[1]{foo}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%  foo
+%  bar
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \codelabel{foo}
+
+\def\codelabel{\@ifnextchar[{\@codelabel}{\@codelabel[0]}}
+\def\@codelabel[#1]#2{%
+  \@bsphack
+  \begingroup
+    \advance\c@CodelineNo #1
+    \def\@currentlabel{\the\c@CodelineNo}%
+    \label{#2}%
+  \endgroup
+  \@esphack}
+
+% Definitions in code are indexed by page number, but other occurences
+% are indexed by the line of code.
+
+\CodelineIndex
+\def\SpecialMainPageIndex#1{%
+  {\let\special@index\index\SpecialMainIndex{#1}}}
+\renewcommand{\theCodelineNo}{{\rm\tiny\arabic{CodelineNo}}}
+
+% Index numbers for main definitions are set in bold rather than underlined.
+
+\def\main#1{{\bf #1}}
+
+% two column index
+
+\setcounter{IndexColumns}{2}
+
+% Customize index prologue:
+
+\def\index@prologue{%
+  \section*{Index}\markboth{Index}{Index}%
+  \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Index}%
+  The {\bf bold} numbers denote the pages where the entries are defined,
+  and all other numbers indicate the {\em lines of code} where
+  the entries are used.}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%  MACRO %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+% A change to the macro environment; prints macro names within the margins
+% of the text, instead of as marginal notes. Use one \macro command,
+% with comma separated macro names.
+
+\newif\iffirst@macroname
+\newif\ifnestedmacro
+
+\def\macro{%
+  \ifnum\macro@level=\z@
+    \def\next{\MakePrivateLetters \m@cro@}%
+  \else
+    \def\next{\@latexerr{Nested \string\begin{macro}}\@eha
+    \endgroup\end{macro}\macro@level=\z@\begin{macro}}
+  \fi
+  \next}
+\def\m@cro@#1{%
+  \first@macronametrue
+  \m@@cro@@#1,\@nil,}
+\def\m@@cro@@#1,{%
+  \def\@tempa{#1}\def\@tempb{\@nil}%
+  \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
+    \let\next\finishm@@cro@@
+  \else
+    {\advance\c@CodelineNo\@ne\SpecialMainPageIndex{#1}\nobreak}%
+    \DoNotIndex{#1}%
+    \iffirst@macroname
+      \edef\saved@macronames{\string#1}%
+      \first@macronamefalse
+    \else
+      \def\comma{\noexpand\comma}%
+      \edef\saved@macronames{\saved@macronames\comma\string#1}%
+    \fi
+    \let\next\m@@cro@@
+  \fi
+  \next}
+\def\finishm@@cro@@{%
+  \advance\macro@level\@ne
+  \def\comma{{\rm, }}%
+  \ListMacroNames{\saved@macronames}}
+
+\let\endmacro\relax
+
+\def\ListMacroNames{%
+  \@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{-2.25ex plus -.5ex minus-.2ex}%
+    {1.3ex plus.2ex}{\csname reset@font\endcsname\large\tt}*}
+
+\MacroIndent 0pt
+
+\def\MacroFont{\small\tt}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% DoNot Index %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\DoNotIndex{\ ,\!,\[,\\,\],\^,\`,\{,\},\~}
+\DoNotIndex{\@warning,\active}
+\DoNotIndex{\begingroup,\catcode,\char,\csname,\def,\do}
+\DoNotIndex{\docdate,\dospecials,\edef,\else,\endcsname,\endgroup}
+\DoNotIndex{\expandafter,\fi,\filedate,\fileversion}
+\DoNotIndex{\gdef,\if,\ifcat}
+\DoNotIndex{\ifx,\immediate,\lccode,\let}
+\DoNotIndex{\lowercase,\next,\noexpand}
+\DoNotIndex{\relax,\space,\the}
+\DoNotIndex{\toks@,\typeout,\write}
+\DoNotIndex{\@M,\@arabic,\@author,\@auxout,\@bsphack,\@car,\@date}
+\DoNotIndex{\@dblarg,\@dblfloat,\@eha,\@empty,\@esphack,\@evenfoot}
+\DoNotIndex{\@evenhead,\@float,\@gobble,\@gobbletwo,\@gtempa,\@ifnextchar}
+\DoNotIndex{\@ifundefined,\@ixpt,\@latexerr,\@listI,\@listi,\@listii}
+\DoNotIndex{\@listiii,\@listiv,\@listv,\@listvi,\@makefnmark,\@mkboth}
+\DoNotIndex{\@namedef,\@nameuse,\@mne,\@nil,\@normalsize,\@oddfoot}
+\DoNotIndex{\@oddhead,\@tempa,\@tempb,\@tempc,\@tempd}
+\DoNotIndex{\@tempdima,\@testfalse,\@testtrue,\test@member}
+\DoNotIndex{\@thanks,\@thefnmark,\@title}
+\DoNotIndex{\@topnum,\@viiipt,\@viipt,\@vipt,\@vpt,\@xiipt}
+\DoNotIndex{\@xipt,\@xpt,\@xivpt,\@xviipt,\@xxpt,\@xxvpt}
+\DoNotIndex{\addcontentsline}
+\DoNotIndex{\advance,\aftergroup,\baselinestretch,\begin}
+\DoNotIndex{\belowdisplayshortskip,\belowdisplayskip,\bf,\bgroup}
+\DoNotIndex{\box,\c@@page,\c@page,\c@secnumdepth,\clearpage,\columnsep}
+\DoNotIndex{\columnwidth,\copy,\dimen@,\dimen@i,\dimen@ii,\divide}
+\DoNotIndex{\dp,\ds@article,\ds@notes,\ds@notesonly}
+\DoNotIndex{\ds@slidesonly,\egrou,\end,\end@dblfoloat,\end@float}
+\DoNotIndex{\endinput,\fnsymbol,\footheight,\footnotesep,\footskip}
+\DoNotIndex{\global,\globaldefs,\hbox,\headheight,\headsep,\hfil}
+\DoNotIndex{\hrule,\hskip,\hss,\ht,\Huge,\huge}
+\DoNotIndex{\if@filesw,\if@test,\if@twocolumn,\if@twoside}
+\DoNotIndex{\ifcase,\ifdim,\ifvmode,\ignorespaces}
+\DoNotIndex{\input,\interlinepenalty,\itemsep,\ixpt,\label}
+\DoNotIndex{\labelsep,\labelwidth,\LARGE,\large,\Large}
+\DoNotIndex{\leavevmode,\leftmargin,\leftmargini,\leftmarginii}
+\DoNotIndex{\leftmarginiii,\leftmarginiv,\leftmarginv}
+\DoNotIndex{\leftmarginvi,\leftmark,\leftskip,\lineskip}
+\DoNotIndex{\magstep,\marginparsep,\marginparwidth,\markboth}
+\DoNotIndex{\markright,\medbreak,\multiply,\newbox,\newcount}
+\DoNotIndex{\newcounter,\newdimen,\newif,\newlabel,\newpage}
+\DoNotIndex{\newtoks,\nobreak,\nointerlineskip,\normallineskip}
+\DoNotIndex{\normalsize,\null,\number,\numberline,\oddsidemargin}
+\DoNotIndex{\offinterlineskip,\or,\par,\parbox,\parskip,\partopsep}
+\DoNotIndex{\prevdepth,\protect,\ref,\refstepcounter,\rightmrk}
+\DoNotIndex{\rm,\scriptsize,\section,\sectionmark,\setbox,\setcounter}
+\DoNotIndex{\sl,\small,\stepcounter,\string,\textheight,\textwidth}
+\DoNotIndex{\thefootnote,\thepage,\thesection,\thesubsection}
+\DoNotIndex{\thispagestyle,\tiny,\topmargin,\topsep,\uppercase}
+\DoNotIndex{\vbox,\vfill,\viiipt,\viipt,\vipt,\vpt,\vskip,\vss}
+\DoNotIndex{\wd,\xcommentloaded@,\xdef,\xiipt,\xipt,\xivpt,\xpt}
+\DoNotIndex{\xviipt,\xxpt,\xxvpt,\z@}
+\DoNotIndex{\abovedisplayskip,\abovedisplayshortskip,\@currentlabel}
+\DoNotIndex{\@dottedtocline,\@ne\@setsize,\@starttoc,\@tempboxa,\@}
+\DoNotIndex{\arraystretch,\centerline,\egroup,\end@dblfloat}
+\DoNotIndex{\evensidemargin,\footnotesize,\ifnum,\parindent,\parsep}
+\DoNotIndex{\rightmark,\@afterindenttrue,\@ne,\if@specialpage.\long}
+\DoNotIndex{\fboxrule,\fboxsep,\@for,\vfil}
+\DoNotIndex{\@@fortmp,\@@tempa,\@@tempb,\@ehd,\@for,\@fortmp,\@m}
+\DoNotIndex{\@mparswitchfalse,\@mparswitchtrue,\@nnil,\@spaces}
+\DoNotIndex{\@specialstyle,\@temptokena,\@twosidefalse,\@twosidetrue}
+\DoNotIndex{\@whilenum,\alph,\arabic,\count@,\errhelp,\errmessage}
+\DoNotIndex{\fbox,\index,\minipage,\newcommand,\overfullrule}
+\DoNotIndex{\pagestyle,\raggedright,\ref@stepcounter,renewcommand}
+\DoNotIndex{\semcolor@loaded,today,\@tempcnta,\@tempcntb,\trivlist,\t,\p}
+\DoNotIndex{\today,\item,\@colht,\@currenvir,\@thefoot,\@thehead}
+\DoNotIndex{\@totalleftmargin,\allowbreak,\@captype,\@footnotetext}
+\DoNotIndex{\@listdepth,\@minipagefalse,\@minipagetrue,\@mpfn,\@mpfootins}
+\DoNotIndex{\endtrivlist,\everypar,\hsize,\ifvoid,\lastskip}
+\DoNotIndex{\linewidth,\skip,\thempfn,\thempfootnote,\topskip,\unvbox}
+\DoNotIndex{\@@input,\@@par,\@acci,\@accii,\@acciii,\@cclv,\@height}
+\DoNotIndex{\@maxdepth,\@tempdimb,\@tempg,\@temph,\@texttop,\@twocolumnfalse}
+\DoNotIndex{\@xfloat,\addvspace,\alloc@,\bigskipamount,\botmark,\chardef}
+\DoNotIndex{\closein,\closeout,\count,\countdef,\dimen,\glossary,\goodbreak}
+\DoNotIndex{\insc@unt,\intextsep,\kern,\mag,\marginpar,\maxdepth,\medskip}
+\DoNotIndex{\moveleft,\newinsert,\newskip,\onecolumn,\openin,\openout}
+\DoNotIndex{\read,\renewcommand,\repeat,\rightskip,\strut,\vfuzz,\voffset}
+\DoNotIndex{\vsize}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\endinput
+
+%% END tvz-code.sty
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/tvz-hax.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/tvz-hax.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f8a4798fccb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/tvz-hax.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,266 @@
+%% BEGIN tvz-hax.sty
+%% 93/04/01
+%% Tim Van Zandt Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu
+%%
+%% These are some lousy hacks for typesetting the code
+%% and User's Guide  in the Seminar and PSTricks packages.
+%%
+%% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of
+%% the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.2 of this license
+%% or (at your option) any later version.  The latest version of this
+%% license is in:
+%% 
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% 
+%% and version 1.2 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version
+%% 1999/12/01 or later.
+%%
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% PAPER SIZES %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+% Default paper size is 8.5in by 11in.
+% Just include the `a4' style option for A4 paper size.
+% For other paper sizes, define \paperwidth and \paperheight
+% before the \documentstyle command.
+
+\@ifundefined{paperwidth}{\def\paperwidth{8.5in}}{}
+\@ifundefined{paperheight}{\def\paperheight{11in}}{}
+\@namedef{ds@a4}{\def\paperwidth{210mm}\def\paperheight{297mm}}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% INPUTS %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\newif\iftwoup
+\@namedef{ds@2up}{\input 2up.tex \twouptrue}
+
+\input article.sty
+\input fancybox.sty    % Version 0.93 or later.
+
+\iftwoup
+  \if@twoside
+    \targetlayout{twosided}
+  \fi
+\fi
+
+\if@twoside
+  \def\twosideclearpage{%
+    \clearpage
+    \ifodd\c@page\else
+      \thispagestyle{empty}%
+      \null\leavevmode
+      \clearpage
+    \fi}
+\else
+  \let\twosideclearpage\clearpage
+\fi
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% MISC %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\def\arraystretch{1.2}
+
+\hfuzz 1pt
+
+% Just in case I'm using AmS-LaTeX.
+\def\makeatother{\catcode`\@=12\relax}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% SHORT META %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+% Works in verbatim environments, unless specially designed.
+\begingroup
+  \catcode`\<=\active
+  \gdef\ShortMeta{%
+    \catcode`\<=\active
+    \def<##1>{{\MetaFont ##1\/}}}
+\endgroup
+\def\DeleteShortMeta{\catcode`\<=12\relax}
+\def\MetaFont{\sl}            % For meta arguments.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% FILE VERSIONS %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+% \GetVersion{file} scans first ten lines of <file> for
+% \filedate and \fileversion definitions.
+%
+% \CheckVersion{file} scans <scans> file for \filedate and \fileversion
+% and then compares these witha \FileDate and \FileVersion.
+%
+\def\GetVersion#1{%
+  \immediate\openin1=#1
+  \count@=0
+  \let\fileversion\relax
+  \let\filedate\relax
+  \@testtrue
+  \loop
+  \if@test
+    \advance\count@1
+    \immediate\read1 to \@tempa
+    \@tempa
+    \ifnum\count@=10
+      \@latexerr{Couldn't find fileversion}\@eha
+      \@testfalse
+    \else
+      \ifx\fileversion\relax
+        \@testtrue
+      \else
+        \ifx\filedate\relax
+          \@testtrue
+        \else
+          \@testfalse
+        \fi
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \repeat}
+
+\def\CheckVersion#1{%
+  \GetVersion{#1}
+  \ifx\FileVersion\fileversion
+    \ifx\FileDate\filedate\else
+      \@latexerr{Doc date (\FileDate) and file date (\filedate)
+         do not match}\@eha
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \@latexerr{Doc version (\FileVersion) and file version (\fileversion)
+      do not match}\@eha
+  \fi}
+
+% This expands the date, as defined in \filedate.
+
+\def\expanddate#1/#2/#3/{%
+  \number#3{}
+  \month=#2
+  \ifcase\month\or
+    January \or February \or March \or April \or May \or June \or
+    July \or August \or September \or October \or November \or December
+  \fi
+  19#1}
+\def\thefiledate{\expandafter\expanddate\filedate/}
+\date{\thefiledate}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% LOGOS %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\def\AmS{{\protect\the\textfont\tw@
+  A\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox{M}\kern-.125em S}}
+
+\def\b@LaTeX{%
+  \begingroup
+    \csname reset@font\endcsname
+    \rm\bf
+    L\kern-.32em
+    \raise.36ex\hbox{%
+      \ifx\@currsize\Huge\LARGE\else
+      \ifx\@currsize\huge\Large\else
+      \ifx\@currsize\LARGE\large\else
+      \ifx\@currsize\Large\normalsize\else
+      \ifx\@currsize\large\small\else
+      \ifx\@currsize\normalsize\footnotesize\else
+      \ifx\@currsize\small\scriptsize\else
+      \ifx\@currsize\footnotesize\scriptscriptsize
+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+      \bf A}%
+    \kern-.15em
+    T\kern-.1667em
+    \lower.7ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125em
+    X%
+  \endgroup}
+\def\bLaTeX{\b@LaTeX}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% PAGE STYLE  %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+% The `docheadings' page style uses footers rather than headers.
+
+\def\ps@docheadings{%
+  \let\@mkboth\markboth
+  \def\@oddhead{}%
+  \let\@evenhead\@oddhead%
+  \def\@oddfoot{%
+    \small\sf
+    \rightmark
+    \hfil
+    \thepage}%
+  \def\@evenfoot{%
+    \small\sf
+    \thepage
+    \hfil
+    \theheadertitle}%
+  \def\sectionmark##1{\markright {##1}}}%
+\pagestyle{docheadings}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Table of Contents %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+% Tighten up spacing in TOC:
+
+\newskip\tempskip
+\def\TOCshrink{.5}
+\def\TableOfContents{%
+  \begin{quote}
+    \begin{center} \Large\bf Contents \end{center}
+    \def\numberline##1{\hbox to 0pt{\hss##1\hskip 1em}}%
+    \let\oldaddvspace\addvspace
+    \def\addvspace##1{%
+      \tempskip##1\relax
+      \oldaddvspace{\TOCshrink\tempskip}}
+    \@starttoc{toc}%
+  \end{quote}}
+\def\tableofcontents{%
+  \clearpage
+  \markright{Table of contents}%
+  \TableOfContents
+  \clearpage}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% code and examples %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+% `Ex' is an environment for putting samples of code.
+% It is a variant of
+%   \begin{quote}\tt ... \end{quote}.
+% It is NOT verbatim.
+
+\def\NotNested{%
+  \def\begin##1{%
+    \@latexerr{Bad nesting of environments.
+      Perhaps missing \end{\@currenvir}}\@eha
+    \end{\@currenvir}%
+    \begin{##1}}}
+
+\def\Ex{%
+  \NotNested
+  \list{}{}\item[]%
+  \if@minipage\else\vskip\parskip\fi
+  \leftskip\@totalleftmargin
+  \rightskip\z@
+  \parindent\z@
+  \parskip\z@
+  \parfillskip\@flushglue
+  \hfuzz 1pt
+  \@@par
+  \global\@inlabelfalse}
+\def\endEx{\endlist}
+
+% Various things to make it easier to write code and examples:
+
+\begingroup
+  \catcode`\{=12 \catcode`\}=12
+  \catcode`\(=1 \catcode`\)=2
+  \catcode`\+=0 \catcode`\\=12
+  +gdef+|(\)          % \| = character \
+  +gdef+{({)          % \{ = character {
+  +gdef+}(})          % \} = character }
++endgroup
+\def\Backslash{\protect\|}
+
+% Define some functional font commands:
+
+\def\MainFont{\tt}            % For macro definitions.
+\def\UsageFont{\tt}           % For in-line macro names.
+\def\InlineFont{\tt}          % For other in-line snipets of code.
+\def\DisplayFont{\tt}         % For displayed code.
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\endinput
+%% END tvz-hax.sty
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/tvz-user.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/tvz-user.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f203fa2cf30
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/tvz-user.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,215 @@
+%%
+%% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of
+%% the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.2 of this license
+%% or (at your option) any later version.  The latest version of this
+%% license is in:
+%% 
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% 
+%% and version 1.2 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version
+%% 1999/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% BEGIN tvz-user.sty
+%% 93/04/01
+
+\input tvz-hax.sty
+
+\def\papersizeadjust{%
+  \@tempdima=\paperwidth\relax
+  \advance\@tempdima-8.5in
+  \divide\@tempdima 2
+  \advance\oddsidemargin\@tempdima
+  \advance\evensidemargin\@tempdima
+  \@tempdima=\paperheight
+  \advance\@tempdima-11in
+  \divide\@tempdima 2
+  \advance\topmargin\@tempdima}
+
+\begingroup
+  \catcode`\"=\active
+  \gdef\ShortVerb{%
+    \catcode`\"=\active
+    \def"{\Verb"}}%
+  \gdef\DeleteShortVerb{\catcode`\"=12\relax}
+\endgroup
+
+% Paragraphs are marked by large space rather than indentation:
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+\setlength{\parskip}{7pt plus 1pt minus 1pt}
+
+% Reduce \topsep:
+\def\@listI{%
+  \leftmargin\leftmargini
+  \parsep 5\p@ plus2.5\p@ minus\p@
+  %\topsep 10\p@ plus4\p@ minus6\p@
+  \topsep 5\p@ plus2\p@ minus2\p@
+  \itemsep 5\p@ plus2.5\p@ minus\p@}
+\let\@listi\@listI
+\@listi
+\def\@listii{%
+  \leftmargin\leftmarginii
+  \labelwidth\leftmarginii
+  \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+  %\topsep 5\p@ plus2.5\p@ minus\p@
+  \topsep 2\p@ plus.5\p@ minus\p@
+  \parsep 2.5\p@ plus\p@ minus\p@
+  \itemsep \parsep}
+\def\@listiii{%
+  \leftmargin\leftmarginiii
+  \labelwidth\leftmarginiii
+  \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+  %\topsep 2.5\p@ plus\p@ minus\p@
+  \topsep 1\p@ plus.2\p@ minus.2\p@
+  \parsep \z@
+  \partopsep \p@ plus\z@ minus\p@
+  \itemsep \topsep}
+
+\skip\footins 20pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Special hacks for User's Guides %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%
+%% Listing questions
+\newcounter{faq}[section]
+\def\thefaq{\arabic{faq}}
+\let\l@faq\@gobbletwo
+\def\faq{\@startsection{faq}{2}{\z@}%
+  {3.25ex plus 1ex minus .2ex}{1.5ex plus .2ex}{\faqfont}}
+\def\faqfont{\normalsize\sf}
+\def\faqmark#1{}
+%%
+%% Listing errors
+\def\error{\vskip 2ex\noindent}
+%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\@ifundefined{AmSTeX}
+   {\def\AmSTeX{\leavevmode\hbox{$\cal A\kern-.2em\lower.376ex%
+        \hbox{$\cal M$}\kern-.2em\cal S$-\TeX}}}{}
+\@ifundefined{BibTeX}
+   {\def\BibTeX{{\rm B\kern-.05em{\sc i\kern-.025em b}\kern-.08em%
+    T\kern-.1667em\lower.7ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125emX}}}{}
+\@ifundefined{SliTeX}
+   {\def\SliTeX{{\rm S\kern-.06emL\kern-.18em\raise.32ex\hbox
+                {\sc i}\kern -.03em\TeX}}}{}
+\@ifundefined{PlainTeX}{\def\PlainTeX{{\sc Plain}\kern2pt\TeX}}{}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Special indexing for User's Guides %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%
+%%
+\@ifundefined{actualchar}{\def\actualchar{@}}{}
+\@ifundefined{quotechar}{\def\quotechar{"}}{}
+\@ifundefined{levelchar}{\def\levelchar{!}}{}
+\@ifundefined{encapchar}{\def\encapchar{|}}{}
+\@ifundefined{verbatimchar}{\def\verbatimchar{+}}{}
+%%
+%% These are the indexing commands:
+%%
+%% Commands:       \MainIndex        \UsageIndex
+%% Environments:   \MainEnvIndex     \UsageEnvIndex
+%% Style options:  \MainOptionIndex  \UsageOptionIndex
+%% Counters:       \MainCntIndex     \UsageCntIndex
+\def\@Index#1{\@bsphack\index{#1}\@esphack}
+\def\Index#1#2{%
+  \@bsphack
+  \index{\expandafter\@gobble\string#2\actualchar\string
+  \verb\quotechar*\verbatimchar\string#2\verbatimchar
+  \encapchar #1}}
+{\catcode`\!=0 !catcode`!\=12!gdef!special@gobble#1{!if\#1!else#1!fi}}
+\def\MainIndex{\Index{main}}
+\def\UsageIndex{\Index{usage}}
+\def\SpecialIndex#1#2#3{%
+  \@Index{#3\actualchar{\tt #3} (#1)\encapchar #2}%
+  \@Index{#1s:\levelchar{\tt #3}\encapchar #2}}
+\def\MainEnvIndex{\SpecialIndex{environment}{main}}
+\def\UsageEnvIndex{\SpecialIndex{environment}{usage}}
+\def\MainOptionIndex{\SpecialIndex{option}{main}}
+\def\UsageOptionIndex{\SpecialIndex{option}{usage}}
+\def\MainCntIndex{\SpecialIndex{counter}{main}}
+\def\UsageCntIndex{\SpecialIndex{counter}{usage}}
+%%
+%% Font for index page numbers:
+\def\main#1{{\bf #1}}
+\def\usage#1{{#1}}
+%%
+%% These combine various functions:
+%%
+%% Commands:       \Main        \Usage
+%% Environments:   \MainEnv     \UsageEnv
+%% Style options:  \MainOption  \UsageOption
+%% Counters:       \MainCnt     \UsageCnt
+%%
+%% The "Main" ones
+%%   * Index argument.
+%%   * Print argument with \MainFont
+%%   * Create label +foo, e+foo or o+foo.
+%%
+%% The "Usage" ones
+%%   * Index argument.
+%%   * Print argument with \UsageFont.
+%%
+\def\SpecialLabel#1#2+{\label{+#2}}
+\def\LabelIndex#1{\MainIndex{#1}\expandafter\SpecialLabel\string#1+}
+\def\Main#1{%
+  \MainIndex{#1}%
+  \expandafter\SpecialLabel\string#1+%
+  {\MainFont\string#1}}
+\def\Usage#1{\UsageIndex{#1}{\UsageFont\string#1}}
+\def\MainEnv#1{%
+  \MainEnvIndex{#1}%
+  \label{e+#1}%
+  {\MainFont #1}}
+\def\UsageEnv#1{\UsageEnvIndex{#1}{\UsageFont #1}}
+\def\MainOption#1{%
+  \MainOptionIndex{#1}%
+  \label{o+#1}%
+  {\MainFont #1}}
+\def\UsageOption#1{\UsageOptionIndex{#1}{\UsageFont #1}}
+\def\MainCnt#1{%
+  \MainCntIndex{#1}%
+  \label{c+#1}%
+  {\MainFont #1}}
+\def\UsageCnt#1{\UsageCntIndex{#1}{\UsageFont #1}}
+%%
+%% These are abbreviations.
+%%
+\def\N{\Main}
+\def\n{\Usage}
+\def\E{\MainEnv}
+\def\e{\UsageEnv}
+\def\O{\MainOption}
+\def\o{\UsageOption}
+\def\C{\MainCnt}
+\def\c{\UsageCnt}
+%%
+%% This is for listing commands in a description environment.
+\def\xitem#1{\item[\Main{#1}]}
+%%
+%%
+\renewcommand{\EveryVerbatimLine}[2]{}
+\VerbatimFootnotes
+
+%% User's guide and documented code have different index prologue.
+\def\PrintUserIndex{{\let\ps@plain\@empty\@input{\jobname.ind}}}
+
+\begingroup
+  \catcode`\<=1 \catcode`\>=2
+  \catcode`\{=13 \catcode`\}=12
+  \catcode`\[=13
+  \gdef\@MD<%
+    \catcode`\{=13 \catcode`\}=12 \catcode`\[=13
+    \def{##1}<\{<\MetaFont ##1\/>\}>%
+    \def[##1]<\string[<\MetaFont ##1\/>]>>
+\endgroup
+\def\MD{%
+  \NotNested
+  \Ex
+    \begingroup
+      \@MD
+      \def\end{\par\endgroup\end}%
+      \def\\{\@centercr\Main}%
+      \MainFont
+      \Main}
+\def\endMD{\endEx}
+
+\endinput
+%% END tvz-user.sty
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/2up.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/2up.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ec109716932
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/2up.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+\ProvidesPackage{2up}[1998/03/13 package wrapper for 2up.tex]
+\input 2up.tex
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/2up.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/2up.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a6dd259c47c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/2up.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,382 @@
+%% BEGIN 2up.tex/2up.sty
+%%
+\def\fileversion{1.2}
+\def\filedate{93/01/28}
+%%
+%% COPYRIGHT 1992, 1993 by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu
+%%
+%% DESCRIPTION:
+%%   2up.tex/2up.sty provides two-up printing for Generic TeX (e.g.,
+%%   Plain, LaTeX, AmSTeX and AmS-LaTeX). It produces a standard dvi file,
+%%   and does not involve an additional dvi or PostScript filter. It has a
+%%   flexible interface for specifying paper size and layout.
+%%
+%% INSTALLATION:
+%%   Put this file where your TeX looks for inputs, under the name 2up.tex.
+%%   Name a copy 2up.sty to use as a LaTeX style option, or create a file
+%%   2up.sty with the lines:
+%%     \input 2up.tex
+%%     \endinput
+%%
+%% DOCUMENTATION:
+%%   Input 2up.tex, or include 2up as a LaTeX style option. There is a
+%%   good chance you will get the desired layout. (But you will probably
+%%   need to generate new font bitmaps to get high quality output.) See
+%%   2up.doc, which might be appended to this file, for detailed
+%%   documentation.
+%%
+%% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of
+%% the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.2 of this license
+%% or (at your option) any later version.  The latest version of this
+%% license is in:
+%% 
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% 
+%% and version 1.2 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version
+%% 1999/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%%
+%% CODE:
+%
+\csname TwoUpLoaded\endcsname
+\let\TwoUpLoaded\endinput
+%
+\edef\TheAtCode{\the\catcode`\@}
+\catcode`\@=11\relax
+\message{\space\space v\fileversion\space\space \filedate\space\space <tvz>}
+%
+% Parameter registers:
+\newdimen\@targetwidth
+\newdimen\@targetheight
+\newdimen\@sourcewidth
+\newdimen\@sourceheight
+\newdimen\pageseplength
+\newdimen\pagesepwidth
+\newdimen\pagesepoffset
+\newif\if@sidebyside
+\@sidebysidetrue
+\newif\if@twosided
+%
+% Registers used by output routine.
+\newif\if@leftpage
+\@leftpagetrue
+\newbox\@leftpage
+\newbox\@rightpage
+\newcount\@physicalpage
+%
+% Since pages are shipped out half as often:
+\multiply\maxdeadcycles by 2
+%
+% Registers used only for booklet layout:
+\begingroup
+  \let\newcount\relax
+  \gdef\booklet@registers{%
+    \newcount\bookletpage
+    \bookletpage=0
+    \newcount\leftpagenumber
+    \newcount\rightpagenumber
+    \multiply\maxdeadcycles by 20}
+\endgroup
+%
+% A useful extension of the \magstep macro.
+\def\magstepminus#1{%
+  \ifcase#1 \@m\or 833\or 694\or 579\or 482\or 401\fi\relax}
+%
+% \@targetwidth and \@targetheight are set to the *unmagnified* dimensions
+% of the target page. \inv@targetmag is the inverse of the target
+% magnification.
+{\catcode`\p=12\catcode`\t=12\gdef\@@inv@@mag#1pt#2{\def#2{#1}}}
+\def\target#1#2#3{%
+  \mag #1\relax
+  \@targetwidth=1000pt
+  \divide\@targetwidth by #1\relax
+  \expandafter\@@inv@@mag\the\@targetwidth\inv@targetmag
+  \@targetwidth=#2\relax
+  \@targetwidth=\inv@targetmag\@targetwidth
+  \@targetheight=#3\relax
+  \@targetheight=\inv@targetmag\@targetheight}
+%
+% Like \target, but for the source:
+\def\source#1#2#3{%
+  \@sourcewidth=1000pt
+  \divide\@sourcewidth by #1\relax
+  \expandafter\@@inv@@mag\the\@sourcewidth\inv@sourcemag
+  \@sourcewidth=#2\relax
+  \@sourcewidth=\inv@sourcemag\@sourcewidth
+  \@sourceheight=#3\relax
+  \@sourceheight=\inv@sourcemag\@sourceheight}
+%
+% \targetlayout does a loop that reads the comma separated arguments.
+% There can be no extraneous spaces.
+\def\targetlayout#1{\process@targetlayout#1,stop,}
+\def\process@targetlayout#1,{%
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter\next\csname target@#1\endcsname
+  \ifx\next\relax
+    \begingroup
+      \errhelp{Valid target layouts are "topbottom", "twosided",
+        "booklet", "Booklet" and "dvidvi".}%
+      \errmessage{`#1' is invalid 2up target layout - ignored.}%
+    \endgroup
+    \expandafter\process@targetlayout
+  \else
+    \next
+  \fi}
+\def\target@stop{}
+\def\target@booklet{%
+  \booklet@registers
+  \def\ship@@@leftpage{\save@booklet\@leftpage}%
+  \def\ship@@@rightpage{\save@booklet\@rightpage}%
+  \@leftpagefalse
+  \def\twoup@eject{\twoup@eject@booklet}%
+  \expandafter\process@targetlayout}
+\def\target@Booklet{%
+  \def\booklet@@loop{\Booklet@@loop}%
+  \target@booklet}
+\def\target@twosided{%
+  \@twosidedtrue
+  \expandafter\process@targetlayout}
+\def\target@topbottom{%
+  \def\make@@halfpage{\make@@halftopbottom}%
+  \def\make@fullpage{\make@fulltopbottom}%
+  \@sidebysidefalse
+  \expandafter\process@targetlayout}
+\def\target@dvidvi{%
+  \def\ship@@@leftpage{\ship@dvidvi\@leftpage}%
+  \def\ship@@@rightpage{\ship@dvidvi\@rightpage}%
+  \expandafter\process@targetlayout}
+%
+% TeX's \shipout primitive is saved as \&normal@shipout, and then \shipout
+% is defined to save each page to \@leftpage or \@rightpage and to print out
+% every two. With the twosided layout, filler pages are added when needed.
+\expandafter\let\csname &normal@shipout\endcsname\shipout
+\def\shipout{%
+  \if@leftpage
+    \global\@leftpagefalse
+    \def\next{\afterassignment\ship@leftpage\global\setbox\@leftpage=}%
+    \if@twosided
+      \ifodd\count\z@
+        \global\setbox\@leftpage=\hbox{}%
+        \make@@halfpage\@leftpage\ship@@@leftpage
+        \def\next{\shipout}%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \global\@leftpagetrue
+    \def\next{\afterassignment\ship@rightpage\global\setbox\@rightpage=}%
+    \if@twosided
+      \ifodd\count\z@
+      \else
+        \global\setbox\@rightpage=\hbox{}%
+        \make@@halfpage\@rightpage\ship@@@rightpage
+        \def\next{\shipout}%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \next}
+%
+% The job of \ship@leftpage and \ship@rightpage is to invoke \ship@@leftpage
+% or \ship@@rightpage at the right time. \shipout is followed either
+% (i) by an \hbox, \vbox or \vtop, in which case \ship@leftpage is invoked
+% after the opening {. \@leftpage is void, and \ship@leftpage invokes
+% \ship@@leftpage after the closing }, or
+% (ii) by a \box or \copy, in which case \ship@leftpage is invoked after
+% the full assignment. \@leftpage is not voide, and \ship@leftpage invokes
+% \ship@@leftpage immediately.
+\def\ship@leftpage{%
+  \ifvoid\@leftpage\aftergroup\ship@@leftpage\else\ship@@leftpage\fi}
+\def\ship@rightpage{%
+  \ifvoid\@rightpage\aftergroup\ship@@rightpage\else\ship@@rightpage\fi}
+%
+% \ship@@leftpage/\ship@@rightpage take the output box, and first make it
+% into a fully-size source page (with \make@halfpage) and then this is
+% centered horizontally and vertically in half of a target page (with
+% \make@@halfpage). Then they are shipped individually or together.
+\def\ship@@leftpage{\make@halfpage\@leftpage\ship@@@leftpage}
+\def\ship@@rightpage{\make@halfpage\@rightpage\ship@@@rightpage}
+\def\make@halfpage#1{%
+  \dp#1=\z@
+  \setbox#1=\vbox to\@sourceheight{%
+    \vskip \inv@sourcemag in
+    \vskip \voffset
+    \hbox to\@sourcewidth{\hskip\inv@sourcemag in\hskip\hoffset\box#1\hss}%
+    \vss}%
+  \make@@halfpage#1}
+%
+% The definition of \make@@halfpage depends on the target layout.
+\def\make@@halfsidebyside#1{%
+  \global\setbox#1=\vbox to\@targetheight{\vss
+    \hbox to.5\@targetwidth{\hss\box#1\hss}\vss}}
+\def\make@@halftopbottom#1{%
+  \global\setbox#1=\vbox to.5\@targetheight{\vss
+    \hbox to\@targetwidth{\hss\box#1\hss}\vss}}
+\def\make@@halfpage{\make@@halfsidebyside}
+%
+% The pages are generaly shipped in pairs:
+\def\ship@twoup{%
+  \begingroup
+    \voffset=-\inv@targetmag in
+    \hoffset=\voffset
+    \global\advance\@physicalpage by 1
+    \count\z@=\@physicalpage
+    \csname &normal@shipout\endcsname\make@fullpage
+  \endgroup}
+\let\ship@@@leftpage\relax
+\def\ship@@@rightpage{\ship@twoup}
+%
+% The definition of \make@fullpage depends on the layout:
+\def\make@fullsidebyside{%
+  \hbox{\box\@leftpage\pagesep@sidebyside\box\@rightpage}}
+\def\make@fulltopbottom{%
+  \vbox{\offinterlineskip\box\@leftpage\pagesep@topbottom\box\@rightpage}}
+\def\make@fullpage{\make@fullsidebyside}
+%
+% A vertical or horizontal rule can be inserted. These can be redefined
+% for other tricks:
+\def\pagesep@sidebyside{%
+  \begingroup
+    \advance\pageseplength by \pagesepoffset
+    \pagesepwidth=\inv@targetmag\pagesepwidth
+    \kern -.5\pagesepwidth
+    \vrule height \inv@targetmag\pageseplength
+           depth -\inv@targetmag\pagesepoffset
+           width \pagesepwidth
+    \kern -.5\pagesepwidth
+  \endgroup}
+\def\pagesep@topbottom{%
+  \begingroup
+    \pagesepwidth=\inv@targetmag\pagesepwidth
+    \vskip -.5\pagesepwidth
+    \moveright\inv@targetmag\pagesepoffset\hbox{%
+      \vrule height\pagesepwidth width\inv@targetmag\pageseplength}%
+    \vskip -.5\pagesepwidth
+  \endgroup}
+%
+% With the dvidvi layout, the pages are shipped individually:
+\def\ship@dvidvi#1{%
+  \begingroup
+    \voffset=-\inv@targetmag in
+    \hoffset=\voffset
+    \csname &normal@shipout\endcsname\box#1%
+  \endgroup}
+%
+% With the booklet or Booklet layout, the pages are saved rather than
+% shipped.
+\begingroup
+\let\newbox\relax
+\gdef\save@booklet#1{%
+  \begingroup
+    \globaldefs=1
+    \advance\bookletpage by 1
+    \expandafter\newbox\csname bookletbox\the\bookletpage\endcsname
+    \expandafter\setbox\csname bookletbox\the\bookletpage\endcsname\box#1%
+  \endgroup}
+\endgroup
+%
+% The pages are then printed at the end with the following macros:
+\def\make@bookletpage#1{%
+  \setbox\ifodd#1\@rightpage\else\@leftpage\fi=%
+    \expandafter\box\csname bookletbox\the#1\endcsname}
+\def\booklet@loop{%
+  \count\z@\rightpagenumber
+  \make@bookletpage\leftpagenumber
+  \make@bookletpage\rightpagenumber
+  \ship@twoup
+  \booklet@@loop}
+\def\booklet@@loop{%
+  \advance\rightpagenumber by 2
+  \advance\leftpagenumber by -2
+  \ifnum\leftpagenumber<1\else\expandafter\booklet@loop\fi}
+\def\Booklet@@loop{%
+  \advance\rightpagenumber by 1
+  \advance\leftpagenumber by -1
+  \ifnum\leftpagenumber<\rightpagenumber\else\expandafter\booklet@loop\fi}
+%
+% This one is easy:
+\def\twoupemptypage{\shipout\hbox{}}
+%
+% This clears a whole target page if there is a saved left page. Note that
+% this does not invoke the output routine; i.e., it is not like \clearpage
+% or \supereject. See \twoupclearpage and \twoupeject below.
+\def\twoup@eject{%
+  \if@leftpage\else
+    \global\setbox\@rightpage\hbox{}%
+    \make@@halfpage\@rightpage\ship@@@rightpage
+    \global\@leftpagetrue
+  \fi}
+%
+% This is the definition of \twoup@eject with the booklet option:
+\def\twoup@eject@booklet{%
+  \leftpagenumber\bookletpage
+  \advance\leftpagenumber by 3
+  \divide\leftpagenumber by 4
+  \multiply\leftpagenumber by 4
+  \rightpagenumber=1
+  \ifnum\leftpagenumber>\bookletpage
+    \setbox\@leftpage\hbox{}%
+    \make@@halfpage\@leftpage
+    \loop
+      \setbox\@rightpage\copy\@leftpage
+      \save@booklet\@rightpage
+    \ifnum\leftpagenumber>\bookletpage
+    \repeat
+  \fi
+  \booklet@loop}
+%
+% This modification is needed for \LaTeX in order to get the last page
+% printed out if the final page is a left page (the catcode business is
+% because \enddocument is \let to \bye in amstex):
+\begingroup
+\expandafter\ifx\csname @latexerr\endcsname\relax
+  \catcode`\>=14\else\catcode`\>=9\fi\relax
+>>\gdef\twoupclearpage{\clearpage\twoup@eject}
+>>\expandafter\@temptokena\expandafter{\enddocument}
+>>\xdef\enddocument{\noexpand\twoupclearpage\the\@temptokena}
+\endgroup
+%
+% For most other macro packages we could just leave be and all pages would
+% always be printed because of the way the \end primitive works (except that
+% TeX will go bonkers with the booklet layout). However,
+% sometimes a blank filler page would be printed *with* headings. We prefer
+% the filler page to be truly blank. To achieve this,  we hack the definition
+% of \end. This may cause problems with some macros.
+\expandafter\ifx\csname @latexerr\endcsname\relax
+  \let\twoup@@@end\end
+  \def\end{\twoup@eject\twoup@@@end}
+  \def\twoupeject{\par\vfil\supereject\twoup@eject}
+\fi
+%
+% This is one workaround for the page cross-references problem
+\def\TwoupWrites{%
+  \let\TwoupSaved@write\write
+  \let\TwoupSaved@read\read
+  \let\TwoupSaved@openout\openout
+  \let\TwoupSaved@closeout\closeout
+  \def\write{\TwoupSaved@write-1{}\immediate\TwoupSaved@write}%
+  \def\read{\TwoupSaved@write-1{}\immediate\TwoupSaved@read}%
+  \def\openout{\TwoupSaved@write-1{}\immediate\TwoupSaved@openout}%
+  \def\closeout{\TwoupSaved@write-1{}\immediate\TwoupSaved@closeout}%
+  \let\TwoupWrites\relax}
+%
+% Defaults:
+\def\twouparticle{%
+  \target{\magstepminus1}{11in}{8.5in}%
+  \source{\magstep0}{8.5in}{11in}}
+\def\twoupplain{%
+  \target{\magstepminus2}{11in}{8.5in}%
+  \source{\magstep0}{8.5in}{11in}}
+\def\twouplegaltarget{%
+  \target{\magstepminus1}{14in}{8.5in}%
+  \source{\magstep0}{8.5in}{11in}}%
+\def\twouplandscape{%
+  \target{\magstepminus2}{8.5in}{11in}%
+  \source{\magstep0}{11in}{8.5in}%
+  \targetlayout{topbottom}}
+\expandafter\ifx\csname @latexerr\endcsname\relax
+  \twoupplain\else\twouparticle\fi
+\pagesepwidth 0pt
+\pageseplength 6.5in
+\pagesepoffset 1in
+%
+\expandafter\catcode`\@=\TheAtCode\relax
+\endinput
+%% END 2up.tex/2up.sty
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/fancybox.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/fancybox.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..6d1d75a1529
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/fancybox.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,986 @@
+%% BEGIN fancybox.sty
+%%
+%% With corrections and suggestions from:
+%%   - Marcin Wolinski <wolinski@melkor.mimuw.edu.pl>
+%%   - Heiko Oberdiek  <oberdiek@ruf.uni-freiburg.de>
+%%
+\def\fileversion{1.3}
+\def\filedate{2000/09/19}
+% DG/SR modification begin - September 19, 2000
+% (suggested by Heiko Oberdiek <oberdiek@ruf.uni-freiburg.de>)
+\@ifundefined{ProvidesPackage}{}{%
+  \ProvidesPackage{fancybox}[\filedate\space\fileversion]}
+% DG/SR modification end
+% DG/SR modification begin - May 16, 1997
+\providecommand\@begindvi{} % For rather old versions of LaTeX 2e
+% DG/SR modification end
+% DG/SR modification begin - Feb. 27, 1997
+% Now defined only in latex209.def
+\def\@lquote{\leavevmode{\kern\z@}`}
+% DG/SR modification end
+%%
+%% COPYRIGHT 1993, by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu
+%%
+%% DESCRIPTION:
+%%   fancybox.sty is a LaTeX style option, consisting of:
+%%   * Variants of \fbox: \shadowbox, \doublebox, \ovalbox, \Ovalbox.
+%%   * Helpful tools for using box macros.
+%%   * Extensive documentation about how to use box macros.
+%%   * Flexible verbatim macros.
+%%
+%% INSTALLATION:
+%%   Put this file where your TeX looks for inputs.
+%%
+%% DOCUMENTATION:
+%%  See fancybox.doc, which might be appended to this file.
+%%
+%% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of
+%% the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.2 of this license
+%% or (at your option) any later version.  The latest version of this
+%% license is in:
+%% 
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% 
+%% and version 1.2 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version
+%% 1999/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%%
+%% CODE:
+\expandafter\ifx\csname fb@framepage\endcsname\relax\else
+  \expandafter\endinput
+\fi
+\typeout{Style option: `fancybox' v\fileversion \space  <\filedate> (tvz)}
+
+\newbox\@fancybox
+\@ifundefined{@tempdimc}{\newdimen\@tempdimc}{}
+
+%% \shadowbox
+
+\newdimen\shadowsize
+\shadowsize 4pt
+
+\def\shadowbox{\VerbBox\@shadowbox}
+\def\@shadowbox#1{%
+  \setbox\@fancybox\hbox{\fbox{#1}}%
+  \leavevmode\vbox{%
+    \offinterlineskip
+    \dimen@=\shadowsize
+    \advance\dimen@ .5\fboxrule
+    \hbox{\copy\@fancybox\kern-.5\fboxrule\lower\shadowsize\hbox{%
+      \vrule \@height\ht\@fancybox \@depth\dp\@fancybox \@width\dimen@}}%
+    \vskip-\dimen@
+    \moveright\shadowsize\vbox{%
+      \hrule \@width\wd\@fancybox \@height\dimen@}}}
+
+% \fancyoval
+
+\def\cornersize{\@ifstar{\@cornersize}{\@@cornersize}}
+\def\@cornersize#1{%
+  \@tempdima=#1\relax
+  \edef\the@cornersize{\number\@tempdima sp}}
+\def\@@cornersize#1{%
+  \edef\the@cornersize{#1\noexpand\@tempdimb}}
+\cornersize{.5}
+
+% This is just a simple change to \oval, making use of the \cornersize
+% parameter instead of making the corner arcs are large as possible.
+
+\def\fancyoval(#1,#2){\@ifnextchar[{\fancy@oval(#1,#2)}{\fancy@oval(#1,#2)[]}}
+
+\def\fancy@oval(#1,#2)[#3]{%
+  \begingroup
+    \fancy@@oval{#1\unitlength}{#2\unitlength}{#3}%
+    \@put{-.5\wd\@tempboxa}{-.5\ht\@tempboxa}{\ht\@tempboxa=\z@\box\@tempboxa}%
+  \endgroup}
+
+\def\fancy@@oval#1#2#3{%
+  \boxmaxdepth \maxdimen
+  \@ovttrue \@ovbtrue \@ovltrue \@ovrtrue
+  \@tfor\@tempa :=#3\do{\csname @ov\@tempa false\endcsname}%
+  \@ovxx#1\relax
+  \advance\@ovxx-\@wholewidth
+  \@ovyy#2\relax
+  \advance\@ovyy-\@wholewidth
+  \@tempdimb \ifdim \@ovyy >\@ovxx \@ovxx\else \@ovyy \fi
+  \advance\@tempdimb-2\p@
+  \ifdim\@tempdimb>\the@cornersize\relax
+    \@tempdimb=\the@cornersize
+  \fi
+  \@getcirc\@tempdimb
+  \@ovro\ht\@tempboxa \@ovri\dp\@tempboxa
+  \@ovdx\@ovxx \advance\@ovdx-\@tempdima \divide\@ovdx \tw@
+  \@ovdy\@ovyy \advance\@ovdy-\@tempdima \divide\@ovdy \tw@
+  \@circlefnt
+  \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{%
+    \if@ovr \@ovvert32\kern -\@tempdima \fi
+    \if@ovl \kern \@ovxx \@ovvert01\kern -\@tempdima \kern -\@ovxx \fi
+    \if@ovt \@ovhorz \kern -\@ovxx \fi
+    \if@ovb \raise \@ovyy \@ovhorz \fi}%
+  \advance\@ovdx\@ovro
+  \advance\@ovdy\@ovro
+  \advance\@ovxx\@wholewidth
+  \wd\@tempboxa=\@ovxx
+  \dp\@tempboxa=\z@}
+
+% \ovalbox
+
+\def\ovalbox{\VerbBox{\@ovalbox\thinlines}}
+\def\Ovalbox{\VerbBox{\@ovalbox\thicklines}}
+\def\@ovalbox#1#2{%
+  \begingroup
+    #1\relax
+    \setbox\@fancybox\hbox{{#2}}%
+    \@tempdimc\fboxsep \advance\@tempdimc\@wholewidth
+    \@tempdima\ht\@fancybox \advance\@tempdima\dp\@fancybox
+    \advance\@tempdima2\@tempdimc
+    \@tempdimb\wd\@fancybox \advance\@tempdimb2\@tempdimc
+    \fancy@@oval\@tempdimb\@tempdima{}%
+    \@tempdima\dp\@fancybox \advance\@tempdima\@tempdimc
+    \wd\@tempboxa=\z@
+    \leavevmode\hbox{%
+      \lower\@tempdima\box\@tempboxa
+      \kern\@tempdimc\box\@fancybox\kern\@tempdimc}%
+  \endgroup}
+
+% \doublebox
+
+\def\doublebox{\VerbBox\@doublebox}
+\def\@doublebox#1{%
+  \begingroup
+    \setbox\@fancybox\hbox{{#1}}%
+    \fboxrule=.75\fboxrule
+    \setbox\@fancybox\hbox{\fbox{\box\@fancybox}}%
+    \fboxrule=2\fboxrule
+    \fboxsep=\fboxrule
+    \advance\fboxsep .5pt
+    \fbox{\box\@fancybox}%
+  \endgroup}
+
+% Frames for seminar.sty:
+
+\@ifundefined{newslideframe}{}{%
+  \newslideframe{shadow}{\shadowbox{#1}}
+  \newslideframe{double}{\doublebox{#1}}
+  \newslideframe{oval}{\ovalbox{#1}}
+  \newslideframe{Oval}{\Ovalbox{#1}}}
+
+% Sbox environment
+
+\newbox\@Sbox
+
+\def\Sbox{\global\setbox\@Sbox\hbox\bgroup\ignorespaces}
+
+\def\endSbox{%
+  \@testtrue\ifhmode\ifinner\@testfalse\fi\fi
+  \if@test\@latexerr{Misplaced \string\endSbox! Should be in LR mode}\@ehd\fi
+  \egroup}
+
+\def\TheSbox{%
+  \ifvoid\@Sbox
+    \@latexerr{\string\TheSbox\space is empty!}\@ehd
+  \else
+    \box\@Sbox
+  \fi}
+
+\def\beginsbox#1{\setbox#1\hbox\bgroup\ignorespaces}
+
+\def\endsbox{\endSbox}
+
+% \VerbBox
+
+\newtoks\do@VerbBox
+
+\def\VerbBox#1{%
+  \do@VerbBox{#1}%
+  \afterassignment\begin@VerbBox
+  \setbox\@fancybox=\hbox}
+\def\begin@VerbBox{\aftergroup\end@VerbBox}
+\def\end@VerbBox{\the\do@VerbBox{\box\@fancybox}}%
+
+% \Btrivlist
+
+\def\@Blistrestore{%
+  \let\par\relax
+  \let\-\@dischyph \let\'\@acci \let\`\@accii \let\=\@acciii
+  \lineskip\normallineskip \baselineskip\normalbaselineskip}
+
+\def\Btrivlist#1{\@ifnextchar[{\@Btrivlist{#1}}{\@Btrivlist{#1}[]}}
+\def\@Btrivlist#1[#2]{%
+  \@Blistrestore
+  \let\\=\@Btrivlistcr
+  \fb@beginvbox{#2}%
+  \halign\bgroup
+    \if#1l\else\@empty\hfil\fi
+    \ignorespaces##\unskip
+    \if#1r\@empty\else\hfil\fi\cr}
+\def\endBtrivlist{\crcr\egroup\egroup\if@pboxsw$\fi}
+
+\def\fb@beginvbox#1{%
+  \leavevmode
+  \@pboxswfalse
+  \if#1b\@empty\vbox\else\if#1t\@empty\vtop\else
+    \ifmmode\vcenter\else\@pboxswtrue$\vcenter\fi
+  \fi\fi\bgroup}
+
+\def\@Btrivlistcr{\@ifstar
+  {\@ifnextchar[{@@Btrivlistcr}{\cr}}{\@ifnextchar[{\@@Btrivlistcr}{\cr}}}
+\def\@@Btrivlistcr[#1]{\cr\noalign{\vskip #1}}
+
+\def\Bcenter{\Btrivlist{c}}
+\def\endBcenter{\endBtrivlist}
+
+\def\Bflushleft{\Btrivlist{l}}
+\def\endBflushleft{\endBtrivlist}
+
+\def\Bflushright{\Btrivlist{r}}
+\def\endBflushright{\endBtrivlist}
+
+% \Blist
+
+\def\Blist#1#2{\@ifnextchar[{\@Blist{#1}{#2}}{\@Blist{#1}{#2}[]}}
+
+\def\@Blist#1#2[#3]{%
+  \ifnum\@listdepth>5
+    \@toodeep
+  \else
+    \global\advance\@listdepth\@ne
+  \fi
+  \itemindent\z@
+  \csname @list\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname
+  \def\@itemlabel{#1}%
+  \let\makelabel\@mklab
+  \@nmbrlistfalse
+  \@Blistrestore
+  \let\\=\@Blistcr
+  \let\item\Bitem
+  \@Bitemswfalse
+  #2\relax
+  \fb@beginvbox{#3}%
+  \halign\bgroup
+    \ignorespaces##&\hskip\labelsep\ignorespaces##\unskip\hfil\cr}
+
+\def\endBlist{\endBtrivlist\global\advance\@listdepth\m@ne}
+
+\newif\if@Bitemsw
+
+\def\Bitem{\@ifnextchar({\@Bitemcr\Bitem@skip}{\@Bitemcr\@Bitem}}
+
+\def\@Bitemcr{%
+  \if@Bitemsw
+    \def\next{\cr\noalign{\vskip\itemsep}}%
+  \else
+    \def\next{\global\@Bitemswtrue}%
+  \fi
+  \next}
+
+\def\Bitem@skip(#1){\noalign{\vskip #1}\@Bitem}
+
+\def\@Bitem{\@ifnextchar[{\Bitem@label}{\Bitem@nolabel}}
+
+\def\Bitem@label[#1]{\makelabel{#1}&}
+
+\def\Bitem@nolabel{%
+  \if@nmbrlist
+    \expandafter\advance\csname c@\@listctr\endcsname1 \fi
+  \makelabel{\@itemlabel}%
+  &%
+  \if@nmbrlist\refstepcounter{\@listctr}\fi}
+
+\def\@Blistcr{\@ifstar
+  {\@ifnextchar[{@@Blistcr}{\cr&}}{\@ifnextchar[{\@@Blistcr}{\cr&}}}
+
+\def\@@Blistcr[#1]{\cr\noalign{\vskip #1}&}
+
+% \Bitemize
+
+\def\Bitemize{%
+  \ifnum\@itemdepth>3
+    \@toodeep
+  \else
+    \advance\@itemdepth\@ne
+  \fi
+  \edef\@itemitem{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}%
+  \Blist{\csname\@itemitem\endcsname}{\def\makelabel####1{\hfil####1}}}
+\def\endBitemize{\endBlist}
+
+% \Bdescription
+
+\def\Bdescription{\Blist{}{\def\makelabel####1{\bf####1\hfil}}}
+\def\endBdescription{\endBlist}
+
+% \Benumerate
+
+\def\Benumerate{%
+  \ifnum\@enumdepth>3
+    \@toodeep
+  \else
+    \advance\@enumdepth\@ne
+  \fi
+  \edef\@enumctr{enum\romannumeral\the\@enumdepth}%
+  \Blist{\csname label\@enumctr\endcsname}%
+    {\usecounter{\@enumctr}\def\makelabel####1{\hfil####1}}}
+\def\endBenumerate{\endBlist}
+
+% Beqnarray
+
+\def\Beqnarray{%
+  \stepcounter{equation}%
+  \let\@currentlabel\theequation
+  \def\@eqnnum{{\csname reset@font\endcsname\rm (\theequation)}}%
+  \global\@eqnswtrue\m@th
+  \global\@eqcnt\z@
+  \tabskip\@centering
+  \let\\\@eqncr
+  \vbox\bgroup
+    \halign\bgroup
+      \@eqnsel
+        \hskip\@centering
+        $\displaystyle\tabskip\z@{##}$%
+      &\global\@eqcnt\@ne
+        \hskip 2\arraycolsep
+        \hfil${##}$\hfil
+      &\global\@eqcnt\tw@
+        \hskip 2\arraycolsep
+        $\displaystyle\tabskip\z@{##}$%
+        \hfil
+        \tabskip\@centering
+      &\if@eqnsw\hskip 1em\fi
+        \hfil{##}\tabskip\z@
+      \cr}
+
+\def\endBeqnarray{%
+  \@@eqncr
+  \egroup
+  \global\advance\c@equation\m@ne
+  \egroup
+  \global\@ignoretrue}
+
+\@namedef{Beqnarray*}{\def\@eqncr{\nonumber\@seqncr}\Beqnarray}
+\@namedef{endBeqnarray*}{\nonumber\endBeqnarray}
+
+% \fb@outputage
+
+% Here we insert various hooks for rotating or framing the page.
+% Otherwise, it is the usual \@outputpage
+
+\def\fb@outputpage{%
+  \begingroup
+    \catcode`\ =10
+    \let\-\@dischyph
+    \let\'\@acci
+    \let\`\@accii
+    \let\=\@acciii
+    \if@specialpage
+      \global\@specialpagefalse\@nameuse{ps@\@specialstyle}%
+    \fi
+    \if@twoside
+      \ifodd\count\z@
+        \let\@thehead\@oddhead
+        \let\@thefoot\@oddfoot
+        \let\@themargin\oddsidemargin
+      \else
+        \let\@thehead\@evenhead
+        \let\@thefoot\@evenfoot
+        \let\@themargin\evensidemargin
+      \fi
+    \fi
+    \csname reset@font\endcsname
+    \normalsize
+    \baselineskip\z@
+    \lineskip\z@
+    \let\par\@@par
+    \ifx\this@fancypage\@empty\else
+      \this@fancypage
+      \gdef\this@fancypage{}%
+    \fi
+    \ifx\the@fancypage\@empty\else
+      \setbox\@outputbox\hbox{\the@fancypage{\box\@outputbox}}%
+    \fi
+    \ifx\fb@@rotatepage\@empty\else
+      \setbox\@outputbox\hbox{\fb@@rotatepage{\box\@outputbox}}%
+    \fi
+    \setbox\@outputbox\vbox{%
+      \@tempdima=\wd\@outputbox
+      \setbox\@tempboxa=\hbox to\@tempdima{%
+        \let\label\@gobble
+        \let\index\@gobble
+        \let\glossary\@gobble
+        \@thehead}%
+      \ht\@tempboxa\headheight
+      \dp\@tempboxa\z@
+      \box\@tempboxa
+      \vskip\headsep
+      \box\@outputbox
+      \baselineskip\footskip
+      \hbox to\@tempdima{%
+        \let\label\@gobble
+        \let\index\@gobble
+        \let\glossary\@gobble
+        \@thefoot}}
+    \ifx\the@@fancypage\@empty\else
+      \setbox\@outputbox\hbox{\the@@fancypage{\box\@outputbox}}%
+    \fi
+    \setbox\@outputbox\vbox{%
+      \ifnum\fancyput@flag>-1 \do@fancyput\fi
+      \vskip\topmargin
+      \moveright\@themargin\box\@outputbox}%
+    \ifx\fb@rotatepage\@empty\else
+       \setbox\@outputbox\hbox{\lower\ht\@outputbox\box\@outputbox}%
+       \dp\@outputbox\z@
+       \wd\@outputbox\z@
+       \setbox\@outputbox\hbox{\fb@rotatepage{\box\@outputbox}}%
+       \expandafter\fb@setoffsets\fb@theoffsets
+    \fi
+% DG/SR modification begin - September 19, 2000
+% (suggested by Marcin Wolinski <wolinski@melkor.mimuw.edu.pl> and
+%  Heiko Oberdiek <oberdiek@ruf.uni-freiburg.de>)
+    \let\protect\noexpand
+% DG/SR modification end
+    \shipout\box\@outputbox
+    \global\@colht\textheight
+  \endgroup
+  \stepcounter{page}%
+  \let\firstmark\botmark}
+
+% \fancypage
+
+\def\the@fancypage{}
+\def\the@@fancypage{}
+\def\this@fancypage{}
+
+\def\fancypage#1#2{%
+% DG/SR modification begin - May 16, 1997
+  \@begindvi                    % Need today by LaTeX 2e
+% DG/SR modification end
+  \def\the@fancypage{#1}%
+  \def\the@@fancypage{#2}%
+  \def\@outputpage{\fb@outputpage}}
+
+\def\thisfancypage#1#2{%
+% DG/SR modification begin - May 16, 1997
+  \@begindvi                    % Need today by LaTeX 2e
+% DG/SR modification end
+  \gdef\@outputpage{\fb@outputpage}%
+  \gdef\this@fancypage{\def\the@fancypage{#1}\def\the@@fancypage{#2}}}
+
+% \fancyput
+
+% Token registers used to make it easier to put definitions in argument.
+% Boxes not processed until output so that contents can depend, e.g., on
+% current page or marks or whatever. This makes everything slightly more
+% complicated than one would expect.
+
+\newtoks\the@fancyput
+\newtoks\this@fancyput
+\def\fancyput@flag{-1}%
+
+% \fancyput@flag=-1 if no fancyput, 0 if regular fancyput, 1 if thisfancyput.
+
+\def\fancyput{%
+% DG/SR modification begin - May 16, 1997
+  \@begindvi                    % Need today by LaTeX 2e
+% DG/SR modification end
+  \def\@outputpage{\fb@outputpage}
+  \@ifstar{\@testtrue\@fancyput}{\@testfalse\@fancyput}}
+\def\@fancyput{\@ifnextchar({\@@fancyput}{\@@fancyput(\z@,\z@)}}
+\def\@@fancyput(#1,#2)#3{%
+  \if@test
+    \expandafter\the@fancyput\expandafter{\the\the@fancyput\do{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
+  \else
+    \the@fancyput{\do{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
+  \fi
+  \gdef\fancyput@flag{\z@}}
+
+\def\thisfancyput{%
+% DG/SR modification begin - May 16, 1997
+  \@begindvi                    % Need today by LaTeX 2e
+% DG/SR modification end
+  \gdef\@outputpage{\fb@outputpage}
+  \@ifstar{\@testtrue\@thisfancyput}{\@testfalse\@thisfancyput}}
+\def\@thisfancyput{\@ifnextchar({\@@thisfancyput}{\@@thisfancyput(\z@,\z@)}}
+\def\@@thisfancyput(#1,#2)#3{%
+  \if@test
+    \ifnum\fancyput@flag=\z@
+      \expandafter\global\expandafter\this@fancyput\expandafter{%
+        \the\this@fancyput\do{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
+    \else
+      \expandafter\global\expandafter\this@fancyput\expandafter{%
+        \the\the@fancyput\do{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \global\this@fancyput{\do{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
+  \fi
+  \gdef\fancyput@flag{1}}
+
+\def\do@fancyput{%
+  \def\do##1##2##3{\raise##2\hbox to\z@{\kern##1\relax##3\hss}}%
+  \setbox\@tempboxa=\hbox to\z@{%
+    \kern-\hoffset
+    \raise\voffset\hbox{%
+      \ifnum\fancyput@flag=\z@\the\the@fancyput\else\the\this@fancyput\fi}%
+    \hss}%
+  \ht\@tempboxa=\z@ \dp\@tempboxa=\z@
+  \box\@tempboxa
+  \gdef\fancyput@flag{\z@}%
+  \global\this@fancyput{}}
+
+% \Landscape
+
+\def\UsePageParameters{%
+  \clearpage
+  \global\@colht\textheight
+  \onecolumn}
+
+\def\fb@rotatepage{}
+
+
+\def\Landscape{\@ifstar{\@testtrue\@Landscape}{\@testfalse\@Landscape}}
+\def\@Landscape#1#2#3{%
+% DG/SR modification begin - May 16, 1997
+  \@begindvi                    % Need today by LaTeX 2e
+% DG/SR modification end
+  \clearpage
+  \def\fb@rotatepage{#3}%
+  \def\@outputpage{\fb@outputpage}%
+  \@tempdima#1\relax
+  \@tempdimb#2\relax
+  \if@test
+    \edef\fb@theoffsets{{\voffset}{\hoffset}{\number\@tempdima sp}}%
+  \else
+    \edef\fb@theoffsets{{\hoffset}{\voffset}{\number\@tempdimb sp}}%
+  \fi
+  \advance\@tempdimb-\@tempdima
+  \advance\textwidth\@tempdimb
+  \advance\textheight-\@tempdimb
+  \UsePageParameters}
+\def\endLandscape{\clearpage\aftergroup\UsePageParameters}
+
+\def\fb@setoffsets#1#2#3{%
+  \@tempdima#1%
+  \advance#1#2%
+  #2#3
+  \advance#2-2in
+  \advance#2-\@tempdima}
+
+\@namedef{Landscape*}{\@testtrue\@Landscape}
+\@namedef{endLandscape*}{\endLandscape}
+
+% \LandScape
+
+\def\fb@@rotatepage{}
+
+\def\LandScape#1{%
+% DG/SR modification begin - May 16, 1997
+  \@begindvi                    % Need today by LaTeX 2e
+% DG/SR modification end
+  \clearpage
+  \def\fb@@rotatepage{#1}%
+  \def\@outputpage{\fb@outputpage}%
+  \@tempdima\textheight
+  \textheight\textwidth
+  \textwidth\@tempdima
+  \UsePageParameters}
+\def\endLandScape{\clearpage\aftergroup\UsePageParameters}
+
+% \GenericCaption
+
+\def\GenericCaption#1{%
+  \par
+  \begingroup
+    \@parboxrestore
+    \normalsize
+    \vskip 10\p@
+    \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#1}%
+    \ifdim\wd\@tempboxa>\hsize
+      #1\par
+    \else
+      \hbox to\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
+    \fi
+  \endgroup
+  \par}
+
+% \landfloat
+
+\def\landfloat#1#2{%
+  \gdef\curr@landfloat{#1}%
+  \gdef\float@rotation{#2}%
+  \begin{#1}[p]%
+    \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox\bgroup
+      \hsize\@colht
+      \@parboxrestore}
+\def\endlandfloat{%
+      \par\vskip\z@
+    \egroup
+    \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\float@rotation{\box\@tempboxa}}%
+    \centerline{\box\@tempboxa}%
+  \expandafter\end\expandafter{\curr@landfloat}}
+
+% \boxput
+
+\def\boxput{\@ifstar{\@testtrue\@boxput}{\@testfalse\@boxput}}
+\def\@boxput{\@ifnextchar({\@@boxput}{\@@boxput(0,0)}}
+\long\def\@@boxput(#1,#2)#3#4{%
+  \setbox\@fancybox\hbox{{#4}}%
+  \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox to\z@{\vss\hbox to\z@{\hss{#3}\hss}\vss}%
+  \@tempdima=#1\wd\@fancybox
+  \advance\@tempdima\wd\@fancybox
+  \divide\@tempdima 2
+  \ifcat a#2\relax
+    \@tempdimb=\z@
+  \else
+    \@tempdimb=.5\ht\@fancybox
+    \advance\@tempdimb.5\dp\@fancybox
+    \@tempdimc=\@tempdimb
+    \advance\@tempdimc-\dp\@fancybox
+    \@tempdimb=#2\@tempdimb
+    \advance\@tempdimb\@tempdimc
+  \fi
+  \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox to \z@{%
+    \if@test\kern-\wd\@fancybox\fi
+    \kern\@tempdima\raise\@tempdimb\box\@tempboxa\hss}%
+  \ht\@tempboxa=\z@ \dp\@tempboxa=\z@
+  \leavevmode
+  \if@test
+    \hbox{\box\@fancybox\box\@tempboxa}%
+  \else
+    \hbox{\box\@tempboxa\box\@fancybox}%
+  \fi}
+
+% \Vfootnotes
+
+\def\VerbatimFootnotes{\let\@footnotetext\V@footnotetext}
+
+\long\def\V@footnotetext{%
+  \afterassignment\V@@footnotetext
+  \let\@tempa}
+\def\V@@footnotetext{%
+  \insert\footins\bgroup
+  \csname reset@font\endcsname
+  \footnotesize
+  \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
+  \splittopskip\footnotesep
+  \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
+  \floatingpenalty \@MM
+  \hsize\columnwidth
+  \@parboxrestore
+  \edef\@currentlabel{\csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
+  \@makefntext{}%
+  \rule{\z@}{\footnotesep}%
+  \bgroup
+  \aftergroup\V@@@footnotetext
+  \ignorespaces}
+\def\V@@@footnotetext{\strut\egroup}
+
+% Verbatim
+
+% The main idea is to separate the reading and formatting of the
+% verbatim listing. It's pretty simple.
+
+\def\Verbatim@Codes{%
+  \let\do\@makeother
+  \dospecials
+  \Verbatim@ObeyThings
+  \ThisVerbCodes\relax\gdef\ThisVerbCodes{}}
+
+\def\EveryVerbatimCodes{}
+
+% \Verbatim is redefined temporarilly in \Get@Verbatim to scan the
+% verbatim text. \Verbatim is used so that error messages are more
+% enlightening. \next checks whether \Verbatim found its argument,
+% and attempts to recover if not.
+%
+% Heuristically, if current environment is `foo' and argument of
+% \Get@Verbatim is \The@Verbatim, then definition of \Verbatim is
+%
+% \def\Verbatim#1^^M#2^^M\the\EndVerbatimTokens\end{foo}{%
+%  \xdef\The@Verbatim{\noexpand\Every@VerbatimLine#2}%
+%  \endgroup\end{foo}}
+%
+% \The@Verbatim is then equal to the verbatim text, with spaces
+% replaced by \Verbatim@Space, tabs replaced by \Verbatim@Tab,
+% and ` replaced by \@lquote. In addition, each line begins with
+% \Every@VerbatimLine, and each line but the last ends with
+% \Verbatim@Par. It is then possible to redefine these when formatting
+% the verbatim text. To insert each line as an argument to \foo, use
+%   \def\Every@VerbatimLine#1\Verbatim@Par{\foo{#1}}
+%   \The@Verbatim\Verbatim@Par
+%
+\newtoks\EndVerbatimTokens
+\begingroup
+  \catcode`\|=0
+  \catcode`\[=1
+  \catcode`\]=2
+  \catcode`\{=12
+  \catcode`\}=12
+  \catcode`\^^M=13%
+  \catcode`\\=12%
+  |gdef|Get@Verbatim#1[%
+    |begingroup%
+      |Verbatim@Codes|EveryVerbatimCodes%
+      |let|protect|noexpand%
+      |VerbatimEnvironment%
+      |edef|next[|noexpand|def|noexpand|Verbatim####1|noexpand^^M####2%
+        |noexpand^^M|the|EndVerbatimTokens\end{|@VerbEnvir}]%
+      |edef|endVerbatim[|noexpand|endgroup|noexpand|end[|@VerbEnvir]]%
+      |global|let|@VerbEnvir|relax%
+      |next[|@nil|xdef#1[|noexpand|Every@VerbatimLine##2]|endVerbatim]%
+      |def|next[|@ifnextchar|@nil[|@gobble]%     If \@nil is there, then
+        [|gdef#1[]|endVerbatim|end[document]]]%  \Verbatim found its argument.
+      |expandafter|next|Verbatim]%               Otherwise, try to recover.
+  |gdef|AltGet@Verbatim#1[%
+    |begingroup%
+      |Verbatim@Codes|EveryVerbatimCodes%
+      |def^^M##1^^M##2[%
+        |ifx|@nil##2|@empty|else%
+          |noexpand|Verbatim@Par|noexpand|Every@VerbatimLine##1%
+          |expandafter^^M|expandafter##2%
+        |fi]%
+      |let|protect|noexpand%
+      |VerbatimEnvironment%
+      |edef|next[|noexpand|def|noexpand|Verbatim####1|noexpand^^M####2%
+        \end{|@VerbEnvir}]%
+      |edef|endVerbatim[|noexpand|endgroup|noexpand|end[|@VerbEnvir]]%
+      |global|let|@VerbEnvir|relax%
+      |next[|@nil|xdef#1[|noexpand|Every@VerbatimLine##2^^M|@nil]|endVerbatim]%
+      |def|next[|@ifnextchar|@nil[|@gobble]%
+        [|gdef#1[]|endVerbatim|end[document]]]%
+      |expandafter|next|Verbatim]%
+|endgroup
+\def\AltGetVerbatim{\let\Get@Verbatim\AltGet@Verbatim}
+
+% It is enough to not use \begin or \end when defining new verbatim
+% environments, as the default is for \Get@Verbatim to look for the
+% end of the current environment, but using \VerbatimEnvironment
+% is easier to explain to users.
+
+\def\VerbatimEnvironment{%
+  \ifx\@VerbEnvir\relax\xdef\@VerbEnvir{\@currenvir}\fi}
+
+\let\@VerbEnvir\relax
+
+\def\The@VerbatimErr{%
+  \gdef\The@Verbatim{\@latexerr{Misplaced \string\end{Verbatim}}\@ehd}}
+\The@VerbatimErr
+
+\begingroup
+\catcode`\^^M=\active%
+\catcode`\ =\active%
+\catcode`\^^I=\active%
+\gdef\Verbatim@ObeyThings{%
+\catcode`\^^M=\active%
+\catcode`\ =\active%
+\catcode`\^^I=\active%
+\catcode``=\active%
+\def^^M{\noexpand\Verbatim@Par\noexpand\Every@VerbatimLine}%
+\def^^I{\noexpand\Verbatim@Tab}%
+\def {\noexpand\Verbatim@Space}%
+\Verbatim@NoLigs}%
+\gdef\Verbatim@DontObeyLines{\outer\def^^M{}}%
+\endgroup
+
+\def\SaveVerbatim{\@bsphack\Get@Verbatim}
+
+\def\endSaveVerbatim{\@esphack}
+
+{\catcode``13 \gdef\Verbatim@NoLigs{\def`{\noexpand\@lquote}}}
+
+\def\Verbatim@Prep{%
+  \frenchspacing
+  \ThisVerb\relax\gdef\ThisVerb{}%
+  \VerbatimFont
+  \EveryVerbatim
+  \let\Every@VerbatimLine\EveryVerbatimLine
+  \def\Verbatim@Space{\leavevmode\penalty\@M\VerbatimSpace}%
+  \def\Verbatim@Tab{\leavevmode\penalty\@M\VerbatimTab}}%
+
+\def\Verb@Prep{%
+  \frenchspacing
+  \ThisVerb\relax\gdef\ThisVerb{}%
+  \VerbFont
+  \EveryVerb
+  \let\Every@VerbatimLine\EveryVerbatimLine
+  \def\Verbatim@Space{\leavevmode\penalty\@M\VerbSpace}%
+  \def\Verbatim@Tab{\leavevmode\penalty\@M\VerbTab}}%
+
+\def\Verbatim@Par{\leavevmode\null\@@par\penalty\interlinepenalty}
+
+% Parameter initialization:
+
+\def\VerbatimSpace{\ }
+
+{\catcode`\ =12\gdef\ttspace{{\tt }}}
+
+\def\VerbSpace{\ }
+
+\def\VerbatimTab{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }
+
+\def\VerbTab{\ }
+
+\def\EveryVerbatim{}
+
+\def\EveryVerb{}
+
+\def\ThisVerb{}
+
+\def\EveryVerbatimLine{}%
+
+\def\EveryVerbOutLine{}
+
+\def\VerbatimFont{\tt}
+
+\def\VerbFont{\tt}
+
+\def\VerbatimFuzz{2pt}%
+
+\def\EveryVerbatimCodes{}
+
+\def\EveryVerbCodes{}
+
+\def\EveryVerbOutCodes{}
+
+\def\ThisVerbCodes{}
+
+\def\Verbatim@List#1{%
+  \if@minipage\else\vskip\parskip\fi
+  \leftskip\@totalleftmargin
+  \@rightskip\@flushglue \rightskip\@rightskip
+  \parindent\z@
+  \parskip\z@
+  \parfillskip\@flushglue
+  \hfuzz\VerbatimFuzz\relax
+  \@@par
+  \global\@inlabelfalse  %Prevents vspace from being inserted when
+  \Verbatim@Prep         %first line exceeds \hsize.
+  #1%
+  \Verbatim@Par}%
+
+\def\UseVerbatim#1{%
+  \begingroup\trivlist\item[]\Verbatim@List{#1}\endtrivlist\endgroup}
+
+\def\Verbatim{\Get@Verbatim\The@Verbatim}
+\def\endVerbatim{\UseVerbatim\The@Verbatim\The@VerbatimErr}
+
+\def\LUseVerbatim#1{%
+  \begingroup\list{}{}\item[]\Verbatim@List{#1}\endlist\endgroup}
+
+\def\LVerbatim{\Get@Verbatim\The@Verbatim}
+\def\endLVerbatim{\LUseVerbatim\The@Verbatim\The@VerbatimErr}
+
+\def\BUseVerbatim{%
+  \@ifnextchar[{\@BUseVerbatim}{\@BUseVerbatim[]}}
+\def\@BUseVerbatim[#1]#2{%
+  \begingroup
+    \Verbatim@Prep
+    \let\Verbatim@Par\@Btrivlistcr
+    \@Btrivlist{l}[#1]%
+    #2%
+    \endBtrivlist
+  \endgroup}%
+
+\def\BVerbatim{%
+  \catcode`\^^M=13\relax
+  \@ifnextchar[{\@BVerbatim}{\@BVerbatim[]}}
+\def\@BVerbatim[#1]{\def\@tempa{[#1]}\Get@Verbatim\The@Verbatim}
+\def\endBVerbatim{
+  \expandafter\@BUseVerbatim\@tempa\The@Verbatim\The@VerbatimErr}
+
+\newwrite\Verbatim@Outfile
+\def\VerbatimOut#1{%
+  \@bsphack
+  \begingroup
+    \immediate\openout\Verbatim@Outfile #1\relax
+    \def\EveryVerbatimCodes{\EveryVerbOutCodes}%
+    \Get@Verbatim\The@Verbatim}
+\def\endVerbatimOut{%
+    \Verbatim@ObeyThings
+    \def\Verbatim@Par{^^J}%
+    \def\Verbatim@Space{\space}%
+    \def\Verbatim@Tab{\space}%
+    \def\@lquote{\string`}%
+    \ThisVerb\relax\gdef\ThisVerb{}%
+    \let\Every@VerbatimLine\EveryVerbOutLine
+    \immediate\write\Verbatim@Outfile{\The@Verbatim}%
+    \immediate\closeout\Verbatim@Outfile
+  \endgroup
+  \The@VerbatimErr
+  \@esphack}
+
+% This one is a little tricky because:
+% * we want to ignore the ^^M at the end of the last line,
+% * we want to handle files that end with newline and files that don't
+% * we want comment characters to work properly,
+% * we want to expand each line before inserting \Every@VerbatimLine and
+%     \Verbatim@Par,
+%
+% \The@GVerbatim is used as scratch with global redefinition.
+\newread\Verbatim@Infile
+\def\Verbatim@Input#1#2{%
+  \begingroup
+    \Verbatim@Codes\EveryVerbatimCodes
+    \immediate\openin\Verbatim@Infile #1\relax
+    \ifeof\Verbatim@Infile
+      \@latexerr{No verbatim file #1}\@ehd
+    \else
+      \def\The@GVerbatim{}\Verbatim@NextLine
+      \ifeof\Verbatim@Infile
+        \@latexerr{Verbatim file #1 is empty}\@ehd
+      \else
+        \let\The@Verbatim\The@GVerbatim
+        \def\The@GVerbatim{}\Verbatim@NextLine
+        #2{\Verbatim@@Input}%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+    \immediate\closein\Verbatim@Infile
+ \endgroup}
+\def\Verbatim@@Input{%
+  \let\protect\noexpand
+  \edef\The@Verbatim{%
+    \noexpand\Every@VerbatimLine
+    \The@Verbatim
+    \ifeof\Verbatim@Infile\else\noexpand\Verbatim@Par\fi}%
+  \let\protect\relax
+  \The@Verbatim
+  \ifeof\Verbatim@Infile\else
+    \let\The@Verbatim\The@GVerbatim
+    \def\The@GVerbatim{}\Verbatim@NextLine
+    \expandafter\Verbatim@@Input
+  \fi}%
+\begingroup\catcode`\^^M=\active%
+\gdef\Verbatim@NextLine{%
+  \ifeof\Verbatim@Infile\else%
+    \immediate\read\Verbatim@Infile to\@tempa%
+    \expandafter\Verbatim@@NextLine\@tempa^^M\relax^^M\@nil%
+  \fi}%
+% #2 is empty if line ends in ^^M, #2=\relax otherwise.
+\gdef\Verbatim@@NextLine#1^^M#2^^M#3\@nil{%
+  \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\The@GVerbatim\expandafter{\The@GVerbatim#1}%
+  \ifx#2\@empty\@empty\else\expandafter\Verbatim@NextLine\fi}%
+\endgroup%
+
+\def\UseVerb#1{\begingroup\Verb@Prep#1\endgroup}
+
+\def\SaveVerb{\@ifnextchar[{\Save@Verb}{\Save@Verb[]}}
+
+\long\def\Save@Verb[#1]#2{%
+  \begingroup
+    \Verbatim@Codes\Verbatim@DontObeyLines\EveryVerbCodes
+    \Save@@Verb{#1}{#2}}
+
+\long\def\Save@@Verb#1#2#3{%
+  \let\protect\noexpand
+  \def\next{\@ifnextchar\@nil{\@gobble}{\endgroup}}%
+  \long\def\Verb##1#3{\@nil\xdef#2{##1}\endgroup#1}%
+  \expandafter\next\Verb}
+
+\def\Verb{\Save@Verb[\UseVerb{\The@Verbatim}]{\The@Verbatim}}
+
+\def\VerbatimInput#1{\begingroup\Verbatim@Input{#1}\UseVerbatim\endgroup}
+
+\def\LVerbatimInput#1{\begingroup\Verbatim@Input{#1}\LUseVerbatim\endgroup}
+
+\def\BVerbatimInput{\@ifnextchar[{\@BVerbatimInput}{\@BVerbatimInput[]}}
+\def\@BVerbatimInput[#1]#2{%
+  \begingroup\Verbatim@Input{#2}{\@BUseVerbatim[#1]}\endgroup}
+
+\endinput
+%% END fancybox.sty
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/npsfont.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/npsfont.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d6d8d20046d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/npsfont.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,191 @@
+%% BEGIN npsfont.sty
+%%
+\def\fileversion{v1.0}
+\def\filedate{91/11/20}
+%%
+%% Style option npsfont.sty, for use with LaTeX 2.09
+%%   and the New Font Selection Scheme.
+%%
+%% COPYRIGHT 1992, by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu
+%%
+%%
+%% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of
+%% the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.2 of this license
+%% or (at your option) any later version.  The latest version of this
+%% license is in:
+%% 
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% 
+%% and version 1.2 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version
+%% 1999/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%%
+% DESCRIPTION:
+%
+% Defining new PostScript fonts with the New Font Selection Scheme is easy,
+% but these macros make it easier. They save on keystrokes, and most
+% importantly, they make it easy to change the file names used for fonts
+% because you only have to type the file name once instead of 12 times (for
+% the 12 standard LaTeX sizes). An optional argument lets you scale the fonts.
+%
+% These macros are substitutes for the NFSS's \new@fontshape command. For
+% information on the purpose of this command, and on how to select fonts that
+% are defined with it, see the documentation of the NFSS. If you don't have
+% the NFSS, it is available from
+%   rusmv1.rus.uni-stuttgart.de
+% in
+%   soft/tex/latex-style-supported/New-Font-Selection
+% and from
+%   ymir.claremont.edu
+% in
+%   [.anonymous.tex.inputs.latex-mainz]
+% The NFSS is undoubtably the best way to use PostScript fonts (or any non-
+% standard fonts) with LaTeX, and is well worth upgrading to.
+%
+% USAGE:
+%
+%   \newpsfont[<scaling>]{<family>}{<series>}{<shape>}{<filename>}
+%
+%   \newpsfamily[<scaling>]{<family>}{
+%     {<series 1>}{<shape 1>}{<filename 1>},
+%     {<series 2>}{<shape 2>}{<filename 2>},
+%                 . . .
+%     {<series n>}{<shape n>}{<filename n>}}
+%
+% The scaling argument is optional. Like the \new@fontshape command, these
+% commands can only be used in the preamble.
+%
+% EXAMPLE:
+%
+% Suppose the Helvetica-Oblique virtual font on your system has the name
+% phvro.vf. The following defines the <helvetica> family, <m>edium series, and
+% <it>alic shape to be the Helvetica-Oblique font, at the standard LaTeX
+% font sizes, scaled by .82:
+%
+%   \newpsfont[.82]{helvetica}{m}{it}{phvro}
+%
+% This is equivalent to:
+%
+%   \new@fontshape{helvetica}{m}{it}{%
+%     <5>phvro at 4.1pt%
+%     <6>phvro at 4.92pt%
+%     <7>phvro at 5.74pt%
+%     <8>phvro at 6.56pt%
+%     <9>phvro at 7.38pt%
+%     <10>phvro at 8.2pt%
+%     <11>phvro at 8.979pt%
+%     <12>phvro at 9.84pt%
+%     <14>phvro at 11.808pt%
+%     <17>phvro at 14.1696pt%
+%     <20>phvro at 17.0068pt%
+%     <25>phvro at 20.4016pt}{}
+%
+% The following command sets up the standard Helvetica family:
+%
+%   \newpsfamily[.82]{helvetica}{%
+%     {m}{n}{phvr},                          %Helvetica
+%     {m}{it}{phvro},                        %Helvetica-Oblique
+%     {m}{sl}{phvro},                        %Helvetica-Oblique
+%     {bx}{n}{phvb},                         %Helvetica-Bold
+%     {bx}{it}{phvbo},                       %Helvetica-BoldOblique
+%     {bx}{sl}{phvbo}}                       %Helvetica-BoldOblique
+%
+% (Don't forget the commas.) It is equivalent to:
+%
+%   \newpsfont[.82]{helvetica}{m}{n}{phvr}     %Helvetica
+%   \newpsfont[.82]{helvetica}{m}{it}{phvro}   %Helvetica-Oblique
+%   \newpsfont[.82]{helvetica}{m}{sl}{phvro}   %Helvetica-Oblique
+%   \newpsfont[.82]{helvetica}{bx}{n}{phvb}    %Helvetica-Bold
+%   \newpsfont[.82]{helvetica}{bx}{it}{phvbo}  %Helvetica-BoldOblique
+%   \newpsfont[.82]{helvetica}{bx}{sl}{phvbo}  %Helvetica-BoldOblique
+%   \extra@def{helvetica}{}{}
+%
+% WHY SCALE FONTS?:
+%
+% Disclaimer: The suggestions that follow come from someone who doesn't know
+% anything about fonts.
+%
+% Mixing fonts that are not designed to be used together is not for purists,
+% but many of us do it anyway. Scaling the fonts can at least correct for
+% differences in the x-heights. This is important if you use Computer
+% Modern fonts for in-line math and some other fonts for text.
+%
+% To find out the x-height of the 10pt size of a font, load this style and
+% use the command
+%
+%   \showxheight{<filename>}
+%
+% E.g., \showxheight{phvr} and \showxheight{cmr10} displays
+%
+%   x-height of cmr10 at 10pt is 4.30554pt
+%   x-height of phvr at 10pt is 5.24998pt
+%
+% on the terminal. Scaling the Helvetica fonts by 4.30554/5.24990 = .82
+% gets the x-heights of these fonts in line. It is best to set the x-heights
+% the same for the medium weight, normal shaped fonts, and then scale the
+% rest of the fonts in the same family by the same amount.
+%
+% David Jones has a psfonts.sty that sets up the standard PostScript fonts,
+% all scaled so that the x-heights match that of the Computer Modern medium
+% roman font. It is available via anonymous ftp from theory.lcs.mit.edu in
+% /pub/dmjones.
+%
+% IMPLEMENTATION:
+%
+% \scale@stdsizes has at its argument a scaling factor. It uses \font@scale
+% to define \scaled@sizes to be the macro whose argument is the name of a
+% font, and which expands to the definitions of the standard \LaTeX{} sizes
+% for New Font Selection Schemes \new@fontshape command.
+%
+\message{\space\space\fileversion\space\space\filedate
+  \space\space<tvz>}
+\@ifundefined{new@psfontshape}{}{\endinput}
+\def\font@scale#1#2#3{\dimen@=#2\dimen@=#3\dimen@
+  \edef\scaled@sizes##1{\scaled@sizes{##1}<#1>##1 at\number\dimen@ sp}}
+\def\scale@stdsizes#1{%
+  \edef\scaled@sizes##1{}%
+  \font@scale{5}{5pt}{#1}%
+  \font@scale{6}{6pt}{#1}%
+  \font@scale{7}{7pt}{#1}%
+  \font@scale{8}{8pt}{#1}%
+  \font@scale{9}{9pt}{#1}%
+  \font@scale{10}{10pt}{#1}%
+  \font@scale{11}{10.95pt}{#1}%
+  \font@scale{12}{12pt}{#1}%
+  \font@scale{14}{14.4pt}{#1}%
+  \font@scale{17}{17.28pt}{#1}%
+  \font@scale{20}{20.74pt}{#1}%
+  \font@scale{25}{24.88pt}{#1}}
+\def\new@psfontshape#1#2#3#4{%
+  \new@fontshape{#1}{#2}{#3}{\scaled@sizes{#4}}{}}
+\def\new@psfont[#1]#2#3#4#5{%
+  \scale@stdsizes{#1}%
+  \new@psfontshape{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}}
+\def\newpsfont{%
+  \@ifnextchar [{\new@psfont}{\new@psfont[1]}}
+\def\newpsfamily{%
+  \@ifnextchar [{\new@psfamily}{\new@psfamily[1]}}
+\def\new@psfamily[#1]#2#3{%
+  \scale@stdsizes{#1}%
+  \@for\@tempa:=#3\do{%
+    \edef\@tempb{\noexpand\new@psfontshape{#2}\@tempa}
+    \@tempb}%
+  \extra@def{#2}{}{}}
+\def\showxheight#1{%
+  \font\@tempfont=#1 at 10pt%
+  \typeout{^^J x-height of #1 at 10pt is \the\fontdimen5\@tempfont}}
+% The commands are added to \@preamblecmds to save memory.
+\begingroup
+  \def\do{\noexpand\do\noexpand}
+  \xdef\@preamblecmds{\@preamblecmds
+    \do\font@scale
+    \do\scale@stdsizes
+    \do\scaled@sizes
+    \do\new@psfontshape
+    \do\new@psfont
+    \do\newpsfont
+    \do\newpsfamily
+    \do\new@psfamily}
+\endgroup
+\endinput
+%% END npsfont.sty
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/sem-a4.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/sem-a4.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f366abe2d4d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/sem-a4.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+%%
+%% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of
+%% the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.2 of this license
+%% or (at your option) any later version.  The latest version of this
+%% license is in:
+%% 
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% 
+%% and version 1.2 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version
+%% 1999/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% BEGIN sem-a4.sty
+\def\paperwidth{210mm}
+\def\paperheight{297mm}
+\input sem-page.sty
+\slidewidth 222mm
+\slideheight 152mm
+\endinput
+%% END sem-a4.sty
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/sem-page.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/sem-page.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a013fcf3ad4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/sem-page.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+%% BEGIN sem-page.sty
+\def\fileversion{1.0}
+\def\filedate{93/04/01}
+%%
+%% Contains the page parameters for the `seminar' LaTeX document style.
+%%
+%% COPYRIGHT 1993, by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu
+%%
+%% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of
+%% the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.2 of this license
+%% or (at your option) any later version.  The latest version of this
+%% license is in:
+%% 
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% 
+%% and version 1.2 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version
+%% 1999/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%%
+\def\slideleftmargin{.6in}
+\def\sliderightmargin{.6in}
+\def\slidetopmargin{.6in}
+\def\slidebottommargin{.6in}
+\ifarticle
+  \ifportrait
+    \twocolumn
+    \sloppy
+    \topmargin 0pt
+    \headheight 15pt
+    \headsep 25pt
+    \footskip 30pt
+    \footheight 15pt
+    \textheight\paperwidth\relax
+    \advance\textheight -1in
+    \advance\textheight -\headsep
+    \advance\textheight -\headheight
+    \advance\textheight -\footskip
+    \advance\textheight -\footheight
+    \advance\textheight -.5in
+    \textwidth\paperheight\relax
+    \advance\textwidth by -2in
+    \oddsidemargin 0pt
+    \evensidemargin 0pt
+    \leftmargini 2em
+    \leftmarginv .5em
+    \leftmarginvi .5em
+    \columnsep  40pt
+    \marginparwidth 0pt
+    \marginparsep 0pt
+  \else
+    \textwidth 5.5in
+    \oddsidemargin\paperwidth\relax
+    \advance\oddsidemargin -\textwidth
+    \divide\oddsidemargin 2
+    \advance\oddsidemargin -1in
+    \evensidemargin\oddsidemargin
+    \if@twoside
+      \advance\oddsidemargin -18pt
+      \advance\evensidemargin 18pt
+    \fi
+    \topmargin -20pt
+    \headheight 15pt
+    \headsep 25pt
+    \footskip 33pt
+    \footheight 15pt
+    \textheight\paperheight\relax
+    \advance\textheight -1in
+    \advance\textheight -\topmargin
+    \advance\textheight -\headsep
+    \advance\textheight -\headheight
+    \advance\textheight -\footskip
+    \advance\textheight -.5in
+  \fi
+\else
+  \oddsidemargin 0pt
+  \evensidemargin 0pt
+  \marginparwidth 0pt
+  \marginparsep 0pt
+  \ifportrait
+    \textwidth\paperwidth\relax
+    \textheight\paperheight\relax
+  \else
+    \textwidth\paperheight\relax
+    \textheight\paperwidth\relax
+  \fi
+  \advance\textwidth by -2in
+  \topmargin -1in
+  \headheight .5in
+  \headsep .5in
+  \advance\textheight by -2in
+  \footskip .75in
+  \footheight .25in
+\fi
+\endinput
+%% END sem-page.sty
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semcolor.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semcolor.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a98ae7dc905
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semcolor.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `semcolor.sty', version 1.01
+%%
+%% IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+%%
+%% semcolor.sty Copyright (C) 1993 Timothy Van Zandt
+%%
+%% This package may be distributed under the terms of the LaTeX Project 
+%% Public License, as described in lppl.txt in the base LaTeX distribution.
+%% Either version 1.0 or, at your option, any later version.
+%%
+\def\fileversion{1.01}
+\def\filedate{2004/05/18}
+%%
+%% LaTeX style option `semcolor.sty'.
+%% For use with LaTeX v2.09 and the `seminar' document style.
+%%
+%% COPYRIGHT 1993, by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu
+%%
+%% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of
+%% the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.2 of this license
+%% or (at your option) any later version.  The latest version of this
+%% license is in:
+%% 
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% 
+%% and version 1.2 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version
+%% 1999/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%%
+%% You must install the PSTricks package v0.9 or later to use semcolor.sty.
+%%
+\@ifundefined{SemcolorFrameOps}{}{\endinput}
+\typeout{Style Option: `semcolor' for doc style `seminar'
+  \fileversion\space <\filedate> (tvz)}
+% RN modification begin -- 2004/05/04; Rolf.Niepraschk@ptb.de
+%\input{pstricks}
+\ProvidesFile{semcolor.sty}[\filedate\space v\fileversion\space (tvz)]
+\RequirePackage{pstricks}
+% RN modification end
+%
+% Set up the frame styles:
+\def\SemcolorFrameOps{\psset{%
+  fillstyle=none,%
+  linewidth=\slideframewidth,%
+  framesep=\slideframesep,%
+  cornersize=absolute,%
+  linearc=.5cm,%
+  shadowsize=2pt,%
+  shadowcolor=darkgray}}%
+\newslideframe{scplain}[\SemcolorFrameOps]{\psframebox{#1}}
+\newslideframe{scdouble}[\SemcolorFrameOps]{\psdblframebox{#1}}
+\newslideframe{scshadow}[\SemcolorFrameOps]{\psshadowbox{#1}}
+\slideframe{scplain}
+%
+% Rotation:
+\def\leftsliderotation#1{\rotateleft{#1}}
+\def\rightsliderotation#1{\rotateright{#1}}
+\sliderotation{left}
+%
+% Color:
+\addto@hook\after@slidepage{\pstVerb{0 setgray}}
+%
+% Overlays:
+\def\make@overlay#1{%
+  \setbox\@slidebox=\hbox{%
+    \pst@initoverlay{#1}%
+    \pst@Verb{(0) BOL}%
+    \copy\@@slidebox
+    \pst@Verb{(all) BOL}}}
+\def\@overlay{\pst@overlay}
+\addto@hook\before@newslide{\def\curr@overlay{0}}
+\@ifundefined{overlaystrue}{}{\ifarticle\else\overlaystrue\layerstrue\fi}
+%
+\endinput
+%% END semcolor.sty
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semhelv.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semhelv.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..cbb1ba1fe22
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semhelv.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,193 @@
+%% BEGIN semhelv.sty
+\def\fileversion{1.4}
+\def\filedate{2000/05/08}
+%%
+%% LaTeX style option `semhelv.sty' for the `seminar' document class.
+%% For use with LaTeX2e.
+%%
+%% COPYRIGHT 1994, by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu
+%%
+%% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of
+%% the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.2 of this license
+%% or (at your option) any later version.  The latest version of this
+%% license is in:
+%% 
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% 
+%% and version 1.2 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version
+%% 1999/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% Edited by Sebastian Rahtz <sebastian.rahtz@oucs.ox.ac.uk>
+%%   and Denis Girou <denis.girou@idris.fr>
+%% To use OT1-encoding 7t names
+%% ************************************************************************
+%% ****                        DESCRIPTION                             ****
+%% ************************************************************************
+%%
+% This file contains the external font information needed to load
+% the PostScript Helvetica fonts for use by seminar.cls.
+%
+% IMPORTANT:
+%   As distributed, the following font file names are assumed for the
+%   `standard' TeX encoding:
+%
+%     Helvetica              phvr7t
+%     Helvetica-Oblique      phvro7t
+%     Helvetica-Bold         phvb7t
+%     Helvetica-BoldOblique  phvbo7t
+%     Courier                pcrr7t
+%     Courier-Bold           pcrb7t
+%     Courier-Oblique        pcrro7t
+%     Courier-BoldOblique    pcrbo7t
+%
+%   With the NFSS2 and LaTeX2e, you can also use the CORK encoding. The
+%   assumed file names are as above, but with `8t' instead of `7t'
+%
+%   This means, e.g., that phvr7t.tfm or phvr7t.vf must be the name of the
+%   TeX .tfm or .vf (virtual font) file for the PostScript Helvetica font.
+%   See the documentation of your dvi-to-ps driver for information on using
+%   PostScript fonts.
+%
+% Fonts are scaled so that the x-heights match those of the cmr fonts;
+% this makes in-line math look acceptable.
+%
+% Note: The Courier font is not that great.
+%
+% Preliminaries:
+\csname semhelv@loaded\endcsname
+\let\semhelv@loaded\endinput
+\typeout{Style Option: `semhelv' for the `seminar' doc style
+  \fileversion\space <\filedate> (tvz)}
+\typeout{Modified by Stefan (see source for details)}
+\@ifundefined{selectfont}
+  {\@seminarerr{`semhelv' style option can only be used
+    with the New Font Selection Scheme}\@eha\endinput}{}
+%
+% Font definitions.
+
+\expandafter\ifx\csname DeclareSizeFunction\endcsname\relax
+
+% FOR NFSS:
+
+\@ifundefined{newpsfamily}{\input{npsfont.sty}}{}%
+
+% See npsfont.sty for the definition of \newpsfamily.
+
+\newpsfamily[.82]{helvetica}{
+  {m}{n}{phvr7t},          %Helvetica
+  {m}{it}{phvro7t},        %Helvetica-Oblique
+  {m}{sl}{phvro7t},        %Helvetica-Oblique
+  {bx}{n}{phvb7t},         %Helvetica-Bold
+  {bx}{it}{phvbo7t},       %Helvetica-BoldOblique
+  {bx}{sl}{phvbo7t}}       %Helvetica-BoldOblique
+\newpsfamily[.985]{courier}{
+  {m}{n}{pcrr7t},          %Courier
+  {bx}{n}{pcrb7t},         %Courier-Bold
+  {m}{it}{pcrro7t},        %Courier-Oblique
+  {bx}{it}{pcrbo7t}}       %Courier-BoldOblique
+
+% Use fonts or use \slidefonts:
+\ifarticle
+  \renewcommand{\slidefonts}{%
+    \renewcommand{\default@family}{helvetica}%
+    \renewcommand{\rmdefault}{helvetica}%
+    \renewcommand{\ttdefault}{courier}%
+    \renewcommand{\sfdefault}{helvetica}%
+    \family\default@family\selectfont}
+\else
+  \renewcommand{\default@family}{helvetica}%
+  \renewcommand{\rmdefault}{helvetica}%
+  \renewcommand{\ttdefault}{courier}%
+  \renewcommand{\sfdefault}{helvetica}%
+  \family\default@family\selectfont
+\fi
+
+\else
+
+% FOR NFSS2 OR LATEX2E:
+
+\def\helv@scale{.82}
+
+\DeclareFontFamily{T1}{helvetica}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{helvetica}{m}{n}{<->s*[\helv@scale]phvr8t}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{helvetica}{m}{it}{<->s*[\helv@scale]phvro8t}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{helvetica}{m}{sc}{<->s*[\helv@scale]phvrc8t}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{helvetica}{b}{n}{<->s*[\helv@scale]phvb8t}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{helvetica}{b}{it}{<->s*[\helv@scale]phvbo8t}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{helvetica}{m}{sl}{<->ssub * helvetica/m/it}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{helvetica}{b}{sc}{<->sub * helvetica/m/sc}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{helvetica}{b}{sl}{<->ssub * helvetica/b/it}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{helvetica}{bx}{n}{<->ssub * helvetica/b/n}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{helvetica}{bx}{it}{<->ssub * helvetica/b/it}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{helvetica}{bx}{sc}{<->sub * helvetica/m/sc}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{helvetica}{bx}{sl}{<->ssub * helvetica/b/it}{}%
+
+\DeclareFontFamily{OT1}{helvetica}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{helvetica}{m}{n}{<->s*[\helv@scale]phvr7t}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{helvetica}{m}{it}{<->s*[\helv@scale]phvro7t}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{helvetica}{m}{sc}{<->s*[\helv@scale]phvrc7t}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{helvetica}{b}{n}{<->s*[\helv@scale]phvb7t}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{helvetica}{b}{it}{<->s*[\helv@scale]phvbo7t}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{helvetica}{m}{sl}{<->ssub * helvetica/m/it}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{helvetica}{b}{sc}{<->sub * helvetica/m/sc}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{helvetica}{b}{sl}{<->ssub * helvetica/b/it}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{helvetica}{bx}{n}{<->ssub * helvetica/b/n}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{helvetica}{bx}{it}{<->ssub * helvetica/b/it}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{helvetica}{bx}{sc}{<->sub * helvetica/m/sc}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{helvetica}{bx}{sl}{<->ssub * helvetica/b/it}{}%
+
+\def\courier@scale{.985}
+
+% DG/SR modification begin - May. 13, 1998
+% Update some names (phvrq -> phvr7t etc.)
+% DG/SR modification end
+
+\DeclareFontFamily{T1}{courier}{\hyphenchar \font\m@ne}%
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{courier}{m}{n}{<->s*[\courier@scale]pcrr8t}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{courier}{m}{it}{<->s*[\courier@scale]pcrro8t}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{courier}{m}{sc}{<->s*[\courier@scale]pcrrc8t}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{courier}{b}{n}{<->s*[\courier@scale]pcrb8t}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{courier}{b}{it}{<->s*[\courier@scale]pcrbo8t}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{courier}{m}{sl}{<->ssub * courier/m/it}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{courier}{b}{sc}{<->sub * courier/m/sc}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{courier}{b}{sl}{<->ssub * courier/b/it}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{courier}{bx}{n}{<->ssub * courier/b/n}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{courier}{bx}{it}{<->ssub * courier/b/it}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{courier}{bx}{sc}{<->sub * courier/m/sc}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{courier}{bx}{sl}{<->ssub * courier/b/it}{}%
+
+\DeclareFontFamily{OT1}{courier}{\hyphenchar \font\m@ne}%
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{courier}{m}{n}{<->s*[\courier@scale]pcrr7t}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{courier}{m}{it}{<->s*[\courier@scale]pcrro7t}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{courier}{m}{sc}{<->s*[\courier@scale]pcrrc7t}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{courier}{b}{n}{<->s*[\courier@scale]pcrb7t}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{courier}{b}{it}{<->s*[\courier@scale]pcrbo7t}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{courier}{m}{sl}{<->ssub * courier/m/it}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{courier}{b}{sc}{<->sub * courier/m/sc}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{courier}{b}{sl}{<->ssub * courier/b/it}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{courier}{bx}{n}{<->ssub * courier/b/n}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{courier}{bx}{it}{<->ssub * courier/b/it}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{courier}{bx}{sc}{<->sub * courier/m/sc}{}%
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{courier}{bx}{sl}{<->ssub * courier/b/it}{}%
+
+% Use fonts or use \slidefonts:
+\ifarticle
+  \renewcommand{\slidefonts}{%
+    \renewcommand{\default@family}{helvetica}%
+    \renewcommand{\rmdefault}{helvetica}%
+    \renewcommand{\ttdefault}{courier}%
+    \renewcommand{\sfdefault}{helvetica}%
+    \fontfamily\default@family\selectfont}
+\else
+  \renewcommand{\default@family}{helvetica}%
+  \renewcommand{\rmdefault}{helvetica}%
+  \renewcommand{\ttdefault}{courier}%
+  \renewcommand{\sfdefault}{helvetica}%
+  \fontfamily\default@family\selectfont
+\fi
+
+\fi
+
+\endinput
+%% END semhelv.sty
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.bg2 b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.bg2
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b13ace58d7a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.bg2
@@ -0,0 +1,703 @@
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -*- Mode: Latex -*- %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% seminar.bg2 --- Corrections for compatibility problems and new bugs
+%%                 found in the Seminar package, and few new additions
+%%                 to help overlays management for PDF output files.
+%%                 (see also the seminar.bug file in Seminar distribution)
+%%
+%%                 Disclaimer: this file is mine and doesn't engage TVZ!
+%%
+%% Note: insert it after \usepackage{graphicx} if you use `graphicx'
+%%       and after \usepackage{longtable} if you use `longtable'
+%%
+%% Author          : Denis GIROU (CNRS/IDRIS - France) <Denis.Girou@idris.fr>
+%% Created the     : 1995
+%% Last mod. by    : Denis GIROU (CNRS/IDRIS - France) <Denis.Girou@idris.fr>
+%% Last mod. the   : Fri May 31 20:19:22 2002
+%%
+%% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of
+%% the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.2 of this license
+%% or (at your option) any later version.  The latest version of this
+%% license is in:
+%% 
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% 
+%% and version 1.2 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version
+%% 1999/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\def\FileVersion{2.1}
+\def\FileDate{May 31, 2002}
+\typeout{seminar.bg2: various corrections for the Seminar document class^^J%
+         added since seminar.bug and few add-ons for overlays^^J%
+         (Version \FileVersion\space of <\FileDate> (D.G.))}
+
+\edef\TheAtCode{\the\catcode`\@}
+\catcode`\@=11
+
+% 1 - To correct a bug in the note environment
+%     (reported by Denis Girou (CNRS/IDRIS) <Denis.Girou@idris.fr> - 1995)
+\@savsf=1
+
+
+% 2 - To correct several bugs to generate a list of slides with subsection
+%     entries
+%     (reported by Denis Girou (CNRS/IDRIS) <Denis.Girou@idris.fr> - Jul. 18, 1995)
+%   - To clear the subheading when a new heading is defined
+%     (reported by Axel Thimm - <thimm@physik.fu-berlin.de> - June 5, 1997)
+%   - To assure coherence between heading and subheading when used
+%     in header/footer, for article mode
+%     (reported by Axel Thimm - <thimm@physik.fu-berlin.de> - June 5, 1997)
+%   - Improvements (\refstepcounter and \@addtoreset) by Jeremy Gibbons
+%     <jgibbons@brookes.ac.uk> - Sep. 30, 1997
+
+% Used by the \slide@subheading macro but undefined
+\def\theslidesubsection{\theslidesection.\arabic{slidesubsection}}
+
+\def\slide@heading[#1]#2{%
+% D.G. modification begin - Oct. 15, 1997
+%  \stepcounter{slidesection}%
+  \refstepcounter{slidesection}%
+  \@addtoreset{slidesubsection}{slidesection}
+% D.G. modification end
+  \addtocontents{los}{\protect\l@slide
+    {\the\c@slidesection}{\ignorespaces#1}{\@SCTR}}%
+% D.G. modification begin - May 30, 1997
+%  \gdef\theslideheading{#1}%
+% D.G. modification end
+  \def\@tempa{#2}%
+  \ifx\@tempa\@empty\else
+    {\edef\@currentlabel{\csname p@slidesection\endcsname\theslidesection}%
+      \makeslideheading{#2}}%
+  \fi
+% D.G. modification begin - May 30, 1997
+  \gdef\theslideheading{#1}%
+% D.G. modification end
+% D.G. modification begin - Aug. 1, 1997
+  \gdef\theslidesubheading{}%
+% D.G. modification end
+}
+
+\def\slide@subheading[#1]#2{%
+% D.G. modification begin - Oct. 15, 1997
+%  \stepcounter{slidesection}%
+  \refstepcounter{slidesubsection}%
+% D.G. modification end
+  \addtocontents{los}{\protect\l@subslide
+    {\the\c@slidesubsection}{\ignorespaces#1}{\@SCTR}}%
+% D.G. modification begin - May 30, 1997
+%  \gdef\theslidesubheading{#1}%
+% D.G. modification end
+  \def\@tempa{#2}%
+  \ifx\@tempa\@empty\else
+    {\edef\@currentlabel{\csname p@slidesubsection\endcsname
+% D.G. modification begin - Jul. 18, 1995
+%      \theslidesubsection}\makeslideheading{#2}}%
+      \theslidesubsection}\makeslidesubheading{#2}}%
+% D.G. modification end
+  \fi
+% D.G. modification begin - May 30, 1997
+  \gdef\theslidesubheading{#1}%
+% D.G. modification end
+}
+
+
+% 3 - To correct a bug in the \slidecontents macro
+%     (reported by Denis Roegel (LORIA) <Denis.Roegel@loria.fr> - Sep. 22, 1996)
+
+\long\def\@gobblethree #1#2#3{}
+
+\def\slide@contents{%
+  \def\l@slide##1##2##3{%
+% Modification Denis Roegel begin - Sep. 22, 1996
+%    \slide@cline{\slidenumberline{$\bullet$}{##2}}{##3}}%
+%  \let\l@subslide\@gobbletwo
+% Modification Denis Roegel end
+    \slide@cline{\slidenumberline{##1}{##2}}{##3}}%
+  \let\l@subslide\@gobblethree
+  \@startlos}
+
+
+% 4 - To solve incompatibility between the `graphicx' package and Seminar.
+%     The \espfslidesize Seminar macro work only with the old version of
+%     the `epsfig' package, so with \includegraphics the PostScript files are
+%     always scaled without the possibility to leave them to there natural
+%     size. And also these files are not correctly scaled when we switch
+%     from normal to article mode under Seminar. So, we must redefined the
+%     \epsfslidesize macro of Seminar and modify few internal macros of
+%     `graphicx'.
+%     (Note: I consider only the `graphicX' package, not the 'graphicS' one)
+%     (reported by Karl Tombre  (LORIA) <Karl.Tombre@loria.fr> and
+%                  Denis Roegel (LORIA) <Denis.Roegel@loria.fr> - Jan. 16, 1997)
+
+\def\GraphicsNotScaled{%
+\ifx\Gin@viewport\undefined
+\else                           % Graphicx package detected
+\def\Gin@i{%
+ \def\Gin@req@sizes{%
+% D.G. modification begin - May 16, 1997
+   \Gin@nat@height=\inverseslidesmag\Gin@nat@height
+   \Gin@nat@width=\inverseslidesmag\Gin@nat@width
+% D.G. modification end
+   \Gin@req@height\Gin@nat@height
+   \Gin@req@width\Gin@nat@width}%
+ \@ifnextchar[\Gin@ii{\Gin@ii[]}}
+% D.G. modification begin - Feb. 19, 1997
+%\define@key{Gin}{width}{\def\Gin@ewidth{#1}}
+%\define@key{Gin}{height}{\def\Gin@eheight{#1}}
+%\define@key{Gin}{totalheight}{%
+%\def\Gin@eresize{\totalheight}\def\Gin@eheight{#1}}
+\define@key{Gin}{width}{%
+\@tempdima=##1\@tempdima=\inverseslidesmag\@tempdima\def\Gin@ewidth{\@tempdima}}
+\define@key{Gin}{height}{%
+\@tempdima=##1\@tempdima=\inverseslidesmag\@tempdima\def\Gin@eheight{\@tempdima}}
+\define@key{Gin}{totalheight}{%
+\def\Gin@eresize{\totalheight}%
+\@tempdima=##1\@tempdima=\inverseslidesmag\@tempdima\def\Gin@eheight{\@tempdima}}
+% D.G. modification end
+\fi}
+
+\def\epsfslidesize{%
+\let\epsfsize\slide@epsfsize
+% D.G. modification begin - Feb. 19, 1997
+\GraphicsNotScaled}
+% D.G. modification end
+
+
+% 5 - To solve incompatibily between the LongTable package and Seminar
+%     (reported by Bhaskar Manda (UIUC) <bhaskar@or4.me.uiuc.edu> - May 7, 1997)
+%   - Problem in article format seen later
+%     (reported by Axel Thimm <thimm@physik.fu-berlin.de> - June 5, 1997)
+
+% From seminar.cls
+\def\slide@outputLT{% (from \slide@output)
+  \@makeslide
+  \@testfalse
+  \ifnotesonly\else
+    \iflandscape
+      \ifnum\@landscapeonly>-1 \os@test\fi
+    \else
+      \ifnum\@landscapeonly<1 \os@test\fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \if@test
+    \reset@slideoutput
+% D.G. modification begin - May 13, 1997
+%    \@@makeslide
+    \@@makeslideLT
+% D.G. modification end
+    \process@slide
+  \fi
+  \refstepcounter{slide}}
+\def\@@makeslideLT{% (from \@@makeslide)
+  \overfullslide@warning
+  \setbox\@slidebox\hbox{%
+    \vfuzz=\slidefuzz\relax
+    \vbox to\slide@vsize{%
+% D.G. modification begin - May 13, 1997
+    \box\@outputbox
+% D.G. modification end
+    \ifcenterslides\vskip\z@ plus .0001fil \fi
+    \unvbox\@slidebox
+    \vskip\z@ plus .0001fil}%
+    \the\after@slidepage}%
+  \wd\@slidebox\textwidth}
+
+% From LongTable
+\def\LT@output{%
+  \ifnum\outputpenalty <-\@Mi
+    \ifnum\outputpenalty > -\LT@end@pen
+      \LT@err{floats and marginpars not allowed in a longtable}\@ehc
+    \else
+      \setbox\z@\vbox{\unvbox\@cclv}%
+      \ifdim \ht\LT@lastfoot>\ht\LT@foot
+        \dimen@\pagegoal
+        \advance\dimen@-\ht\LT@lastfoot
+        \ifdim\dimen@<\ht\z@
+          \setbox\@cclv\vbox{\unvbox\z@\copy\LT@foot\vss}%
+          \@makecol
+% D.G. modification begin - May 13, 1997
+%          \@outputpage
+          \slide@outputLT
+% D.G. modification end
+          \setbox\z@\vbox{\box\LT@head}%
+        \fi
+      \fi
+      \global\@colroom\@colht
+      \global\vsize\@colht
+      \vbox
+        {\unvbox\z@\box\ifvoid\LT@lastfoot\LT@foot\else\LT@lastfoot\fi}%
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \setbox\@cclv\vbox{\unvbox\@cclv\copy\LT@foot\vss}%
+    \@makecol
+% D.G. modification begin - May 13, 1997
+%    \@outputpage
+%    \global\vsize\@colroom % Work for slides, but not for notes...
+    \slide@outputLT
+% D.G. modification end
+    \copy\LT@head
+  \fi}
+
+% We must adjust \textheight. Sometimes, you must increase it a little by
+% something like \addtolength{\textheight}{5mm}
+% But if you use slides like \begin{slide*}[15cm,10cm]
+% you must define locally \textheight=15cm
+\addtolength{\textheight}{-\headheight}
+
+
+% 6 - To allow automatic changes of language dependent labels,
+%     for instance by loading the `french' package after Seminar
+%     (suggested by Bernard Gaulle (IDRIS) <gaulle@idris.fr> - Nov. 20, 1997)
+% D.G. modification begin - Nov. 20, 1997
+% From seminar.cls
+\def\slidename{Slide}
+\def\slidelabel{\bf\slidename{} \theslide}
+% From slidesec.sty
+\def\listslidename{List of Slides}%
+\def\listofslides{\section*{\listslidename%
+\@mkboth{\expandafter\MakeUppercase\listslidename}%
+        {\expandafter\MakeUppercase\listslidename}}%
+  \def\l@slide##1##2##3{%
+    \slide@undottedcline{\slidenumberline{##3}{##2}}{}}%
+  \let\l@subslide\l@slide
+  \@startlos}
+% D.G. modification end
+
+
+% 7 - There were several problems when doing a global change of color
+%     outside the "slide"environment (using the \color{ColorName} macro
+%     of the `color' package) if this change was not done globally
+%     (that is to say before the "\begin{document}") but inside the document,
+%     for a part of the slides.
+%     These problems can be seen specially for screen presentations,
+%     when we want to use a dark background, so a light foreground color
+%     for the text.
+%     First, the header (defining for instance with the `fancyhdr' package)
+%     changed of color one slide later and was restored one slide later too
+%     if the change of the color was mas inside a group for some slides,
+%     and second, the black color was forced by the footer.
+%     We solve the first problem by usage of the same technique than the one
+%     used by Seminar for global changes based on \special macros and made
+%     before the "\begin{document}". We save the \specials in the
+%     \saved@specials box and insert it at the beginning of the \@slidebox box
+%     with the \insert@specials macro, as for the first slide.
+%     And we solve the second problem by suppression of the command in the
+%     hook which force the black color (defined in the `semcolor' package).
+%     (reported by Denis Girou (CNRS/IDRIS) <Denis.Girou@idris.fr> - 1999-2002)
+
+% Built from \save@srlidespecials (for all slides excepted the first one)
+\def\save@slidespecials@ii{%
+  \begingroup
+    \output{%
+      \global\setbox\saved@specials=\box\@cclv
+      \global\wd\saved@specials=\z@
+      \global\dp\saved@specials=\z@
+      \global\ht\saved@specials=\z@}%
+    \hbox{}\penalty-\@M
+  \endgroup}%
+
+% The first slide is already managed, so we will define \save@slidespecials@i
+% started to the second one only...
+\def\save@slidespecials@i{}%
+
+\ifarticle\else
+  \def\insert@specials{%
+    \ifvoid\saved@specials\else
+      \setbox\@slidebox\hbox{\box\saved@specials\box\@slidebox}%
+    \fi
+% D.G. modification begin - Mar. 28, 2002
+%    \global\let\insert@specials\relax}
+    \global\let\save@slidespecials@i\save@slidespecials@ii}
+% D.G. modification end
+\fi
+
+\addto@hook{\before@newslide}{\save@slidespecials@i}
+
+% D.G. modification begin - 1999
+% \addto@hook\after@slidepage{\pstVerb{0 setgray}}
+\after@slidepage={}
+% D.G. modification end
+
+
+% 7 - To vertically correctly center the footer, if defined
+%     (this is mainly visible when using the `fancyhdr' package, and specially
+%     when a footer rule line is defined)
+%     (reported by Denis Girou (CNRS/IDRIS) - <Denis.Girou@idris.fr> - April 1998)
+
+% 8 - Add-on to allow "full screen" backgrounds.
+%     Seminar originally support only partial backgrounds, which doesn't cover
+%     the full page but only the place of the text. It cannot be easily
+%     modified, as there are dependancies between the header and the text.
+%     So, we choose to define new macros \SeminarNewSlideFrameBackground
+%     and \SeminarSlideFrameBackground to manage the full screen backgrounds,
+%     designed on the model of the \newslideframe and \slideframe ones.
+%     (added by Denis Girou (CNRS/IDRIS) <Denis.Girou@idris.fr> - Jun. 30, 1999)
+
+% D.G. modification begin - Jun. 30, 1999
+\newbox\Seminar@SlideBoxBackground
+% D.G. modification end
+
+\ifarticle
+\else
+  \def\output@slide{%
+    \begingroup
+      \hoffset=-\inverseslidesmag in
+      \voffset=-\inverseslidesmag in
+      \setslidelength\@tempdima{%
+        \ifportrait\paperwidth\else\paperheight\fi}%
+      \setslidelength\@tempdimb{%
+        \ifportrait\paperheight\else\paperwidth\fi}%
+      \ifrotateheaders
+        \@ifrotateslide{%
+          \dimen@=\@tempdima
+          \@tempdima=\@tempdimb
+          \@tempdimb=\dimen@}
+      \fi
+      % \oddsidemargin, \evensidemargin, \headheight, \footheight
+      % used for scratch:
+      % Some page styles like to know \textwidth:
+      \setslidelength\headheight\slidetopmargin
+      \setslidelength\footheight\slidebottommargin
+      \ifautoslidemargins
+        \textwidth=\wd\@slidebox
+        \oddsidemargin=\@tempdima
+        \advance\oddsidemargin-\textwidth
+        \divide\oddsidemargin 2
+      \else
+        \setslidelength\oddsidemargin\slideleftmargin
+        \setslidelength\evensidemargin\sliderightmargin
+        \textwidth=\@tempdima
+        \advance\textwidth-\oddsidemargin
+        \advance\textwidth-\evensidemargin
+      \fi
+      \setbox\@slidebox=\hbox to \@tempdima{%
+% D.G. modification begin - Jun. 30, 1999
+        \box\Seminar@SlideBoxBackground
+% D.G. modification end
+        \kern\oddsidemargin
+        \vbox to\@tempdimb{%
+          \ifnum\fancyput@flag>-1
+            \hbox{\kern-\oddsidemargin\do@fancyput}%
+          \fi
+          \let\label\@gobble
+          \let\index\@gobble
+          \let\glossary\@gobble
+          \vbox to\headheight{%
+            \vfill
+            \hbox{%
+              \slideheadfont\relax\strut
+              \hbox to\textwidth{\@oddhead}}%
+            \kern\z@}%
+          \vfill
+          \hbox to\textwidth{\hss\box\@slidebox\hss}%
+          \vfill
+          \vbox to\footheight{%
+% D.G. modification begin - May 15, 1998
+            \vfill
+% D.G. modification end
+            \hbox{%
+              \slidefootfont\relax\strut
+              \hbox to\textwidth{\@oddfoot}}%
+            \vfill}}%
+        \hss}%
+      \ifrotateheaders\@ifrotateslide\rotate@slide\fi
+      \insert@specials
+% D.G. modification begin - Jun. 24, 1999
+      \let\protect\noexpand
+% D.G. modification end
+      \shipout\box\@slidebox
+    \endgroup
+    \let\firstmark\botmark}
+  \@ifundefined{fancyput@flag}{\def\fancyput@flag{-1}}{}
+\fi
+
+\def\finish@slide{%
+% D.G. modification begin - Jun. 30, 1999
+  \theSlideFrameBackground
+% D.G. modification end
+  \theslideframe
+  \add@slidelabel\slidelabel}
+
+% D.G. modification begin - Jun. 30, 1999
+% Built according \newslideframe, \slideframe, etc.
+
+\def\SeminarNewSlideFrameBackground#1{%
+  \@ifnextchar[{\@SeminarNewSlideFrameBackground{#1}}%
+               {\@SeminarNewSlideFrameBackground{#1}[]}}
+\def\@SeminarNewSlideFrameBackground#1[#2]{%
+  \@namedef{semsfbops@#1}{#2}%
+  \@namedef{semsfb@#1}##1}
+
+\def\SeminarSlideFrameBackground{\Seminar@SlideFrameBackground{Slide}}
+\def\Seminar@SlideFrameBackground#1{%
+  \@ifstar{\@testtrue\Seminar@@SlideFrameBackground{#1}}%
+          {\@testfalse\Seminar@@SlideFrameBackground{#1}}}
+\def\Seminar@@SlideFrameBackground#1{%
+  \@ifnextchar[{\Seminar@@@SlideFrameBackground{#1}}%
+               {\Seminar@@@SlideFrameBackground{#1}[]}}
+\def\Seminar@@@SlideFrameBackground#1[#2]#3{%
+  \def\@tempa{none}%
+  \def\@tempb{#3}%
+  \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
+    \@namedef{the#1FrameBackground}{\relax}%
+  \else
+    \ifx\@tempb\@empty
+      \@namedef{the#1FrameBackground}{}%
+    \else
+      \@ifundefined{semsfb@#3}%
+        {\@seminarerr{Background slide frame `#3' undefined}\@eha}%
+        {\if@test
+          \Seminar@@@@SlideFrameBackground{#1}[#2]{#3}%
+        \else
+          \@namedef{the#1FrameBackground}{%
+            \setbox\Seminar@SlideBoxBackground=\hbox{{%
+              \@nameuse{semsfbops@#3}#2%
+                \@nameuse{semsfb@#3}{\box\Seminar@SlideBoxBackground}}}}%
+        \fi}%
+     \fi
+   \fi}
+\def\Seminar@@@@SlideFrameBackground#1[#2]#3{%
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa\csname the#1FrameBackground\endcsname
+  \edef\next{%
+    \noexpand\def\expandafter\noexpand\csname the#1FrameBackground\endcsname}%
+  \expandafter\next\expandafter{\@tempa
+    \setbox\Seminar@SlideBoxBackground=\hbox{{%
+      \@nameuse{semsfbops@#3}%
+      #2%
+      \@nameuse{semsfb@#3}{\box\Seminar@SlideBoxBackground}}}}}%
+
+\SeminarSlideFrameBackground{none}
+
+
+% 9 - For screen presentations, and specially animated graphics,
+%     we need more than 10 overlays. We increase the limit to 676 (26^2).
+%     (added by Denis Girou (CNRS/IDRIS) <Denis.Girou@idris.fr> - Dec.  5, 2001)
+
+\def\overlay#1{%
+% D.G. modification end
+  \ifoverlays\ifx\@overlay\relax\nooverlays@err\fi\fi
+  \ifslide
+    \@tempcnta=#1
+    \@testfalse
+% D.G. modification begin - Dec.  5, 2001
+%     \ifnum\@tempcnta>-1 \ifnum\@tempcnta<10 \@testtrue\fi\fi
+    \ifnum\@tempcnta>-2 \ifnum\@tempcnta<677 \@testtrue\fi\fi
+% D.G. modification end
+    \if@test
+      \c@overlay=\@tempcnta
+      \ifnum\c@overlay=0
+        \advance\c@slide by -1
+        \refstepcounter{slide}%
+      \else
+        \advance\c@overlay by -1
+        \refstepcounter{overlay}%
+        \ifoverlays
+          \xdef\overlay@list{\overlay@list,\the\c@overlay}%
+        \fi
+      \fi
+      \ifoverlays
+        \@overlay{\the\c@overlay}%
+      \fi
+    \else
+% D.G. modification begin - Dec.  5, 2001
+%       \@seminarerr{\string\overlay\space argument must be
+%         an integer between 0 and 9}\@eha
+      \@seminarerr{\string\overlay\space argument must be
+        an integer between 0 and 676}\@eha
+% D.G. modification end
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \@seminarerr{\string\overlay\space can only be used
+      in slide environments}\@eha
+  \fi
+  \ignorespaces}
+
+\def\overlay@loop{%
+  \begingroup
+    \overlay@prep
+    \c@overlay=1
+% D.G. modification begin - Dec.  5, 2001
+%     \@whilenum\c@overlay<10
+    \@whilenum\c@overlay<677
+% D.G. modification end
+      \do{%
+        \test@member{\the\c@overlay}{\overlay@list}%
+        \if@test
+          \make@overlay{\the\c@overlay}%
+          \finish@slide
+          \output@slide
+        \fi
+        \layer@loop{\the\c@overlay}%
+        \advance\c@overlay by 1}%
+  \endgroup}
+
+% D.G. modification begin - Dec.  5, 2001
+% \def\theoverlay{\theslide-\alph{overlay}}
+\def\theoverlay{{%
+\ifnum\c@overlay>26
+  \@tempcnta=\c@overlay
+  \advance\@tempcnta\m@ne
+  \divide\@tempcnta by 26
+  \multiply\@tempcnta by 26
+  \@tempcntb=\c@overlay
+  \advance\@tempcntb-\@tempcnta
+  \@tempcnta=\c@overlay
+  \advance\@tempcnta\m@ne
+  \divide\@tempcnta by 26
+  \theslide-\@alph{\@tempcnta}\@alph{\@tempcntb}%
+\else
+  \theslide-\alph{overlay}%
+\fi}}
+% D.G. modification end
+
+
+% 10 - Addition for management of cumulative and progressive overlays.
+%      Due to PSTricks, Seminar had since the beginning the required
+%      capabilities to manage overlays in various ways. The only thing
+%      to do is to redefine the PSTricks \pst@initoverlay macro in the
+%      relevant way.
+%      (added by Denis Girou (CNRS/IDRIS) <Denis.Girou@idris.fr> - 1999-2001)
+
+% From `semcolor'
+\def\make@overlay#1{%
+  \setbox\@slidebox=\hbox{%
+    \pst@initoverlay{#1}%
+% D.G. modification begin - Dec.  5, 2001
+%     \pst@Verb{(0) BOL}%
+    \pst@Verb{0 BOL}%
+% D.G. modification end
+    \copy\@@slidebox
+% D.G. modification begin - Dec.  5, 2001
+%     \pst@Verb{(all) BOL}}}
+    \pst@Verb{-1 BOL}}}
+% D.G. modification end
+
+% D.G. modification begin - Feb. 15, 2002
+% We must redefine too the /BeginOL macro form pstricks.pro, as "all" is now -1
+% \def\pst@initoverlay#1{\pst@Verb{\tx@InitOL /TheOL (#1) def}}
+\def\pst@initoverlay#1{%
+\pst@Verb{%
+/BeginOL {%
+  dup -1 eq exch TheOL eq or
+    {IfVisible not
+      {Visible /IfVisible true def}
+     if}
+    {IfVisible
+      {Invisible /IfVisible false def}
+     if}
+  ifelse} def
+\tx@InitOL
+/TheOL #1 def}}
+% D.G. modification end
+
+\def\pst@overlay#1{%
+\edef\curr@overlay{#1}%
+% D.G. modification begin - Dec.  5, 2001
+% \pst@Verb{(#1) BOL}%
+\pst@Verb{#1 BOL}%
+% D.G. modification end
+\aftergroup\pst@endoverlay}
+\def\pst@endoverlay{%
+% D.G. modification begin - Dec.  5, 2001
+% \pst@Verb{(\curr@overlay) BOL}}
+\pst@Verb{\curr@overlay\space BOL}}
+% D.G. modification end
+
+% Cumulative overlays
+% °°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°
+
+% Cumulative overlays, to force to print all preceding ones
+\def\SeminarCumulativeOverlays{%
+\def\pst@initoverlay##1{%
+\pst@Verb{%
+/BeginOL {%
+  dup -1 eq exch TheOL le or
+    {IfVisible not
+      {Visible /IfVisible true def}
+     if}
+    {IfVisible
+      {Invisible /IfVisible false def}
+     if}
+  ifelse} def
+\tx@InitOL
+/TheOL ##1 def}}}
+
+% Alternative method for same goal (needed when PSTricks nodes are used)
+\def\SeminarAltCumulativeOverlays{%
+\def\pst@initoverlay##1{%
+\pst@Verb{%
+/BeginOL {%
+  dup -1 eq exch TheOL le or
+    {IfVisible not
+      {Visible /IfVisible true def}
+     if}
+    {IfVisible
+      {Invisible /IfVisible false def}
+     if}
+  ifelse} def
+\tx@InitOL
+/Visible {initclip} def
+/Invisible {CP newpath OLUnit itransform moveto clip newpath moveto} def
+/TheOL ##1 def}}}
+
+% Progressive overlays
+% °°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°
+
+% Progressive overlays (at step i, only overlays 0 and i are shown)
+\def\SeminarProgressiveOverlays{%
+\def\pst@initoverlay##1{%
+\pst@Verb{%
+/BeginOL {%
+  /NumOL ED
+  NumOL -1 eq NumOL 0 eq NumOL TheOL eq or or
+    {IfVisible not
+      {Visible /IfVisible true def}
+     if}
+    {IfVisible
+      {Invisible /IfVisible false def}
+     if}
+  ifelse} def
+\tx@InitOL
+/TheOL ##1 def}}}
+
+% Alternative method for the same goal (needed when PSTricks nodes are used)
+\def\SeminarAltProgressiveOverlays{%
+\def\pst@initoverlay##1{%
+\pst@Verb{%
+/BeginOL {%
+  /NumOL ED
+  NumOL -1 eq NumOL 0 eq NumOL TheOL eq or or
+    {IfVisible not
+      {Visible /IfVisible true def}
+     if}
+    {IfVisible
+      {Invisible /IfVisible false def}
+     if}
+  ifelse} def
+\tx@InitOL
+/Visible {initclip} def
+/Invisible {CP newpath OLUnit itransform moveto clip newpath moveto} def
+/TheOL ##1 def}}}
+
+% Generation of the next overlay (minor add-on)
+% °°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°
+% (it increment automatically the number of the current overlay)
+\newcommand{\SeminarNextOverlay}[1]{%
+\addtocounter{overlay}{1}%
+\begin{overlay}{\the\c@overlay}#1\end{overlay}}
+
+% To force all items in the various list environments to appear
+% in their own overlay (minor add-on)
+% °°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°
+\let\itemORIG\item
+
+\def\SeminarItemInOverlay{%
+\def\item{%
+\addtocounter{overlay}{1}%
+\overlay{\the\c@overlay}%
+\itemORIG}}
+
+\catcode`\@=\TheAtCode\relax
+\endinput
+%% END seminar.bg2
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.bug b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.bug
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..64a1243d727
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.bug
@@ -0,0 +1,208 @@
+%%
+%% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of
+%% the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.2 of this license
+%% or (at your option) any later version.  The latest version of this
+%% license is in:
+%% 
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% 
+%% and version 1.2 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version
+%% 1999/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% BEGIN seminar.bug
+% LAST MODIFIED: December 1997
+% The latest version of this file can be obtained from Princeton.EDU.
+
+% This file list some bugs and latebreaking news for seminar.sty,
+% version 1.0, released April 1, 1993.
+
+% 1. Typo in the user's guide: \espfslidesize should be \epsfslidesize.
+
+% 2. fancyheadings.sty does not work well with slides.
+%    WORKAROUND: Ignore the footnote in the User's Guide that discusses this.
+%    Instead:
+%
+%     - If you want the width of the header to be "\textwidth"
+%       (the usual state of affairs), then put
+%
+%          \renewcommand{\headwidth}{\textwidth}
+%
+%       in the preamble and do not change "\headwidth" after that.
+%
+%     - If you want to set the width to something else, then you have to scale
+%       it appropriately. E.g., use
+%
+%          \setslidelength{\headwidth}{<dim>}
+%
+%       or, if are using the "fancy" page style with both the article and
+%       slides formats, use
+%          \ifarticle
+%            \setartlength{\headwidth}{<dim1>}
+%          \else
+%            \setslidelength{\headwidth}{<dim2>}
+%          \fi
+
+% 3. Some people prefer that the headers/footers automatically adjust their
+%    size to the width of the framed slide (I don't, which I guess is why
+%    seminar.sty does not work this way.) I have added an option for this.
+%    Put the command
+%
+%      \autoslidemarginstrue
+%
+%    in the preamble. You must also input this file (seminar.bug), which
+%    contains the patch.
+
+% 4. The optional argument in \twoup[int] does not work with the
+%    portrait option and slides format.
+%    PATCH: Input this file.
+
+% 5. Slide labels can come out in the wrong size font.
+%    PATCH: Input this file.
+
+% 6. When \newslide is used inside a list environment, subsequent nested
+%    list environments can have the wrong line width.
+%    PATCH: Input this file.
+
+% 7. \overlaypagestyle and \layerpagestyle commands ignored.
+%    PATCH: Input this file, AFTER inputting semlayer.sty.
+
+% 8. boxedEPS.tex won't work inside slide environments (because seminar.sty
+%    erroneously modifies \read so that it is preceded by \immediate).
+%    PATCH: Input this file.
+
+%%%% PATCHES
+
+\edef\TheAtCode{\the\catcode`\@}
+\catcode`\@=11
+
+% 3.
+\newif\ifautoslidemargins
+\ifarticle\else
+  \def\output@slide{%
+    \begingroup
+      \hoffset=-\inverseslidesmag in
+      \voffset=-\inverseslidesmag in
+      \setslidelength\@tempdima{%
+        \ifportrait\paperwidth\else\paperheight\fi}%
+      \setslidelength\@tempdimb{%
+        \ifportrait\paperheight\else\paperwidth\fi}%
+      \ifrotateheaders
+        \@ifrotateslide{%
+          \dimen@=\@tempdima
+          \@tempdima=\@tempdimb
+          \@tempdimb=\dimen@}%
+      \fi
+      % \oddsidemargin, \evensidemargin, \headheight, \footheight
+      % used for scratch:
+      % Some page styles like to know \textwidth:
+      \setslidelength\headheight\slidetopmargin
+      \setslidelength\footheight\slidebottommargin
+      \ifautoslidemargins
+        \textwidth=\wd\@slidebox
+        \oddsidemargin=\@tempdima
+        \advance\oddsidemargin-\textwidth
+        \divide\oddsidemargin 2
+      \else
+        \setslidelength\oddsidemargin\slideleftmargin
+        \setslidelength\evensidemargin\sliderightmargin
+        \textwidth=\@tempdima
+        \advance\textwidth-\oddsidemargin
+        \advance\textwidth-\evensidemargin
+      \fi
+      \setbox\@slidebox=\hbox to \@tempdima{%
+        \kern\oddsidemargin
+        \vbox to\@tempdimb{%
+          \ifnum\fancyput@flag>-1
+            \hbox{\kern-\oddsidemargin\do@fancyput}%
+          \fi
+          \let\label\@gobble
+          \let\index\@gobble
+          \let\glossary\@gobble
+          \vbox to\headheight{%
+            \vfill
+            \hbox{%
+              \slideheadfont\relax\strut
+              \hbox to\textwidth{\@oddhead}}%
+            \kern\z@}%
+          \vfill
+          \hbox to\textwidth{\hss\box\@slidebox\hss}%
+          \vfill
+          \vbox to\footheight{%
+            \hbox{%
+              \slidefootfont\relax\strut
+              \hbox to\textwidth{\@oddfoot}}%
+            \vfill}}%
+        \hss}%
+      \ifrotateheaders\@ifrotateslide\rotate@slide\fi
+      \insert@specials
+      \shipout\box\@slidebox
+    \endgroup
+    \let\firstmark\botmark}
+  \@ifundefined{fancyput@flag}{\def\fancyput@flag{-1}}{}
+\fi
+
+% 4.
+\ifarticle\else
+  \ifportrait
+    \def\@twoup[#1]{%
+      \@tempcnta=\the@slidesmag\relax
+      \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta
+      \advance\@tempcntb by #1\relax
+      \advance\@tempcntb by -3\relax
+      \ifnum\@tempcntb>-6\relax
+        \@@input 2up.tex
+        \source{\@magstep\@tempcnta}{\paperwidth}{\paperheight}%
+        \target{\@magstep\@tempcntb}{\paperheight}{\paperwidth}%
+        \printlandscapetrue
+      \else
+        \@seminarerr{Slides magnification is too low for
+          \string\twoup\space to handle}\@eha
+      \fi
+      \def\slidesmag##1{\@semtwoupmagerr\slidesmag}}
+  \fi
+\fi
+
+% 5.
+\def\reset@slideoutput{%
+  \let\par\@@par
+  \reset@font
+  \normalsize
+  \def\baselinestretch{1}%
+  \@nameuse{1\@ptsize @semptsize}%
+  \catcode`\ =10
+  \let\-\@dischyph \let\'\@acci \let\`\@accii \let\=\@acciii}
+
+% 6.
+\def\extraslideheight#1{%
+  \@tempdima #1\relax
+  \edef\X@SlideHeight{\number\@tempdima sp}
+  \ifslide\set@slideheight\fi}
+\def\set@slideheight{%
+  \iflandscape
+    \vsize=\inverseslidesmag\slideheight
+  \else
+    \vsize=\inverseslidesmag\slidewidth
+  \fi
+  \edef\slide@vsize{\number\vsize sp}%
+  \textheight\vsize
+  \advance\vsize\X@SlideHeight\relax}
+\def\newslide{%
+  \par\penalty-\@M
+  \def\do##1{\setcounter{##1}\z@}\slide@reset
+  \the\before@newslide}
+
+% 7. Must be input after semlayer.sty.
+\def\layer@prep{%
+  \ifarticle\else\pagestyle{\layer@pagestyle}\fi
+  \let\thepage\thelayer
+  \ifx\thelayerframe\@empty\else\let\theslideframe\thelayerframe\fi
+  \let\slidelabel\layerlabel}
+\def\overlay@prep{%
+  \ifarticle\else\pagestyle{\overlay@pagestyle}\fi
+  \let\thepage\theoverlay
+  \ifx\theoverlayframe\@empty\else\let\theslideframe\theoverlayframe\fi
+  \let\slidelabel\overlaylabel}
+
+\catcode`\@=\TheAtCode\relax
+\endinput
+%% END seminar.bug
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.cls b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.cls
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..311b3fcf555
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.cls
@@ -0,0 +1,1205 @@
+%% BEGIN seminar.cls
+%% LaTeX2e seminar class, derived by Sebastian Rahtz from
+%% `seminar.sty', generated on <1993/10/8>. Fixes from David Carlisle
+%% and Denis Girou.
+%%
+%\def\fileversion{1.0}
+%\def\filedate{1993/04/01}
+\def\fileversion{1.4}
+\def\filedate{1997/10/13}
+%%
+%% LaTeX document style `seminar', for use with LaTeX v2.09.
+%% This is a style for typesetting notes and slides.
+%%
+%% COPYRIGHT 1993, by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu
+%%
+%%
+%% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of
+%% the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.2 of this license
+%% or (at your option) any later version.  The latest version of this
+%% license is in:
+%% 
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% 
+%% and version 1.2 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version
+%% 1999/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%%
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesClass{seminar}[\filedate, \fileversion]
+\typeout{%
+  Document Style: `seminar' v\fileversion \space <\filedate> (tvz)}
+\def\test@member#1#2{%
+  \edef\@tempg{,#2,#1,}%
+  \edef\@temph{####1,#1,}%
+  \expandafter\def\expandafter\@temph\@temph##2\@nil{%
+    \def\@tempg{##2}%
+    \ifx\@tempg\@empty\@testfalse\else\@testtrue\fi}%
+  \expandafter\@temph\@tempg\@nil}
+\def\addto@hook#1#2{#1\expandafter{\the#1#2}}
+\@ifundefined{reset@font}{\def\reset@font{\normalsize\rm}}{}
+\def\@seminarerr#1#2{%
+  \edef\@tempc{#2}\expandafter\errhelp\expandafter{\@tempc}%
+  \typeout{^^JSeminar.sty error.\space\space\space
+    Type \space H <return> \space for immediate help.^^J}%
+  \errmessage{#1^^J}}
+\def\notslide@err#1{\message{Cannot use \string#1 in slide environments}}
+\def\new@slidebox{\alloc@4\box\chardef\insc@unt}
+\newdimen\slidewidth \slidewidth 8.5in
+\newdimen\slideheight \slideheight 6.3in
+\paperwidth 8.5in
+\paperheight 11in
+\def\addto@preamblecmds#1{%
+  \begingroup
+    \def\do{\noexpand\do\noexpand}%
+    \xdef\@preamblecmds{\@preamblecmds\do#1}%
+  \endgroup}
+\addto@preamblecmds{\addto@preamblecmds\do\@preamblecmds}
+\def\sem@temp#1{\@ifundefined{if#1}%
+  {\def\@tempa{\csname newif\endcsname}
+  \expandafter\@tempa\csname if#1\endcsname}{}}
+\sem@temp{article}{}
+\sem@temp{slidesonly}{}
+\sem@temp{notes}{}
+\sem@temp{notesonly}{}
+\sem@temp{notesonlystar}{}
+\sem@temp{portrait}{}
+\DeclareOption{article}{\articletrue}
+\DeclareOption{noxcomment}{\def\xcomment@hook{}}
+\DeclareOption{slidesonly}{\slidesonlytrue\notesfalse\notesonlyfalse}
+\DeclareOption{notes}{\notestrue\slidesonlyfalse\notesonlyfalse}
+\DeclareOption{notesonly}{\notesonlytrue\slidesonlyfalse\notesfalse}
+\DeclareOption{notesonly*}{%
+  \notesonlytrue\slidesonlyfalse\notesfalse\notesonlystartrue}
+\DeclareOption{portrait}{\portraittrue}
+\DeclareOption{a4}{%
+  \paperwidth 210mm
+  \paperheight 297mm
+  \slidewidth 222mm
+  \slideheight 152mm\relax}
+\DeclareOption{a4paper}{\ds@a4}%
+\DeclareOption{semrot}{\AtEndOfClass{\input{semrot.sty}}}
+\DeclareOption{semhelv}{\AtEndOfClass{\input{semhelv.sty}}}
+\DeclareOption{semcolor}{\AtEndOfClass{\input{semcolor.sty}}}
+\DeclareOption{semlcmss}{\AtEndOfClass{\input{semlcmss.sty}}}
+\DeclareOption{slidesec}{\AtEndOfClass{\input{slidesec.sty}}}
+\DeclareOption{semlayer}{\AtEndOfClass{\input{semlayer.sty}}}
+\DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}
+\ProcessOptions
+\ifnotesonly\else\notesonlystarfalse\fi
+\newdimen\footheight  % seminar.sty v1.0 uses it, but its not in LaTeX2e.
+% Don't want these changed by article.cls:
+\let\sem@paperheight\paperheight
+\let\sem@paperwidth\paperwidth
+\let\paperheight\footheight
+\let\paperwidth\footheight
+\LoadClass{article}
+\renewcommand\normalsize{%
+   \@setfontsize\normalsize\@xpt\@xiipt
+   \abovedisplayskip 10\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus5\p@
+   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
+   \belowdisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus3\p@
+   \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+   \let\@listi\@slide@listi}
+\let\paperheight\sem@paperheight
+\let\paperwidth\sem@paperwidth
+\RequirePackage{sem-page}
+\newtoks\before@document
+\newtoks\after@document
+\let\xcomment@hook\relax
+\before@document{\endgroup\the\before@document\begingroup}
+\after@document{\the\after@document\xcomment@hook}
+\expandafter\@temptokena\expandafter{\document}
+\edef\document{\the\before@document\the\@temptokena\the\after@document}
+\before@document{}
+\after@document{}
+\newtoks\before@enddocument
+\before@enddocument{\the\before@enddocument}
+\expandafter\@temptokena\expandafter{\enddocument}
+\edef\enddocument{\the\before@enddocument\the\@temptokena}
+\before@enddocument{}
+\newif\ifprintlandscape
+\ifportrait
+  \ifarticle\printlandscapetrue\fi
+\else
+  \ifarticle\else\printlandscapetrue\fi
+\fi
+\addto@hook\before@document{\ifprintlandscape\printlandscape\fi}
+\addto@preamblecmds{\printlandscape}
+\def\printlandscape{\addto@hook\before@enddocument{%
+  \typeout{^^J%
+  *******************************************************^^J%
+  ***** !! PRINT THIS DOCUMENT IN LANDSCAPE MODE !! *****^^J%
+  *******************************************************}}}
+\def\slide{%
+  \NestedSlide@Error{slide}%
+  \landscapetrue
+  \@ifnextchar[{\begin@slide}{\begin@slide[\slidewidth,\slideheight]}}
+\def\endslide{\end@slide}
+\@namedef{slide*}{%
+  \NestedSlide@Error{slide*}%
+  \landscapefalse
+  \@ifnextchar[{\begin@slide}{\begin@slide[\slidewidth,\slideheight]}}%
+\@namedef{endslide*}{\end@slide}
+\newcounter{slide}
+\def\theslide{\arabic{slide}}
+\newcount\slide@count
+\newbox\@slidebox
+\newbox\not@slidebox
+\newif\ifslide
+\newif\iflandscape
+\def\@landscapeonly{0}
+\def\landscapeonly{\def\@landscapeonly{1}}
+\def\portraitonly{\def\@landscapeonly{-1}}
+\def\NestedSlide@Error#1{%
+  \ifslide
+    \endgroup
+    \@seminarerr{Nested slide environments. Perhaps missing
+      \string\end{\@currenvir}. May be fatal}\@ehd
+    \expandafter\end\expandafter{\@currenvir}%
+    \ifslide\expandafter\end\expandafter{\@currenvir}\fi
+    \begingroup
+    \def\@currenvir{#1}%
+  \fi}
+\def\begin@slide[#1,#2]{%
+  \slide@clearpage
+  \setlength\slidewidth{#1}%
+  \setlength\slideheight{#2}%
+  \begingroup
+    \ifarticle
+      \output{%
+        \advance\count@ 1
+        \global\setbox\not@slidebox\box\@cclv}%
+      \par\@@par\penalty-\@M
+    \fi
+    \output{\slide@output}%
+    \slidetrue
+    \ifarticle\global\slide@count=\z@\fi
+    \refstepcounter{slide}%
+    \ifnotesonlystar\xdef\first@slidemarker{\the\c@slide}\fi
+    \def\do##1{\setcounter{##1}\z@}\slide@reset
+    \ifarticle\else
+      \edef\page@textheight{\number\textheight sp}%
+      \edef\page@textwidth{\number\textwidth sp}%
+    \fi
+    \set@slidesize
+    \slidebox@restore
+    \the\slide@hook
+    \the\before@newslide
+    \everyslide}
+\def\end@slide{%
+    \par\penalty-\@M
+    \xdef\@tempg{\@currenvir}%
+  \endgroup
+  \ifslide
+    \@seminarerr{Perhaps missing `\string\end{\@tempg}',
+      \iffalse{\fi`\string}' or `\string\endgroup'}\@ehd
+    \def\next{\endgroup\ifslide\expandafter\next\fi}%
+    \next
+  \fi
+  \begingroup
+    \output{\setbox\@tempboxa\box\@cclv}%
+    \@@par\penalty-\@M
+  \endgroup
+  \global\advance\c@slide-1
+  \def\do##1{\setcounter{##1}{\@nameuse{saved@c@##1}}}%
+  \slide@reset
+  \ifarticle\outputloop@savedslides\fi
+  \the\after@slide}
+\let\slideclearpagetrue\relax
+\let\slideclearpagefalse\relax
+\ifarticle
+  \def\slide@clearpage{\par\penalty\z@}
+  \ifnotes
+    \def\slideclearpagetrue{\def\slide@clearpage{\clearpage}}
+    \def\slideclearpagefalse{\def\slide@clearpage{\par\penalty\z@}}
+  \else
+    \ifnotesonly
+      \def\slideclearpagetrue{\def\slide@clearpage{\clearpage}}
+      \def\slideclearpagefalse{\def\slide@clearpage{\par\penalty\z@}}
+    \fi
+  \fi
+\else
+  \def\slide@clearpage{\clearpage}
+\fi
+\newtoks\slide@hook
+\def\everyslide{}
+\newtoks\after@slide
+\def\slidebox@restore{%
+  \def\thepage{\theslide}%
+  \def\newpage{\newslide}%
+  \def\clearpage{\newslide}%
+  \def\thispagestyle##1{\notslide@err{\thispagestyle}}%
+  \pagestyle{\slide@pagestyle}%
+  \@twocolumnfalse
+  \def\twocolumn{\notslide@err{\twocolumn}}%
+  \def\onecolumn{\notslide@err{\onecolumn}}%
+  \def\marginpar##1{\notslide@err{\marginpar}}%
+  \def\thanks{\slidethanks}%
+  \def\maketitle{\slidemaketitle}%
+  \fix@floats
+  \fix@whatsits
+  \slide@footnotes
+  \def\do##1{\expandafter\xdef\csname
+   saved@c@##1\endcsname{\the\@nameuse{c@##1}}}%
+  \slide@reset
+  \topskip\z@ \maxdepth\z@
+  \slide@listparameters
+  \slidefonts
+  \def\baselinestretch{\slidestretch}%
+  \def\arraystretch{\slidearraystretch}%
+  \sem@ptsize{\slide@ptsize}}
+\def\date#1{\gdef\@date{#1}\gdef\thedate{#1}}
+\def\author#1{\gdef\@author{#1}\gdef\theauthor{#1}}
+\def\title#1{\gdef\@title{#1}\gdef\thetitle{#1}}
+\date{\today}
+\let\slidethanks\thanks
+\def\thethanks{\@thanks}%
+\def\slidemaketitle{%
+  \par
+  \begin{center}\bf
+    {\large \thetitle}\par\vskip 1ex
+    \begin{tabular}[t]{c} \theauthor \end{tabular}\par\vskip 1ex
+    \thedate
+  \end{center}%
+  \thethanks\par}
+\def\fix@floats{%
+  \def\@xfloat##1[##2]{%
+    \expandafter\let\csname end##1\endcsname\end@float
+    \par\medskip\vbox\bgroup\def\@captype{##1}\parindent\z@
+    \ignorespaces}%
+  \def\end@float{\par\vskip\z@\egroup\medskip}%
+  \def\@dblfloat{\@float}\def\end@dblfloat{\end@float}%
+  \def\endfigure{\end@float}\def\endtable{\end@float}}
+\let\normal@write\write
+\let\normal@read\read
+\let\normal@openout\openout
+\let\normal@closeout\closeout
+% changed as per DPC 1997/09/16
+\def\fix@whatsits{%
+  \long\def \protected@write##1##2##3{%
+      \begingroup
+       ##2%
+       \let\protect\noexpand
+       \immediate\normal@write##1{##3}%
+      \endgroup
+      \if@nobreak\ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi}%
+}
+% end change
+\newinsert\slide@footins
+\skip\slide@footins=\bigskipamount
+\count\slide@footins=1000
+\dimen\slide@footins=4in
+\def\theslidefootnote{\alph{footnote}}
+\def\slide@footnotes{%
+  \def\thefootnote{\theslidefootnote}%
+  \let\footins\slide@footins
+  \interfootnotelinepenalty\@M}
+\def\slidefonts{}
+\def\slidestretch{1.18}
+\def\slidearraystretch{1.2}
+\def\raggedslides{\@ifnextchar[{\@raggedslides}{\@raggedslides[1fil]}}
+\def\@raggedslides[#1]{%
+  \edef\slide@@rightskip{#1}%
+  \ifslide\slide@rightskip\fi}
+\def\slide@rightskip{%
+  \@rightskip\z@ plus \slide@@rightskip\relax \rightskip\@rightskip}
+\def\slide@@rightskip{1fil}
+\newcount\slide@listdepth
+\def\slide@listparameters{%
+  \let\@listdepth\slide@listdepth
+  \slide@listdepth\z@
+  \def\@listi{\slide@listi}%
+  \def\@listii{\slide@listii}%
+  \def\@listiii{\slide@listiii}%
+  \let\@listiv\relax\let\@listv\relax\let\@listvi\relax}
+\def\slide@listi{%
+  \leftmargin\leftmargini
+  \labelwidth\leftmargini \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+  \parsep\parskip \divide\parsep2
+  \partopsep\slidepartopsep\relax
+  \advance\partopsep-\parskip
+  \ifdim\partopsep<\z@\partopsep\z@\fi
+  \itemsep\slideitemsep\relax
+  \ifdim\parsep<\itemsep
+    \topsep\itemsep \advance\topsep-\parsep
+  \else
+    \itemsep\parsep \topsep\z@
+  \fi}
+\def\slide@listii{%
+  \leftmargin\leftmarginii
+  \labelwidth\leftmarginii \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+  \divide\itemsep2 \divide\parsep2
+  \divide\topsep2 \divide\partopsep2\relax}%
+\def\slide@listiii{%
+  \leftmargin\leftmarginiii
+  \labelwidth\leftmarginiii \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+  \itemsep \z@ \parsep\z@ \topsep\z@}%
+\def\slideleftmargini{1.8em}
+\def\slideleftmarginii{1.4em}
+\def\slideleftmarginiii{1em}
+\def\slidelabelsep{.5em}
+\def\slideitemsep{.8ex minus .2ex}
+\def\slidepartopsep{1ex minus .2ex}
+\newbox\saved@specials
+\def\save@slidespecials{%
+  \begingroup
+    \output{%
+      \global\setbox\saved@specials=\box\@cclv
+      \global\wd\saved@specials=\z@
+      \global\dp\saved@specials=\z@
+      \global\ht\saved@specials=\z@}%
+    \hbox{}\penalty-\@M
+    \global\let\saved@texttop\@texttop
+    \gdef\@texttop{%
+      \ifvoid\saved@specials\else\box\saved@specials\nointerlineskip\fi
+      \saved@texttop
+      \global\let\@texttop\saved@texttop}%
+  \endgroup}
+\addto@hook\after@document{\save@slidespecials}
+\ifarticle\else
+  \def\insert@specials{%
+    \ifvoid\saved@specials\else
+      \setbox\@slidebox\hbox{\box\saved@specials\box\@slidebox}%
+    \fi
+    \global\let\insert@specials\relax}
+\fi
+\def\extraslideheight#1{%
+  \@tempdima #1\relax
+  \edef\X@SlideHeight{\number\@tempdima sp}
+  \ifslide\set@slidesize\fi}
+\extraslideheight{6pt}
+\def\set@slidesize{%
+  \iflandscape
+    \hsize=\inverseslidesmag\slidewidth
+    \vsize=\inverseslidesmag\slideheight
+  \else
+    \hsize=\inverseslidesmag\slideheight
+    \vsize=\inverseslidesmag\slidewidth
+  \fi
+  \edef\slide@vsize{\number\vsize sp}%
+  \textheight\vsize
+  \advance\vsize\X@SlideHeight\relax
+  \textwidth\hsize\columnwidth\hsize\linewidth\hsize}
+\def\newslide{%
+  \par\penalty-\@M
+  \def\do##1{\setcounter{##1}\z@}\slide@reset
+  \the\before@newslide
+  \set@slidesize}
+\newtoks\before@newslide
+\def\slide@reset{\do{footnote}}
+\def\slidereset#1{\def\slide@reset{}\addtoslidereset{#1}}
+\def\addtoslidereset#1{%
+  \edef\@tempa{#1}\expandafter\addto@slidereset\@tempa,\@nil,}
+\def\addto@slidereset#1,{%
+  \ifx\@nil#1\else
+    \@ifundefined{c@#1}%
+      {\@seminarerr{Counter `#1' not defined}\@ehd}%
+      {\expandafter\def\expandafter\slide@reset\expandafter{%
+        \slide@reset\do{#1}}}%
+    \expandafter\addto@slidereset
+  \fi}
+\def\slide@output{%
+  \@makeslide
+  \@testfalse
+  \ifnotesonly\else
+    \iflandscape
+      \ifnum\@landscapeonly>-1 \os@test\fi
+    \else
+      \ifnum\@landscapeonly<1 \os@test\fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \if@test
+    \reset@slideoutput
+    \@@makeslide
+    \process@slide
+  \fi
+  \refstepcounter{slide}}
+\def\reset@slideoutput{%
+  \let\par\@@par
+  \reset@font
+  \def\baselinestretch{1}%
+  \@nameuse{1\@ptsize @semptsize}%
+  \catcode`\ =10
+  \let\-\@dischyph \let\'\@acci \let\`\@accii \let\=\@acciii}
+\newif\ifcenterslides
+\centerslidestrue
+\providecommand\@begindvi{} % added 1997/04/15 SPQR, to cope with very
+                            % old LaTeXs
+\def\@makeslide{%
+  \setbox\@slidebox\vbox{%
+    \@begindvi % added 1997/04/15 SPQR
+    \unvbox\@cclv
+    \ifvoid\slide@footins\else
+      \vskip\skip\slide@footins
+      \footnoterule
+      \unvbox\slide@footins
+    \fi
+    \vskip\z@}}
+\def\@@makeslide{%
+  \overfullslide@warning
+  \setbox\@slidebox\hbox{%
+    \vfuzz=\slidefuzz\relax
+    \vbox to\slide@vsize{%
+    \ifcenterslides\vskip\z@ plus .0001fil \fi
+    \unvbox\@slidebox
+    \vskip\z@ plus .0001fil}%
+    \the\after@slidepage}%
+  \wd\@slidebox\textwidth}
+\def\overfullslide@warning{%
+  \dimen@\ht\@slidebox
+  \advance\dimen@-\slide@vsize\relax
+  \ifdim\dimen@>\slidefuzz\relax
+    \@warning{Slide \theslide\space overfull by \the\dimen@}%
+  \fi}
+\def\slidefuzz{2pt}
+\newtoks\after@slidepage
+\newif\ifrotateheaders
+\def\sliderotation#1{\@ifundefined{semsr@#1}%
+  {\@latexerr{Slide rotation `#1' not defined.}\@eha}%
+  {\@nameuse{semsr@#1}}}
+\def\semsr@left{%
+  \def\rotate@slide{%
+    \setbox\@slidebox\hbox{\leftsliderotation{\box\@slidebox}}}}
+\def\semsr@right{%
+  \def\rotate@slide{%
+    \setbox\@slidebox\hbox{\rightsliderotation{\box\@slidebox}}}}
+\def\semsr@none{\let\rotate@slide\relax}
+\sliderotation{none}
+\def\leftsliderotation#1{%
+  \@seminarerr{\string\leftsliderotation\space has not been defined}%
+  \@ehd}
+\let\rightsliderotation\leftsliderotation
+\def\@ifrotateslide#1{%
+  \ifx\rotate@slide\relax\else
+    \iflandscape\ifportrait#1\fi\else\ifportrait\else#1\fi\fi
+  \fi}
+\def\process@slide{%
+  \slideframewidth=\inverseslidesmag\slideframewidth
+  \slideframesep=\inverseslidesmag\slideframesep
+  \fboxrule\slideframewidth
+  \fboxsep\slideframesep
+  \ifarticle
+    \@ifrotateslide\rotate@slide
+  \else
+    \ifrotateheaders\else\@ifrotateslide\rotate@slide\fi
+  \fi
+  \process@@slide}
+\def\process@@slide{\finish@slide\output@slide}
+\def\finish@slide{%
+  \theslideframe
+  \add@slidelabel\slidelabel}
+\ifarticle
+  \def\output@slide{%
+    \global\advance\slide@count1
+    \@ifundefined{slidebox@\the\slide@count}%
+      {{\globaldefs=1\expandafter
+        \new@slidebox\csname slidebox@\the\slide@count\endcsname}}{}%
+    \expandafter\global\expandafter\setbox\csname
+      slidebox@\the\slide@count\endcsname\box\@slidebox}
+\else
+  \def\output@slide{%
+    \begingroup
+      \hoffset=-\inverseslidesmag in
+      \voffset=-\inverseslidesmag in
+      \setslidelength\@tempdima{%
+        \ifportrait\paperwidth\else\paperheight\fi}
+      \setslidelength\@tempdimb{%
+        \ifportrait\paperheight\else\paperwidth\fi}
+      \ifrotateheaders
+        \@ifrotateslide{%
+          \dimen@=\@tempdima
+          \@tempdima=\@tempdimb
+          \@tempdimb=\dimen@}
+      \fi
+      % \oddsidemargin, \evensidemargin, \headheight, \footheight
+      % used for scratch:
+      \setslidelength\oddsidemargin\slideleftmargin
+      \setslidelength\evensidemargin\sliderightmargin
+      \setslidelength\headheight\slidetopmargin
+      \setslidelength\footheight\slidebottommargin
+      % Some page styles like to know \textwidth:
+      \textwidth=\@tempdima
+      \advance\textwidth-\oddsidemargin
+      \advance\textwidth-\evensidemargin
+      \setbox\@slidebox=\hbox to \@tempdima{%
+        \kern\oddsidemargin
+        \vbox to\@tempdimb{%
+          \ifnum\fancyput@flag>-1
+            \hbox{\kern-\oddsidemargin\do@fancyput}%
+          \fi
+          \let\label\@gobble
+          \let\index\@gobble
+          \let\glossary\@gobble
+          \vbox to\headheight{%
+            \vfill
+            \hbox{%
+              \slideheadfont\relax\strut
+              \hbox to\textwidth{\@oddhead}}%
+            \kern\z@}%
+          \vfill
+          \hbox to\textwidth{\hss\box\@slidebox\hss}%
+          \vfill
+          \vbox to\footheight{%
+            \hbox{%
+              \slidefootfont\relax\strut
+              \hbox to\textwidth{\@oddfoot}}%
+            \vfill}}%
+        \hss}%
+      \ifrotateheaders\@ifrotateslide\rotate@slide\fi
+      \insert@specials
+      \shipout\box\@slidebox
+    \endgroup
+    \let\firstmark\botmark}
+  \@ifundefined{fancyput@flag}{\def\fancyput@flag{-1}}{}
+\fi
+\newskip\slidesep
+\slidesep\intextsep
+\ifarticle
+  \def\fps@fslide{htbp}
+  \def\ftype@fslide{32}
+  \def\float@savedslide{%
+    \begingroup\@float{fslide}%
+      \centerline{\box\@slidebox}%
+    \end@float\endgroup}%
+  \@namedef{float*@savedslide}{%
+    \begingroup\@dblfloat{fslide}%
+      \centerline{\box\@slidebox}%
+    \end@dblfloat\endgroup}%
+  \def\center@slide{\hbox{%
+    \kern-\@totalleftmargin
+    \hbox to \columnwidth{\hss\box\@slidebox\hss}}}%
+  \def\onepercol@savedslide{%
+    \vbox to .996\textheight{\vss\center@slide\vss}\goodbreak}%
+  \def\twopercol@savedslide{%
+    \dimen@.5\textheight
+    \advance\dimen@-\slidesep
+    \ifdim\ht\@slidebox>\dimen@
+      \onepercol@savedslide
+    \else
+      \vbox to .498\textheight{\vss\center@slide\vss}\goodbreak
+    \fi}
+  \def\here@savedslide{%
+    \addvspace\slidesep\center@slide\addvspace\slidesep}
+  \@namedef{here*@savedslide}{%
+    \goodbreak \hrule \@height\z@ \nobreak \vskip\slidesep \nobreak
+    \center@slide
+    \nobreak \vskip\slidesep \nobreak \hrule\@height\z@ \goodbreak}
+\fi
+\ifarticle
+  \def\slideplacement#1{\@ifundefined{#1@savedslide}%
+    {\@seminarerr{Slide placement `#1' undefined}\@ehd}%
+    {\expandafter\let\expandafter\output@savedslide
+      \csname #1@savedslide\endcsname}}
+\else
+  \def\slideplacement#1{}
+\fi
+\ifarticle
+  \ifnotes
+    \ifportrait
+      \slideplacement{float}
+    \else
+      \slideplacement{float*}
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \ifportrait
+      \slideplacement{onepercol}
+    \else
+      \slideplacement{twopercol}
+    \fi
+  \fi
+\fi
+\ifarticle
+  \def\outputloop@savedslides{%
+    \global\maxdepth\@maxdepth
+    \ifvoid\not@slidebox\else
+      \dimen@=\dp\not@slidebox
+      \unvbox\not@slidebox
+      \hrule height\z@
+      \prevdepth\dimen@
+      \penalty\z@
+    \fi
+    \edef\slide@@count{\the\slide@count\relax}%
+    \slide@count\z@
+    \loop
+    \ifnum\slide@count<\slide@@count
+      \advance\slide@count1
+      \expandafter\setbox\expandafter\@slidebox\expandafter\box
+        \csname slidebox@\the\slide@count\endcsname
+      \output@savedslide
+    \repeat
+    \ifnotesonlystar\make@slidemarker\fi}
+\fi
+\def\make@slidemarker{%
+  \addvspace\slidesep
+  \moveleft\@totalleftmargin
+  \vbox{%
+    \hsize\columnwidth
+    \hrule height 1pt
+    \kern 8pt
+    \hbox to \columnwidth{%
+      \hss
+      \LARGE\bf\the@slidemarker
+      \hss}%
+    \kern 8pt
+    \hrule height 1pt}%
+  \addvspace\slidesep}
+\def\the@slidemarker{%
+  Slide%
+  \ifnum\c@slide=\first@slidemarker\else
+    s {\c@slide\first@slidemarker\relax\theslide} --\fi
+  { }\theslide}%
+\ifarticle
+  \let\c@note\c@page
+  \def\p@note{\p@page}
+  \def\thenote{\thepage}
+\else
+  \newcounter{note}
+  \def\thenote{\theslide-\arabic{note}}
+  \def\thepage{\thenote}
+  \addto@hook\after@slide{\setcounter{note}{1}}
+  \expandafter\def\expandafter\@outputpage\expandafter{%
+    \@outputpage\stepcounter{note}}
+\fi
+\ifarticle\else
+  \let\c@page\c@slide
+  \countdef\c@slide=0
+  \c@slide=0
+  \c@page=1
+\fi
+\ifarticle
+  \let\truepagenumbers\relax
+\else
+  \def\truepagenumbers{%
+    \let\c@slide\c@page
+    \countdef\c@page=0
+    \c@page=1
+    \c@slide=0
+    \let\truepagenumbers\relax}
+\fi
+\addto@preamblecmds{\truepagenumbers}
+\newdimen\slideframewidth \slideframewidth 4pt
+\newdimen\slideframesep \slideframesep .3in
+\def\newslideframe#1{%
+  \@ifnextchar[{\@newslideframe{#1}}{\@newslideframe{#1}[]}}
+\def\@newslideframe#1[#2]{%
+  \@namedef{semsfops@#1}{#2}%
+  \@namedef{semsf@#1}##1}
+\newslideframe{plain}{\fbox{#1}}
+\def\slideframe{\@slideframe{slide}}
+\def\@slideframe#1{%
+  \@ifstar{\@testtrue\@@slideframe{#1}}{\@testfalse\@@slideframe{#1}}}
+\def\@@slideframe#1{%
+  \@ifnextchar[{\@@@slideframe{#1}}{\@@@slideframe{#1}[]}}
+\def\@@@slideframe#1[#2]#3{%
+  \def\@tempa{none}%
+  \def\@tempb{#3}%
+  \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
+    \@namedef{the#1frame}{\relax}%
+  \else
+    \ifx\@tempb\@empty
+      \@namedef{the#1frame}{}%
+    \else
+      \@ifundefined{semsf@#3}%
+        {\@seminarerr{Slide frame `#3' undefined}\@eha}%
+        {\if@test
+          \@@@@slideframe{#1}[#2]{#3}%
+        \else
+          \@namedef{the#1frame}{\setbox\@slidebox=\hbox{{%
+            \@nameuse{semsfops@#3}#2\@nameuse{semsf@#3}{\box\@slidebox}}}}%
+        \fi}%
+     \fi
+   \fi}
+\def\@@@@slideframe#1[#2]#3{%
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa\csname the#1frame\endcsname
+  \edef\next{%
+    \noexpand\def\expandafter\noexpand\csname the#1frame\endcsname}%
+  \expandafter\next\expandafter{\@tempa
+    \setbox\@slidebox=\hbox{{%
+      \@nameuse{semsfops@#3}%
+      #2%
+      \@nameuse{semsf@#3}{\box\@slidebox}}}}}%
+\slideframe{plain}
+\def\slidestyle#1{\@ifundefined{ss@#1}%
+  {\@seminarerr{Slide style `#1' undefined}\@eha}%
+  {\@nameuse{ss@#1}}}
+\def\ss@empty{\let\add@slidelabel\@gobble}
+\def\ss@left{\def\add@slidelabel##1{%
+  \setbox\@slidebox=\hbox{%
+    \vbox to \ht\@slidebox{\vss
+    \hbox to 0pt{\hss##1\hskip 15pt}%
+    \vss}\box\@slidebox}}}
+\def\ss@bottom{\def\add@slidelabel##1{%
+  \setbox\@slidebox=\vbox{\copy\@slidebox\vskip 9pt
+    \hbox to\wd\@slidebox{\hss##1\hss}}}}%
+\ifarticle
+  \ifportrait\slidestyle{bottom}\else\slidestyle{left}\fi
+\else
+  \slidestyle{empty}
+\fi
+\def\slidelabel{\bf Slide \theslide}
+\def\newpagestyle#1#2#3{%
+  \expandafter\newcommand\csname ps@#1\endcsname{%
+    \def\@oddhead{#2}\let\@evenhead\@oddhead
+    \def\@oddfoot{#3}\let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot}}
+\def\renewpagestyle#1#2#3{%
+  \expandafter\renewcommand\csname ps@#1\endcsname{%
+    \def\@oddhead{#2}\let\@evenhead\@oddhead
+    \def\@oddfoot{#3}\let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot}}
+\def\@ifgoodps#1{%
+  \@ifundefined{ps@#1}{\@seminarerr{Page style `#1' undefined}\@eha}}
+\def\slidepagestyle#1{%
+  \@ifgoodps{#1}%
+    {\ifslide\pagestyle{#1}\else\edef\slide@pagestyle{#1}\fi}}
+\def\ps@{}
+\slidepagestyle{}
+\ifarticle
+  \def\ps@align{}
+\else
+  \def\ps@align{%
+    \def\@oddhead{\thepage\hfil+}\let\@evenhead\@oddhead
+    \def\@oddfoot{+\hfil+}\let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot}
+\fi
+\def\slideheadfont{\scriptsize}
+\def\slidefootfont{\scriptsize}
+\def\magstep#1{\ifcase#1 \@m\or 1200\or 1440\or 1728\or
+  2074\or 2488\or 2986\or 3583\or 4300\or 5160\fi\relax}
+\def\magstepminus#1{%
+  \ifcase#1 \@m\or 833\or 694\or 579\or 482\or 401\fi\relax}
+\def\@magstep#1{%
+  \ifnum#1<\z@\magstepminus{-#1}\else\magstep#1\fi}
+{\catcode`\p=12\catcode`\t=12
+  \gdef\@@inv@@mag#1pt#2{\def#2{#1}}}
+\def\invert@mag#1{\@tempdima=1000pt
+  \divide\@tempdima by #1\relax
+  \expandafter\@@inv@@mag\the\@tempdima#1}
+\def\@slidesmag#1{%
+  \@tempcnta=#1\relax%
+  \ifnum\@tempcnta>0
+    \edef\inverseslidesmag{\the\@tempcnta}%
+    \invert@mag\inverseslidesmag
+    \ifarticle\else\mag\@tempcnta\fi
+  \else
+    \@seminarerr{\string\@slidesmag\space argument must be an
+      integer equal to 1000 times the magnification}\@eha
+  \fi}
+\def\@articlemag#1{%
+  \@tempcnta=#1\relax%
+  \ifnum\@tempcnta>0
+    \edef\inverseartmag{\the\@tempcnta}%
+    \invert@mag\inverseartmag
+    \ifarticle\mag\@tempcnta\fi
+  \else
+    \@seminarerr{\string\articlemag\space argument must be an
+      integer equal to 1000 times the magnification}\@eha
+  \fi}
+\addto@preamblecmds{\@slidesmag\do\@articlemag}
+\newdimen\semin
+\newdimen\semcm
+\def\@semmagerr#1{%
+  \@seminarerr{\string#1 argument must be an integer
+    between -5 and 9}\@eha}
+\def\slidesmag#1{%
+  \@tempcnta=#1\relax
+  \ifnum\@tempcnta>-6
+    \ifnum\@tempcnta<10
+      \edef\the@slidesmag{\the\@tempcnta}%
+      \@slidesmag{\@magstep\@tempcnta}%
+    \else
+      \@semmagerr\slidesmag
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \@semmagerr\slidesmag
+  \fi
+  \setslidelength\semin\seminlength
+  \setslidelength\semcm\semcmlength}
+\def\seminlength{1in}
+\def\semcmlength{1cm}
+\def\articlemag#1{%
+  \@tempcnta=#1\relax
+  \ifnum\@tempcnta>-6
+    \ifnum\@tempcnta<10
+      \edef\the@articlemag{\the\@tempcnta}%
+      \@articlemag{\@magstep\@tempcnta}%
+    \else
+      \@semmagerr\articlemag
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \@semmagerr\articlemag
+  \fi}
+\addto@preamblecmds{\slidesmag\do\articlemag}
+\def\setslidelength#1#2{%
+  #1=#2\relax
+  #1=\inverseslidesmag#1}%
+\def\addtoslidelength#1#2{%
+  \dimen@=#2\relax
+  \advance#1 by \inverseslidesmag\dimen@}
+\def\setartlength#1#2{%
+  #1=#2\relax
+  #1=\inverseartmag#1}
+\def\addtoartlength#1#2{%
+  \dimen@=#2\relax
+  \advance#1 by \inverseartmag\dimen@}
+\def\slide@epsfsize#1#2{%
+  \ifdim\epsfxsize=0pt
+    \ifdim\epsfysize=0pt
+      \inverseslidesmag#1%
+    \else
+      0pt
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \inverseslidesmag\epsfxsize
+  \fi
+  \epsfysize
+  \ifdim\epsfysize=0pt
+    \ifdim\epsfxsize=0pt
+      \inverseslidesmag#2%
+    \else
+      0pt
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \inverseslidesmag\epsfysize
+  \fi}
+\def\epsfslidesize{\let\epsfsize\slide@epsfsize}
+\slidesmag{4}
+\articlemag{0}
+\def\do@pageparameters{%
+  \do\oddsidemargin
+  \do\evensidemargin
+  \do\marginparwidth
+  \do\marginparsep
+  \do\topmargin
+  \do\headheight
+  \do\headsep
+  \do\textheight
+  \do\textwidth
+  \do\topskip
+  \do\footskip
+  \do\footheight}
+\ifarticle
+  \def\scale@pageparameters{%
+    \begingroup
+      \def\do##1{\global##1=\inverseartmag##1\relax}%
+      \do@pageparameters
+    \endgroup}
+\else
+  \def\scale@pageparameters{%
+    \begingroup
+      \def\do##1{\global##1=\inverseslidesmag##1\relax}%
+      \do@pageparameters
+    \endgroup}
+\fi
+\addto@hook\before@document{\scale@pageparameters}
+\addto@preamblecmds{\scale@pageparameters\do\do@pageparameters}
+\def\allversions{}
+\let\endallversions\relax
+\@namedef{allversions*}{\@bsphack\globaldefs=1}
+\@namedef{endallversions*}{\@esphack}
+\def\slide@list{slide,slide*,allversions,allversions*}
+\def\addtoslidelist#1{\xdef\slide@list{\slide@list,#1}}
+\addto@preamblecmds{\addtoslidelist}
+\ifslidesonly
+  \@ifundefined{xcomment@@@}{\@@input xcomment.sty }{}
+  \def\xcomment@hook{\@xcomment{@@@}{\slide@list}}
+  \newxcomment[]{note}
+\else
+  \def\note{\@bsphack}%
+  \def\endnote{\@esphack}%
+\fi
+\def\noxcomment{\def\xcomment@hook{}}
+\def\os@list{}
+\newif\if@os
+\def\onlyslides#1{\def\os@list{#1}\@ostrue
+  \def\os@warning{\@warning{\string\onlyslides\space argument
+    contains undefined references}}}
+\def\notslides#1{\def\os@list{#1}\@osfalse
+  \def\os@warning{\@warning{\string\notslides\space argument
+    contains undefined references}}}
+\addto@preamblecmds{\onlyslides\do\notslides}
+\addto@hook\after@document{%
+  \ifx\os@list\@empty\else\os@expandlist\fi}
+\def\os@expandlist{%
+  \let\os@@warning\relax
+  \begingroup
+    \def\ref##1{\@ifundefined{r@##1}{?}%
+      {\noexpand\@car\@nameuse{r@##1}\noexpand\@nil}}%
+    \edef\@tempd{\os@list}%
+    \xdef\os@list{}%
+    \@for\@tempc:=\@tempd
+      \do{\expandafter\os@expandrange\@tempc-:-:\@nil}%
+    \os@@warning
+  \endgroup
+  \let\os@expandrange\relax
+  \let\os@checknum\relax
+  \let\os@expandlist\relax}
+\def\os@expandrange#1-#2-#3\@nil{%
+  \def\@tempa{?}\def\@tempb{#1}%
+  \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
+    \let\os@@warning\os@warning
+  \else
+    \@tempcnta=#1\relax
+    \def\@tempb{#2}%
+    \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
+      \let\os@@warning\os@warning
+    \else
+      \def\@tempa{:}%
+      \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
+        \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta
+      \else
+        \@tempcntb=#2\relax
+      \fi
+      \advance\@tempcnta by -1
+      \advance\@tempcntb by 1
+      \ifx\os@list\@empty
+        \xdef\os@list{\the\@tempcnta+\the\@tempcntb}%
+      \else
+        \xdef\os@list{\os@list,\the\@tempcnta+\the\@tempcntb}%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi}
+\def\os@test{%
+  \@testtrue
+  \iflandscape
+    \ifnum\@landscapeonly=-1 \@testfalse\fi
+  \else
+    \ifnum\@landscapeonly=1 \@testfalse\fi
+  \fi
+  \if@test
+    \ifx\os@list\@empty\else
+      \if@os\@testfalse\fi
+      \@for\@tempa:=\os@list\do{\expandafter\os@testrange\@tempa\@nil}%
+    \fi
+  \fi}
+\def\os@testrange#1+#2\@nil{%
+  \ifnum\c@slide>#1
+    \ifnum\c@slide<#2
+      \if@os\@testtrue\else\@testfalse\fi
+    \fi
+  \fi}
+\def\onlynotestoo{%
+  \ifnotes\@testtrue\else\ifnotesonly\@testtrue\else\@testfalse\fi\fi
+  \if@test
+    \@ifundefined{xcomment@@@}{%
+      \edef\sem@temp{\the\catcode`\@}%
+      \catcode`\@=11
+      \@@input xcomment.sty
+      \catcode`\@=\sem@temp\relax}{}%
+    \def\xcomment@hook{\@xcomment{@@@}{\slide@list}}%
+    \addto@hook\after@slide\onlynotes@too
+  \fi}
+\def\onlynotes@too{%
+  \os@test
+  \if@test\gdef\do@end{}\else\gdef\do@end{\xc@begin}\fi}
+\addto@preamblecmds\onlynotestoo
+\def\ptsize#1{%
+  \@ifundefined{#1@semptsize}%
+    {\@seminarerr{\string\ptsize\space `#1' not valid.}\@eha}%
+    {\ifslide
+      \sem@ptsize{#1}\large\normalsize
+    \else
+      \edef\slide@ptsize{#1}%
+    \fi}}
+\edef\slide@ptsize{1\@ptsize}%
+\def\slidefontsizes{\ptsize} %For backwards compatibility??
+\def\slide@setsize#1#2#3#4{%
+  \@setsize{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}%
+  \set@slideskip{#2}}
+\def\slide@@setsize#1#2#3#4{%
+  \slide@setsize{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}\slidedisplayskips}
+\def\set@slideskip#1{%
+  \normallineskiplimit=#1
+  \advance\normallineskiplimit-\normalbaselineskip
+  \multiply\normallineskiplimit-1
+  \normallineskiplimit\slideskip\normallineskiplimit
+  \ifdim\normallineskiplimit<1pt\normallineskiplimit=1pt\fi
+  \normallineskip=\normallineskiplimit
+    minus \slideshrink\normallineskiplimit
+  \dimen@=\normalbaselineskip
+  \normalbaselineskip=\dimen@ minus \slideshrink\normallineskiplimit
+  \normalbaselines}
+\def\slideskip{.75}
+\def\slideshrink{.25}
+\def\slidedisplayskips{%
+  \abovedisplayskip 1.75ex minus .35ex
+  \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+  \abovedisplayshortskip .2ex minus .2ex
+  \belowdisplayshortskip 1ex minus .2ex}
+\def\sem@ptsize#1{%
+  \@nameuse{#1@semptsize}%
+  \large\normalsize
+  \leftmargini\slideleftmargini\relax
+  \leftmarginii\slideleftmarginii\relax
+  \leftmarginiii\slideleftmarginiii\relax
+  \labelsep\slidelabelsep\relax
+  \parskip\slideparskip\relax
+  \parindent\slideparindent\relax
+  \slide@rightskip
+  \slide@listi
+  \skip\footins\slidefootins\relax
+  \footnotesep\slidefootnotesep\relax}
+\def\slidefootins{2ex minus .8ex}
+\def\slidefootnotesep{1.2ex}
+\def\slideparindent{\z@}
+\def\slideparskip{1ex minus .2ex}
+\@namedef{8@semptsize}{%
+  \def\normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{9.5pt}\viiipt\@viiipt}%
+  \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{8pt}\viipt\@viipt}%
+  \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{8pt}\vipt\@vipt}%
+  \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{7pt}\vipt\@vipt}%
+  \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{6pt}\vpt\@vpt}%
+  \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}%
+  \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{14pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}%
+  \def\LARGE{\slide@setsize\LARGE{17pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}%
+  \def\huge{\slide@setsize\huge{20pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}%
+  \def\Huge{\slide@setsize\Huge{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}}
+\@namedef{9@semptsize}{%
+  \def\normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{11pt}\ixpt\@ixpt}%
+  \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{9.5pt}\viiipt\@viiipt}%
+  \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{8pt}\viipt\@viipt}%
+  \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{7pt}\vipt\@vipt}%
+  \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{6pt}\vpt\@vpt}%
+  \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}%
+  \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{14pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}%
+  \def\LARGE{\slide@setsize\LARGE{17pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}%
+  \def\huge{\slide@setsize\huge{20pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}%
+  \def\Huge{\slide@setsize\Huge{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}}
+\@namedef{10@semptsize}{%
+  \def\normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}%
+  \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{11pt}\ixpt\@ixpt}%
+  \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{9.5pt}\viiipt\@viiipt}%
+  \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{8pt}\viipt\@viipt}%
+  \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{6pt}\vpt\@vpt}%
+  \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{14pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}%
+  \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{18pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}%
+  \def\LARGE{\slide@setsize\LARGE{22pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}%
+  \def\huge{\slide@setsize\huge{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}%
+  \def\Huge{\slide@setsize\Huge{30pt}\xxvpt\@xxvpt}}
+\@namedef{11@semptsize}{%
+  \def\normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{13.6pt}\xipt\@xipt}%
+  \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}%
+  \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{11pt}\ixpt\@ixpt}%
+  \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{9.5pt}\viiipt\@viiipt}%
+  \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{7pt}\vipt\@vipt}%
+  \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{14pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}%
+  \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{18pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}%
+  \def\LARGE{\slide@setsize\LARGE{22pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}%
+  \def\huge{\slide@setsize\huge{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}%
+  \def\Huge{\slide@setsize\Huge{30pt}\xxvpt\@xxvpt}}
+\@namedef{12@semptsize}{%
+  \def\normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{14.5pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}%
+  \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{13.6pt}\xipt\@xipt}%
+  \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}%
+  \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{9.5pt}\viiipt\@viiipt}%
+  \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{7pt}\vipt\@vipt}%
+  \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{18pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}%
+  \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{22pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}%
+  \def\LARGE{\slide@setsize\LARGE{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}%
+  \def\huge{\slide@setsize\huge{30pt}\xxvpt\@xxvpt}%
+  \let\Huge\huge}
+\@namedef{14@semptsize}{%
+  \def\normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{18pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}%
+  \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{14.5pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}%
+  \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{13.6pt}\xipt\@xipt}%
+  \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}%
+  \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{9.5pt}\viiipt\@viiipt}%
+  \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{22pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}%
+  \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}%
+  \def\LARGE{\slide@setsize\LARGE{30pt}\xxvpt\@xxvpt}%
+  \let\huge\LARGE
+  \let\Huge\LARGE}
+\@namedef{17@semptsize}{%
+  \def\normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{22pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}%
+  \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{18pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}%
+  \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{14.5pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}%
+  \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{13.6pt}\xipt\@xipt}%
+  \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}%
+  \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}%
+  \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{30pt}\xxvpt\@xxvpt}%
+  \let\LARGE\Large
+  \let\huge\Large
+  \let\Huge\Large}
+\def\twoup{\@ifnextchar[{\@twoup}{\@twoup[0]}}
+\ifarticle
+  \ifportrait
+    \def\@twoup[#1]{%
+      \@tempcnta=\the@articlemag\relax
+      \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta
+      \advance\@tempcntb by #1\relax
+      \advance\@tempcntb by -2\relax
+      \ifnum\@tempcntb>-6\relax
+        \@@input 2up.tex
+        \source{\@magstep\@tempcnta}{\paperheight}{\paperwidth}%
+        \target{\@magstep\@tempcntb}{\paperwidth}{\paperheight}%
+        \targetlayout{topbottom}%
+        \printlandscapefalse
+      \else
+        \@seminarerr{Article magnification is too low for
+          \string\twoup\space to handle}\@eha
+      \fi
+      \def\articlemag##1{\@semtwoupmagerr\articlemag}}
+  \else
+    \def\@twoup[#1]{%
+      \@tempcnta=\the@articlemag\relax
+      \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta
+      \advance\@tempcntb by #1\relax
+      \advance\@tempcntb by -2\relax
+      \ifnum\@tempcntb>-6\relax
+        \@@input 2up.tex
+        \source{\@magstep\@tempcnta}{\paperwidth}{\paperheight}%
+        \target{\@magstep\@tempcntb}{\paperheight}{\paperwidth}%
+        \if@twoside
+          \targetlayout{twosided}%
+        \fi
+        \printlandscapetrue
+      \else
+        \@seminarerr{Article magnification is too low for
+          \string\twoup\space to handle}\@eha
+      \fi
+      \def\articlemag##1{\@semtwoupmagerr\articlemag}}
+  \fi
+\else
+  \ifportrait
+    \def\@twoup[#1]{%
+      \@tempcnta=\the@slidesmag\relax
+      \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta
+      \advance\@tempcntb by #1\relax
+      \advance\@tempcntb by -3\relax
+      \ifnum\@tempcntb>-6\relax
+        \@@input 2up.tex
+        \source{\@magstep\@tempcnta}{\paperwidth}{\paperheight}%
+        \advance\@tempcnta by -3
+        \target{\@magstep\@tempcnta}{\paperheight}{\paperwidth}%
+        \printlandscapetrue
+      \else
+        \@seminarerr{Slides magnification is too low for
+          \string\twoup\space to handle}\@eha
+      \fi
+      \def\slidesmag##1{\@semtwoupmagerr\slidesmag}}
+  \else
+    \def\@twoup[#1]{%
+      \@tempcnta=\the@slidesmag\relax
+      \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta
+      \advance\@tempcntb by #1\relax
+      \advance\@tempcntb by -3\relax
+      \ifnum\@tempcntb>-6\relax
+        \@@input 2up.tex
+        \source{\@magstep\@tempcnta}{\paperheight}{\paperwidth}%
+        \target{\@magstep\@tempcntb}{\paperwidth}{\paperheight}%
+        \targetlayout{topbottom}%
+        \printlandscapefalse
+      \else
+        \@seminarerr{Slides magnification is too low for
+          \string\twoup\space to handle}\@eha
+      \fi
+      \def\slidesmag##1{\@semtwoupmargerr\slidesmag}}%
+  \fi
+\fi
+\def\@semtwoupmagerr#1{%
+  \@seminarerr{\string#1 must come before \string\twoup}\@eha}
+\addto@preamblecmds{\twoup\do\@twoup}
+\openin1 seminar.con
+\ifeof1\else\closein1 \relax\@@input seminar.con\fi
+\endinput
+%%
+%% END `seminar.cls'.
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a90e1bdd307
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,1170 @@
+%% BEGIN seminar.sty
+%%
+%% This is file `seminar.sty', generated
+%% on <1993/4/2> with the docstrip utility (2.0r).
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% seminar.doc
+%%
+\def\fileversion{1.0}
+\def\filedate{93/04/01}
+%%
+%% LaTeX document style `seminar', for use with LaTeX v2.09.
+%% This is a style for typesetting notes and slides.
+%%
+%% COPYRIGHT 1993, by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu
+%%
+%%
+%% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of
+%% the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.2 of this license
+%% or (at your option) any later version.  The latest version of this
+%% license is in:
+%% 
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% 
+%% and version 1.2 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version
+%% 1999/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%%
+\@ifundefined{@seminarerr}{}{\endinput}
+\typeout{%
+  Document Style: `seminar' v\fileversion \space <\filedate> (tvz)}
+\def\test@member#1#2{%
+  \edef\@tempg{,#2,#1,}%
+  \edef\@temph{####1,#1,}%
+  \expandafter\def\expandafter\@temph\@temph##2\@nil{%
+    \def\@tempg{##2}%
+    \ifx\@tempg\@empty\@testfalse\else\@testtrue\fi}%
+  \expandafter\@temph\@tempg\@nil}
+\def\addto@hook#1#2{#1\expandafter{\the#1#2}}
+\@ifundefined{reset@font}{\def\reset@font{\normalsize\rm}}{}
+\def\@seminarerr#1#2{%
+  \edef\@tempc{#2}\expandafter\errhelp\expandafter{\@tempc}%
+  \typeout{^^JSeminar.sty error.\space\space\space
+    Type \space H <return> \space for immediate help.^^J}%
+  \errmessage{#1^^J}}
+\def\notslide@err#1{Cannot use \string#1 in slide environments}
+\def\new@slidebox{\alloc@4\box\chardef\insc@unt}
+\newdimen\slidewidth \slidewidth 8.5in
+\newdimen\slideheight \slideheight 6.3in
+\@ifundefined{paperwidth}{\def\paperwidth{8.5in}}{}
+\@ifundefined{paperheight}{\def\paperheight{11in}}{}
+\def\addto@preamblecmds#1{%
+  \begingroup
+    \def\do{\noexpand\do\noexpand}%
+    \xdef\@preamblecmds{\@preamblecmds\do#1}%
+  \endgroup}
+\addto@preamblecmds{\addto@preamblecmds\do\@preamblecmds}
+\def\sem@temp#1{\@ifundefined{if#1}%
+  {\def\@tempa{\csname newif\endcsname}
+  \expandafter\@tempa\csname if#1\endcsname}{}}
+\sem@temp{article}{}
+\sem@temp{slidesonly}{}
+\sem@temp{notes}{}
+\sem@temp{notesonly}{}
+\sem@temp{notesonlystar}{}
+\sem@temp{portrait}{}
+\def\ds@article{\articletrue}
+\def\ds@slidesonly{\slidesonlytrue\notesfalse\notesonlyfalse}
+\def\ds@notes{\notestrue\slidesonlyfalse\notesonlyfalse}
+\def\ds@notesonly{\notesonlytrue\slidesonlyfalse\notesfalse}
+\@namedef{ds@notesonly*}{\ds@notesonly\notesonlystartrue}
+\def\ds@portrait{\portraittrue}
+\@namedef{ds@a4}{%
+  \def\paperwidth{210mm}
+  \def\paperheight{297mm}
+  \slidewidth 222mm
+  \slideheight 152mm\relax}
+\@@input article.sty
+\ifnotesonly\else\notesonlystarfalse\fi
+\@@input sem-page.sty
+\newtoks\before@document
+\newtoks\after@document
+\let\xcomment@hook\relax
+\before@document{\endgroup\the\before@document\begingroup}
+\after@document{\the\after@document\xcomment@hook}
+\expandafter\@temptokena\expandafter{\document}
+\edef\document{\the\before@document\the\@temptokena\the\after@document}
+\before@document{}
+\after@document{}
+\newtoks\before@enddocument
+\before@enddocument{\the\before@enddocument}
+\expandafter\@temptokena\expandafter{\enddocument}
+\edef\enddocument{\the\before@enddocument\the\@temptokena}
+\before@enddocument{}
+\newif\ifprintlandscape
+\ifportrait
+  \ifarticle\printlandscapetrue\fi
+\else
+  \ifarticle\else\printlandscapetrue\fi
+\fi
+\addto@hook\before@document{\ifprintlandscape\printlandscape\fi}
+\addto@preamblecmds{\printlandscape}
+\def\printlandscape{\addto@hook\before@enddocument{%
+  \typeout{^^J%
+  *******************************************************^^J%
+  ***** !! PRINT THIS DOCUMENT IN LANDSCAPE MODE !! *****^^J%
+  *******************************************************}}}
+\def\slide{%
+  \NestedSlide@Error{slide}%
+  \landscapetrue
+  \@ifnextchar[{\begin@slide}{\begin@slide[\slidewidth,\slideheight]}}
+\def\endslide{\end@slide}
+\@namedef{slide*}{%
+  \NestedSlide@Error{slide*}%
+  \landscapefalse
+  \@ifnextchar[{\begin@slide}{\begin@slide[\slidewidth,\slideheight]}}%
+\@namedef{endslide*}{\end@slide}
+\newcounter{slide}
+\def\theslide{\arabic{slide}}
+\newcount\slide@count
+\newbox\@slidebox
+\newbox\not@slidebox
+\newif\ifslide
+\newif\iflandscape
+\def\@landscapeonly{0}
+\def\landscapeonly{\def\@landscapeonly{1}}
+\def\portraitonly{\def\@landscapeonly{-1}}
+\def\NestedSlide@Error#1{%
+  \ifslide
+    \endgroup
+    \@seminarerr{Nested slide environments. Perhaps missing
+      \string\end{\@currenvir}. May be fatal}\@ehd
+    \expandafter\end\expandafter{\@currenvir}%
+    \ifslide\expandafter\end\expandafter{\@currenvir}\fi
+    \begingroup
+    \def\@currenvir{#1}%
+  \fi}
+\def\begin@slide[#1,#2]{%
+  \slide@clearpage
+  \setlength\slidewidth{#1}%
+  \setlength\slideheight{#2}%
+  \begingroup
+    \ifarticle
+      \output{%
+        \advance\count@ 1
+        \global\setbox\not@slidebox\box\@cclv}%
+      \par\@@par\penalty-\@M
+    \fi
+    \output{\slide@output}%
+    \slidetrue
+    \ifarticle\global\slide@count=\z@\fi
+    \refstepcounter{slide}%
+    \ifnotesonlystar\xdef\first@slidemarker{\the\c@slide}\fi
+    \def\do##1{\setcounter{##1}\z@}\slide@reset
+    \ifarticle\else
+      \edef\page@textheight{\number\textheight sp}%
+      \edef\page@textwidth{\number\textwidth sp}%
+    \fi
+    \set@slidesize
+    \slidebox@restore
+    \the\slide@hook
+    \the\before@newslide
+    \everyslide}
+\def\end@slide{%
+    \par\penalty-\@M
+    \xdef\@tempg{\@currenvir}%
+  \endgroup
+  \ifslide
+    \@seminarerr{Perhaps missing `\string\end{\@tempg}',
+      \iffalse{\fi`\string}' or `\string\endgroup'}\@ehd
+    \def\next{\endgroup\ifslide\expandafter\next\fi}%
+    \next
+  \fi
+  \begingroup
+    \output{\setbox\@tempboxa\box\@cclv}%
+    \@@par\penalty-\@M
+  \endgroup
+  \global\advance\c@slide-1
+  \def\do##1{\setcounter{##1}{\@nameuse{saved@c@##1}}}%
+  \slide@reset
+  \ifarticle\outputloop@savedslides\fi
+  \the\after@slide}
+\let\slideclearpagetrue\relax
+\let\slideclearpagefalse\relax
+\ifarticle
+  \def\slide@clearpage{\par\penalty\z@}
+  \ifnotes
+    \def\slideclearpagetrue{\def\slide@clearpage{\clearpage}}
+    \def\slideclearpagefalse{\def\slide@clearpage{\par\penalty\z@}}
+  \else
+    \ifnotesonly
+      \def\slideclearpagetrue{\def\slide@clearpage{\clearpage}}
+      \def\slideclearpagefalse{\def\slide@clearpage{\par\penalty\z@}}
+    \fi
+  \fi
+\else
+  \def\slide@clearpage{\clearpage}
+\fi
+\newtoks\slide@hook
+\def\everyslide{}
+\newtoks\after@slide
+\def\slidebox@restore{%
+  \def\thepage{\theslide}%
+  \def\newpage{\newslide}%
+  \def\clearpage{\newslide}%
+  \def\thispagestyle{\notslide@err{\thispagestyle}}%
+  \pagestyle{\slide@pagestyle}%
+  \@twocolumnfalse
+  \def\twocolumn{\notslide@err{\twocolumn}}%
+  \def\onecolumn{\notslide@err{\onecolumn}}%
+  \def\marginpar{\notslide@err{\marginpar}}%
+  \def\thanks{\slidethanks}%
+  \def\maketitle{\slidemaketitle}%
+  \fix@floats
+  \fix@whatsits
+  \slide@footnotes
+  \def\do##1{\expandafter\xdef\csname
+   saved@c@##1\endcsname{\the\@nameuse{c@##1}}}%
+  \slide@reset
+  \topskip\z@ \maxdepth\z@
+  \slide@listparameters
+  \slidefonts
+  \def\baselinestretch{\slidestretch}%
+  \def\arraystretch{\slidearraystretch}%
+  \sem@ptsize{\slide@ptsize}}
+\def\date#1{\gdef\@date{#1}\gdef\thedate{#1}}
+\def\author#1{\gdef\@author{#1}\gdef\theauthor{#1}}
+\def\title#1{\gdef\@title{#1}\gdef\thetitle{#1}}
+\date{\today}
+\let\slidethanks\thanks
+\def\thethanks{\@thanks}%
+\def\slidemaketitle{%
+  \par
+  \begin{center}\bf
+    {\large \thetitle}\par\vskip 1ex
+    \begin{tabular}[t]{c} \theauthor \end{tabular}\par\vskip 1ex
+    \thedate
+  \end{center}%
+  \thethanks\par}
+\def\fix@floats{%
+  \def\@xfloat##1[##2]{%
+    \expandafter\let\csname end##1\endcsname\end@float
+    \par\medskip\vbox\bgroup\def\@captype{##1}\parindent\z@
+    \ignorespaces}%
+  \def\end@float{\par\vskip\z@\egroup\medskip}%
+  \def\@dblfloat{\@float}\def\end@dblfloat{\end@float}%
+  \def\endfigure{\end@float}\def\endtable{\end@float}}
+\let\normal@write\write
+\let\normal@read\read
+\let\normal@openout\openout
+\let\normal@closeout\closeout
+\def\fix@whatsits{%
+  \def\write{\immediate\normal@write}%
+  \def\read{\immediate\normal@read}%
+  \def\openout{\immediate\normal@openout}%
+  \def\closeout{\immediate\normal@closeout}}
+\newinsert\slide@footins
+\skip\slide@footins=\bigskipamount
+\count\slide@footins=1000
+\dimen\slide@footins=4in
+\def\theslidefootnote{\alph{footnote}}
+\def\slide@footnotes{%
+  \def\thefootnote{\theslidefootnote}%
+  \let\footins\slide@footins
+  \interfootnotelinepenalty\@M}
+\def\slidefonts{}
+\def\slidestretch{1.18}
+\def\slidearraystretch{1.2}
+\def\raggedslides{\@ifnextchar[{\@raggedslides}{\@raggedslides[1fil]}}
+\def\@raggedslides[#1]{%
+  \edef\slide@@rightskip{#1}%
+  \ifslide\slide@rightskip\fi}
+\def\slide@rightskip{%
+  \@rightskip\z@ plus \slide@@rightskip\relax \rightskip\@rightskip}
+\def\slide@@rightskip{1fil}
+\newcount\slide@listdepth
+\def\slide@listparameters{%
+  \let\@listdepth\slide@listdepth
+  \slide@listdepth\z@
+  \def\@listi{\slide@listi}%
+  \def\@listii{\slide@listii}%
+  \def\@listiii{\slide@listiii}%
+  \let\@listiv\relax\let\@listv\relax\let\@listvi\relax}
+\def\slide@listi{%
+  \leftmargin\leftmargini
+  \labelwidth\leftmargini \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+  \parsep\parskip \divide\parsep2
+  \partopsep\slidepartopsep\relax
+  \advance\partopsep-\parskip
+  \ifdim\partopsep<\z@\partopsep\z@\fi
+  \itemsep\slideitemsep\relax
+  \ifdim\parsep<\itemsep
+    \topsep\itemsep \advance\topsep-\parsep
+  \else
+    \itemsep\parsep \topsep\z@
+  \fi}
+\def\slide@listii{%
+  \leftmargin\leftmarginii
+  \labelwidth\leftmarginii \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+  \divide\itemsep2 \divide\parsep2
+  \divide\topsep2 \divide\partopsep2\relax}%
+\def\slide@listiii{%
+  \leftmargin\leftmarginiii
+  \labelwidth\leftmarginiii \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+  \itemsep \z@ \parsep\z@ \topsep\z@}%
+\def\slideleftmargini{1.8em}
+\def\slideleftmarginii{1.4em}
+\def\slideleftmarginiii{1em}
+\def\slidelabelsep{.5em}
+\def\slideitemsep{.8ex minus .2ex}
+\def\slidepartopsep{1ex minus .2ex}
+\newbox\saved@specials
+\def\save@slidespecials{%
+  \begingroup
+    \output{%
+      \global\setbox\saved@specials=\box\@cclv
+      \global\wd\saved@specials=\z@
+      \global\dp\saved@specials=\z@
+      \global\ht\saved@specials=\z@}%
+    \hbox{}\penalty-\@M
+    \global\let\saved@texttop\@texttop
+    \gdef\@texttop{%
+      \ifvoid\saved@specials\else\box\saved@specials\nointerlineskip\fi
+      \saved@texttop
+      \global\let\@texttop\saved@texttop}%
+  \endgroup}
+\addto@hook\after@document{\save@slidespecials}
+\ifarticle\else
+  \def\insert@specials{%
+    \ifvoid\saved@specials\else
+      \setbox\@slidebox\hbox{\box\saved@specials\box\@slidebox}%
+    \fi
+    \global\let\insert@specials\relax}
+\fi
+\def\extraslideheight#1{%
+  \@tempdima #1\relax
+  \edef\X@SlideHeight{\number\@tempdima sp}
+  \ifslide\set@slidesize\fi}
+\extraslideheight{6pt}
+\def\set@slidesize{%
+  \iflandscape
+    \hsize=\inverseslidesmag\slidewidth
+    \vsize=\inverseslidesmag\slideheight
+  \else
+    \hsize=\inverseslidesmag\slideheight
+    \vsize=\inverseslidesmag\slidewidth
+  \fi
+  \edef\slide@vsize{\number\vsize sp}%
+  \textheight\vsize
+  \advance\vsize\X@SlideHeight\relax
+  \textwidth\hsize\columnwidth\hsize\linewidth\hsize}
+\def\newslide{%
+  \par\penalty-\@M
+  \def\do##1{\setcounter{##1}\z@}\slide@reset
+  \the\before@newslide
+  \set@slidesize}
+\newtoks\before@newslide
+\def\slide@reset{\do{footnote}}
+\def\slidereset#1{\def\slide@reset{}\addtoslidereset{#1}}
+\def\addtoslidereset#1{%
+  \edef\@tempa{#1}\expandafter\addto@slidereset\@tempa,\@nil,}
+\def\addto@slidereset#1,{%
+  \ifx\@nil#1\else
+    \@ifundefined{c@#1}%
+      {\@seminarerr{Counter `#1' not defined}\@ehd}%
+      {\expandafter\def\expandafter\slide@reset\expandafter{%
+        \slide@reset\do{#1}}}%
+    \expandafter\addto@slidereset
+  \fi}
+\def\slide@output{%
+  \@makeslide
+  \@testfalse
+  \ifnotesonly\else
+    \iflandscape
+      \ifnum\@landscapeonly>-1 \os@test\fi
+    \else
+      \ifnum\@landscapeonly<1 \os@test\fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \if@test
+    \reset@slideoutput
+    \@@makeslide
+    \process@slide
+  \fi
+  \refstepcounter{slide}}
+\def\reset@slideoutput{%
+  \let\par\@@par
+  \reset@font
+  \def\baselinestretch{1}%
+  \@nameuse{1\@ptsize @semptsize}%
+  \catcode`\ =10
+  \let\-\@dischyph \let\'\@acci \let\`\@accii \let\=\@acciii}
+\newif\ifcenterslides
+\centerslidestrue
+\def\@makeslide{%
+  \setbox\@slidebox\vbox{%
+    \unvbox\@cclv
+    \ifvoid\slide@footins\else
+      \vskip\skip\slide@footins
+      \footnoterule
+      \unvbox\slide@footins
+    \fi
+    \vskip\z@}}
+\def\@@makeslide{%
+  \overfullslide@warning
+  \setbox\@slidebox\hbox{%
+    \vfuzz=\slidefuzz\relax
+    \vbox to\slide@vsize{%
+    \ifcenterslides\vskip\z@ plus .0001fil \fi
+    \unvbox\@slidebox
+    \vskip\z@ plus .0001fil}%
+    \the\after@slidepage}%
+  \wd\@slidebox\textwidth}
+\def\overfullslide@warning{%
+  \dimen@\ht\@slidebox
+  \advance\dimen@-\slide@vsize\relax
+  \ifdim\dimen@>\slidefuzz\relax
+    \@warning{Slide \theslide\space overfull by \the\dimen@}%
+  \fi}
+\def\slidefuzz{2pt}
+\newtoks\after@slidepage
+\newif\ifrotateheaders
+\def\sliderotation#1{\@ifundefined{semsr@#1}%
+  {\@latexerr{Slide rotation `#1' not defined.}\@eha}%
+  {\@nameuse{semsr@#1}}}
+\def\semsr@left{%
+  \def\rotate@slide{%
+    \setbox\@slidebox\hbox{\leftsliderotation{\box\@slidebox}}}}
+\def\semsr@right{%
+  \def\rotate@slide{%
+    \setbox\@slidebox\hbox{\rightsliderotation{\box\@slidebox}}}}
+\def\semsr@none{\let\rotate@slide\relax}
+\sliderotation{none}
+\def\leftsliderotation#1{%
+  \@seminarerr{\string\leftsliderotation\space has not been defined}%
+  \@ehd}
+\let\rightsliderotation\leftsliderotation
+\def\@ifrotateslide#1{%
+  \ifx\rotate@slide\relax\else
+    \iflandscape\ifportrait#1\fi\else\ifportrait\else#1\fi\fi
+  \fi}
+\def\process@slide{%
+  \slideframewidth=\inverseslidesmag\slideframewidth
+  \slideframesep=\inverseslidesmag\slideframesep
+  \fboxrule\slideframewidth
+  \fboxsep\slideframesep
+  \ifarticle
+    \@ifrotateslide\rotate@slide
+  \else
+    \ifrotateheaders\else\@ifrotateslide\rotate@slide\fi
+  \fi
+  \process@@slide}
+\def\process@@slide{\finish@slide\output@slide}
+\def\finish@slide{%
+  \theslideframe
+  \add@slidelabel\slidelabel}
+\ifarticle
+  \def\output@slide{%
+    \global\advance\slide@count1
+    \@ifundefined{slidebox@\the\slide@count}%
+      {{\globaldefs=1\expandafter
+        \new@slidebox\csname slidebox@\the\slide@count\endcsname}}{}%
+    \expandafter\global\expandafter\setbox\csname
+      slidebox@\the\slide@count\endcsname\box\@slidebox}
+\else
+  \def\output@slide{%
+    \begingroup
+      \hoffset=-\inverseslidesmag in
+      \voffset=-\inverseslidesmag in
+      \setslidelength\@tempdima{%
+        \ifportrait\paperwidth\else\paperheight\fi}
+      \setslidelength\@tempdimb{%
+        \ifportrait\paperheight\else\paperwidth\fi}
+      \ifrotateheaders
+        \@ifrotateslide{%
+          \dimen@=\@tempdima
+          \@tempdima=\@tempdimb
+          \@tempdimb=\dimen@}
+      \fi
+      % \oddsidemargin, \evensidemargin, \headheight, \footheight
+      % used for scratch:
+      \setslidelength\oddsidemargin\slideleftmargin
+      \setslidelength\evensidemargin\sliderightmargin
+      \setslidelength\headheight\slidetopmargin
+      \setslidelength\footheight\slidebottommargin
+      % Some page styles like to know \textwidth:
+      \textwidth=\@tempdima
+      \advance\textwidth-\oddsidemargin
+      \advance\textwidth-\evensidemargin
+      \setbox\@slidebox=\hbox to \@tempdima{%
+        \kern\oddsidemargin
+        \vbox to\@tempdimb{%
+          \ifnum\fancyput@flag>-1
+            \hbox{\kern-\oddsidemargin\do@fancyput}%
+          \fi
+          \let\label\@gobble
+          \let\index\@gobble
+          \let\glossary\@gobble
+          \vbox to\headheight{%
+            \vfill
+            \hbox{%
+              \slideheadfont\relax\strut
+              \hbox to\textwidth{\@oddhead}}%
+            \kern\z@}%
+          \vfill
+          \hbox to\textwidth{\hss\box\@slidebox\hss}%
+          \vfill
+          \vbox to\footheight{%
+            \hbox{%
+              \slidefootfont\relax\strut
+              \hbox to\textwidth{\@oddfoot}}%
+            \vfill}}%
+        \hss}%
+      \ifrotateheaders\@ifrotateslide\rotate@slide\fi
+      \insert@specials
+      \shipout\box\@slidebox
+    \endgroup
+    \let\firstmark\botmark}
+  \@ifundefined{fancyput@flag}{\def\fancyput@flag{-1}}{}
+\fi
+\newskip\slidesep
+\slidesep\intextsep
+\ifarticle
+  \def\fps@fslide{htbp}
+  \def\ftype@fslide{32}
+  \def\float@savedslide{%
+    \begingroup\@float{fslide}%
+      \centerline{\box\@slidebox}%
+    \end@float\endgroup}%
+  \@namedef{float*@savedslide}{%
+    \begingroup\@dblfloat{fslide}%
+      \centerline{\box\@slidebox}%
+    \end@dblfloat\endgroup}%
+  \def\center@slide{\hbox{%
+    \kern-\@totalleftmargin
+    \hbox to \columnwidth{\hss\box\@slidebox\hss}}}%
+  \def\onepercol@savedslide{%
+    \vbox to .996\textheight{\vss\center@slide\vss}\goodbreak}%
+  \def\twopercol@savedslide{%
+    \dimen@.5\textheight
+    \advance\dimen@-\slidesep
+    \ifdim\ht\@slidebox>\dimen@
+      \onepercol@savedslide
+    \else
+      \vbox to .498\textheight{\vss\center@slide\vss}\goodbreak
+    \fi}
+  \def\here@savedslide{%
+    \addvspace\slidesep\center@slide\addvspace\slidesep}
+  \@namedef{here*@savedslide}{%
+    \goodbreak \hrule \@height\z@ \nobreak \vskip\slidesep \nobreak
+    \center@slide
+    \nobreak \vskip\slidesep \nobreak \hrule\@height\z@ \goodbreak}
+\fi
+\ifarticle
+  \def\slideplacement#1{\@ifundefined{#1@savedslide}%
+    {\@seminarerr{Slide placement `#1' undefined}\@ehd}%
+    {\expandafter\let\expandafter\output@savedslide
+      \csname #1@savedslide\endcsname}}
+\else
+  \def\slideplacement#1{}
+\fi
+\ifarticle
+  \ifnotes
+    \ifportrait
+      \slideplacement{float}
+    \else
+      \slideplacement{float*}
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \ifportrait
+      \slideplacement{onepercol}
+    \else
+      \slideplacement{twopercol}
+    \fi
+  \fi
+\fi
+\ifarticle
+  \def\outputloop@savedslides{%
+    \global\maxdepth\@maxdepth
+    \ifvoid\not@slidebox\else
+      \dimen@=\dp\not@slidebox
+      \unvbox\not@slidebox
+      \hrule height\z@
+      \prevdepth\dimen@
+      \penalty\z@
+    \fi
+    \edef\slide@@count{\the\slide@count\relax}%
+    \slide@count\z@
+    \loop
+    \ifnum\slide@count<\slide@@count
+      \advance\slide@count1
+      \expandafter\setbox\expandafter\@slidebox\expandafter\box
+        \csname slidebox@\the\slide@count\endcsname
+      \output@savedslide
+    \repeat
+    \ifnotesonlystar\make@slidemarker\fi}
+\fi
+\def\make@slidemarker{%
+  \addvspace\slidesep
+  \moveleft\@totalleftmargin
+  \vbox{%
+    \hsize\columnwidth
+    \hrule height 1pt
+    \kern 8pt
+    \hbox to \columnwidth{%
+      \hss
+      \LARGE\bf\the@slidemarker
+      \hss}%
+    \kern 8pt
+    \hrule height 1pt}%
+  \addvspace\slidesep}
+\def\the@slidemarker{%
+  Slide%
+  \ifnum\c@slide=\first@slidemarker\else
+    s {\c@slide\first@slidemarker\relax\theslide} --\fi
+  { }\theslide}%
+\ifarticle
+  \let\c@note\c@page
+  \def\p@note{\p@page}
+  \def\thenote{\thepage}
+\else
+  \newcounter{note}
+  \def\thenote{\theslide-\arabic{note}}
+  \def\thepage{\thenote}
+  \addto@hook\after@slide{\setcounter{note}{1}}
+  \expandafter\def\expandafter\@outputpage\expandafter{%
+    \@outputpage\stepcounter{note}}
+\fi
+\ifarticle\else
+  \let\c@page\c@slide
+  \countdef\c@slide=0
+  \c@slide=0
+  \c@page=1
+\fi
+\ifarticle
+  \let\truepagenumbers\relax
+\else
+  \def\truepagenumbers{%
+    \let\c@slide\c@page
+    \countdef\c@page=0
+    \c@page=1
+    \c@slide=0
+    \let\truepagenumbers\relax}
+\fi
+\addto@preamblecmds{\truepagenumbers}
+\newdimen\slideframewidth \slideframewidth 4pt
+\newdimen\slideframesep \slideframesep .3in
+\def\newslideframe#1{%
+  \@ifnextchar[{\@newslideframe{#1}}{\@newslideframe{#1}[]}}
+\def\@newslideframe#1[#2]{%
+  \@namedef{semsfops@#1}{#2}%
+  \@namedef{semsf@#1}##1}
+\newslideframe{plain}{\fbox{#1}}
+\def\slideframe{\@slideframe{slide}}
+\def\@slideframe#1{%
+  \@ifstar{\@testtrue\@@slideframe{#1}}{\@testfalse\@@slideframe{#1}}}
+\def\@@slideframe#1{%
+  \@ifnextchar[{\@@@slideframe{#1}}{\@@@slideframe{#1}[]}}
+\def\@@@slideframe#1[#2]#3{%
+  \def\@tempa{none}%
+  \def\@tempb{#3}%
+  \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
+    \@namedef{the#1frame}{\relax}%
+  \else
+    \ifx\@tempb\@empty
+      \@namedef{the#1frame}{}%
+    \else
+      \@ifundefined{semsf@#3}%
+        {\@seminarerr{Slide frame `#3' undefined}\@eha}%
+        {\if@test
+          \@@@@slideframe{#1}[#2]{#3}%
+        \else
+          \@namedef{the#1frame}{\setbox\@slidebox=\hbox{{%
+            \@nameuse{semsfops@#3}#2\@nameuse{semsf@#3}{\box\@slidebox}}}}%
+        \fi}%
+     \fi
+   \fi}
+\def\@@@@slideframe#1[#2]#3{%
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa\csname the#1frame\endcsname
+  \edef\next{%
+    \noexpand\def\expandafter\noexpand\csname the#1frame\endcsname}%
+  \expandafter\next\expandafter{\@tempa
+    \setbox\@slidebox=\hbox{{%
+      \@nameuse{semsfops@#3}%
+      #2%
+      \@nameuse{semsf@#3}{\box\@slidebox}}}}}%
+\slideframe{plain}
+\def\slidestyle#1{\@ifundefined{ss@#1}%
+  {\@seminarerr{Slide style `#1' undefined}\@eha}%
+  {\@nameuse{ss@#1}}}
+\def\ss@empty{\let\add@slidelabel\@gobble}
+\def\ss@left{\def\add@slidelabel##1{%
+  \setbox\@slidebox=\hbox{%
+    \vbox to \ht\@slidebox{\vss
+    \hbox to 0pt{\hss##1\hskip 15pt}%
+    \vss}\box\@slidebox}}}
+\def\ss@bottom{\def\add@slidelabel##1{%
+  \setbox\@slidebox=\vbox{\copy\@slidebox\vskip 9pt
+    \hbox to\wd\@slidebox{\hss##1\hss}}}}%
+\ifarticle
+  \ifportrait\slidestyle{bottom}\else\slidestyle{left}\fi
+\else
+  \slidestyle{empty}
+\fi
+\def\slidelabel{\bf Slide \theslide}
+\def\newpagestyle#1#2#3{%
+  \expandafter\newcommand\csname ps@#1\endcsname{%
+    \def\@oddhead{#2}\let\@evenhead\@oddhead
+    \def\@oddfoot{#3}\let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot}}
+\def\renewpagestyle#1#2#3{%
+  \expandafter\renewcommand\csname ps@#1\endcsname{%
+    \def\@oddhead{#2}\let\@evenhead\@oddhead
+    \def\@oddfoot{#3}\let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot}}
+\def\@ifgoodps#1{%
+  \@ifundefined{ps@#1}{\@seminarerr{Page style `#1' undefined}\@eha}}
+\def\slidepagestyle#1{%
+  \@ifgoodps{#1}%
+    {\ifslide\pagestyle{#1}\else\edef\slide@pagestyle{#1}\fi}}
+\def\ps@{}
+\slidepagestyle{}
+\ifarticle
+  \def\ps@align{}
+\else
+  \def\ps@align{%
+    \def\@oddhead{\thepage\hfil+}\let\@evenhead\@oddhead
+    \def\@oddfoot{+\hfil+}\let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot}
+\fi
+\def\slideheadfont{\scriptsize}
+\def\slidefootfont{\scriptsize}
+\def\magstep#1{\ifcase#1 \@m\or 1200\or 1440\or 1728\or
+  2074\or 2488\or 2986\or 3583\or 4300\or 5160\fi\relax}
+\def\magstepminus#1{%
+  \ifcase#1 \@m\or 833\or 694\or 579\or 482\or 401\fi\relax}
+\def\@magstep#1{%
+  \ifnum#1<\z@\magstepminus{-#1}\else\magstep#1\fi}
+{\catcode`\p=12\catcode`\t=12
+  \gdef\@@inv@@mag#1pt#2{\def#2{#1}}}
+\def\invert@mag#1{\@tempdima=1000pt
+  \divide\@tempdima by #1\relax
+  \expandafter\@@inv@@mag\the\@tempdima#1}
+\def\@slidesmag#1{%
+  \@tempcnta=#1\relax%
+  \ifnum\@tempcnta>0
+    \edef\inverseslidesmag{\the\@tempcnta}%
+    \invert@mag\inverseslidesmag
+    \ifarticle\else\mag\@tempcnta\fi
+  \else
+    \@seminarerr{\string\@slidesmag\space argument must be an
+      integer equal to 1000 times the magnification}\@eha
+  \fi}
+\def\@articlemag#1{%
+  \@tempcnta=#1\relax%
+  \ifnum\@tempcnta>0
+    \edef\inverseartmag{\the\@tempcnta}%
+    \invert@mag\inverseartmag
+    \ifarticle\mag\@tempcnta\fi
+  \else
+    \@seminarerr{\string\articlemag\space argument must be an
+      integer equal to 1000 times the magnification}\@eha
+  \fi}
+\addto@preamblecmds{\@slidesmag\do\@articlemag}
+\newdimen\semin
+\newdimen\semcm
+\def\@semmagerr#1{%
+  \@seminarerr{\string#1 argument must be an integer
+    between -5 and 9}\@eha}
+\def\slidesmag#1{%
+  \@tempcnta=#1\relax
+  \ifnum\@tempcnta>-6
+    \ifnum\@tempcnta<10
+      \edef\the@slidesmag{\the\@tempcnta}%
+      \@slidesmag{\@magstep\@tempcnta}%
+    \else
+      \@semmagerr\slidesmag
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \@semmagerr\slidesmag
+  \fi
+  \setslidelength\semin\seminlength
+  \setslidelength\semcm\semcmlength}
+\def\seminlength{1in}
+\def\semcmlength{1cm}
+\def\articlemag#1{%
+  \@tempcnta=#1\relax
+  \ifnum\@tempcnta>-6
+    \ifnum\@tempcnta<10
+      \edef\the@articlemag{\the\@tempcnta}%
+      \@articlemag{\@magstep\@tempcnta}%
+    \else
+      \@semmagerr\articlemag
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \@semmagerr\articlemag
+  \fi}
+\addto@preamblecmds{\slidesmag\do\articlemag}
+\def\setslidelength#1#2{%
+  #1=#2\relax
+  #1=\inverseslidesmag#1}%
+\def\addtoslidelength#1#2{%
+  \dimen@=#2\relax
+  \advance#1 by \inverseslidesmag\dimen@}
+\def\setartlength#1#2{%
+  #1=#2\relax
+  #1=\inverseartmag#1}
+\def\addtoartlength#1#2{%
+  \dimen@=#2\relax
+  \advance#1 by \inverseartmag\dimen@}
+\def\slide@epsfsize#1#2{%
+  \ifdim\epsfxsize=0pt
+    \ifdim\epsfysize=0pt
+      \inverseslidesmag#1%
+    \else
+      0pt
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \inverseslidesmag\epsfxsize
+  \fi
+  \epsfysize
+  \ifdim\epsfysize=0pt
+    \ifdim\epsfxsize=0pt
+      \inverseslidesmag#2%
+    \else
+      0pt
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \inverseslidesmag\epsfysize
+  \fi}
+\def\epsfslidesize{\let\epsfsize\slide@epsfsize}
+\slidesmag{4}
+\articlemag{0}
+\def\do@pageparameters{%
+  \do\oddsidemargin
+  \do\evensidemargin
+  \do\marginparwidth
+  \do\marginparsep
+  \do\topmargin
+  \do\headheight
+  \do\headsep
+  \do\textheight
+  \do\textwidth
+  \do\topskip
+  \do\footskip
+  \do\footheight}
+\ifarticle
+  \def\scale@pageparameters{%
+    \begingroup
+      \def\do##1{\global##1=\inverseartmag##1\relax}%
+      \do@pageparameters
+    \endgroup}
+\else
+  \def\scale@pageparameters{%
+    \begingroup
+      \def\do##1{\global##1=\inverseslidesmag##1\relax}%
+      \do@pageparameters
+    \endgroup}
+\fi
+\addto@hook\before@document{\scale@pageparameters}
+\addto@preamblecmds{\scale@pageparameters\do\do@pageparameters}
+\def\allversions{}
+\let\endallversions\relax
+\@namedef{allversions*}{\@bsphack\globaldefs=1}
+\@namedef{endallversions*}{\@esphack}
+\def\slide@list{slide,slide*,allversions,allversions*}
+\def\addtoslidelist#1{\xdef\slide@list{\slide@list,#1}}
+\addto@preamblecmds{\addtoslidelist}
+\ifslidesonly
+  \@ifundefined{xcomment@@@}{\@@input xcomment.sty }{}
+  \def\xcomment@hook{\@xcomment{@@@}{\slide@list}}
+  \newxcomment[]{note}
+\else
+  \def\note{\@bsphack}%
+  \def\endnote{\@esphack}%
+\fi
+\def\noxcomment{\def\xcomment@hook{}}
+\def\os@list{}
+\newif\if@os
+\def\onlyslides#1{\def\os@list{#1}\@ostrue
+  \def\os@warning{\@warning{\string\onlyslides\space argument
+    contains undefined references}}}
+\def\notslides#1{\def\os@list{#1}\@osfalse
+  \def\os@warning{\@warning{\string\notslides\space argument
+    contains undefined references}}}
+\addto@preamblecmds{\onlyslides\do\notslides}
+\addto@hook\after@document{%
+  \ifx\os@list\@empty\else\os@expandlist\fi}
+\def\os@expandlist{%
+  \let\os@@warning\relax
+  \begingroup
+    \def\ref##1{\@ifundefined{r@##1}{?}%
+      {\noexpand\@car\@nameuse{r@##1}\noexpand\@nil}}%
+    \edef\@tempd{\os@list}%
+    \xdef\os@list{}%
+    \@for\@tempc:=\@tempd
+      \do{\expandafter\os@expandrange\@tempc-:-:\@nil}%
+    \os@@warning
+  \endgroup
+  \let\os@expandrange\relax
+  \let\os@checknum\relax
+  \let\os@expandlist\relax}
+\def\os@expandrange#1-#2-#3\@nil{%
+  \def\@tempa{?}\def\@tempb{#1}%
+  \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
+    \let\os@@warning\os@warning
+  \else
+    \@tempcnta=#1\relax
+    \def\@tempb{#2}%
+    \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
+      \let\os@@warning\os@warning
+    \else
+      \def\@tempa{:}%
+      \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
+        \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta
+      \else
+        \@tempcntb=#2\relax
+      \fi
+      \advance\@tempcnta by -1
+      \advance\@tempcntb by 1
+      \ifx\os@list\@empty
+        \xdef\os@list{\the\@tempcnta+\the\@tempcntb}%
+      \else
+        \xdef\os@list{\os@list,\the\@tempcnta+\the\@tempcntb}%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi}
+\def\os@test{%
+  \@testtrue
+  \iflandscape
+    \ifnum\@landscapeonly=-1 \@testfalse\fi
+  \else
+    \ifnum\@landscapeonly=1 \@testfalse\fi
+  \fi
+  \if@test
+    \ifx\os@list\@empty\else
+      \if@os\@testfalse\fi
+      \@for\@tempa:=\os@list\do{\expandafter\os@testrange\@tempa\@nil}%
+    \fi
+  \fi}
+\def\os@testrange#1+#2\@nil{%
+  \ifnum\c@slide>#1
+    \ifnum\c@slide<#2
+      \if@os\@testtrue\else\@testfalse\fi
+    \fi
+  \fi}
+\def\onlynotestoo{%
+  \ifnotes\@testtrue\else\ifnotesonly\@testtrue\else\@testfalse\fi\fi
+  \if@test
+    \@ifundefined{xcomment@@@}{%
+      \edef\sem@temp{\the\catcode`\@}%
+      \catcode`\@=11
+      \@@input xcomment.sty
+      \catcode`\@=\sem@temp\relax}{}%
+    \def\xcomment@hook{\@xcomment{@@@}{\slide@list}}%
+    \addto@hook\after@slide\onlynotes@too
+  \fi}
+\def\onlynotes@too{%
+  \os@test
+  \if@test\gdef\do@end{}\else\gdef\do@end{\xc@begin}\fi}
+\addto@preamblecmds\onlynotestoo
+\def\ptsize#1{%
+  \@ifundefined{#1@semptsize}%
+    {\@seminarerr{\string\ptsize\space `#1' not valid.}\@eha}%
+    {\ifslide
+      \sem@ptsize{#1}\large\normalsize
+    \else
+      \edef\slide@ptsize{#1}%
+    \fi}}
+\edef\slide@ptsize{1\@ptsize}%
+\def\slidefontsizes{\ptsize} %For backwards compatibility??
+\def\slide@setsize#1#2#3#4{%
+  \@setsize{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}%
+  \set@slideskip{#2}}
+\def\slide@@setsize#1#2#3#4{%
+  \slide@setsize{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}\slidedisplayskips}
+\def\set@slideskip#1{%
+  \normallineskiplimit=#1
+  \advance\normallineskiplimit-\normalbaselineskip
+  \multiply\normallineskiplimit-1
+  \normallineskiplimit\slideskip\normallineskiplimit
+  \ifdim\normallineskiplimit<1pt\normallineskiplimit=1pt\fi
+  \normallineskip=\normallineskiplimit
+    minus \slideshrink\normallineskiplimit
+  \dimen@=\normalbaselineskip
+  \normalbaselineskip=\dimen@ minus \slideshrink\normallineskiplimit
+  \normalbaselines}
+\def\slideskip{.75}
+\def\slideshrink{.25}
+\def\slidedisplayskips{%
+  \abovedisplayskip 1.75ex minus .35ex
+  \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+  \abovedisplayshortskip .2ex minus .2ex
+  \belowdisplayshortskip 1ex minus .2ex}
+\def\sem@ptsize#1{%
+  \@nameuse{#1@semptsize}%
+  \large\normalsize
+  \leftmargini\slideleftmargini\relax
+  \leftmarginii\slideleftmarginii\relax
+  \leftmarginiii\slideleftmarginiii\relax
+  \labelsep\slidelabelsep\relax
+  \parskip\slideparskip\relax
+  \parindent\slideparindent\relax
+  \slide@rightskip
+  \slide@listi
+  \skip\footins\slidefootins\relax
+  \footnotesep\slidefootnotesep\relax}
+\def\slidefootins{2ex minus .8ex}
+\def\slidefootnotesep{1.2ex}
+\def\slideparindent{\z@}
+\def\slideparskip{1ex minus .2ex}
+\@namedef{8@semptsize}{%
+  \def\@normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{9.5pt}\viiipt\@viiipt}%
+  \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{8pt}\viipt\@viipt}%
+  \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{8pt}\vipt\@vipt}%
+  \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{7pt}\vipt\@vipt}%
+  \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{6pt}\vpt\@vpt}%
+  \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}%
+  \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{14pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}%
+  \def\LARGE{\slide@setsize\LARGE{17pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}%
+  \def\huge{\slide@setsize\huge{20pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}%
+  \def\Huge{\slide@setsize\Huge{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}}
+\@namedef{9@semptsize}{%
+  \def\@normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{11pt}\ixpt\@ixpt}%
+  \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{9.5pt}\viiipt\@viiipt}%
+  \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{8pt}\viipt\@viipt}%
+  \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{7pt}\vipt\@vipt}%
+  \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{6pt}\vpt\@vpt}%
+  \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}%
+  \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{14pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}%
+  \def\LARGE{\slide@setsize\LARGE{17pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}%
+  \def\huge{\slide@setsize\huge{20pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}%
+  \def\Huge{\slide@setsize\Huge{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}}
+\@namedef{10@semptsize}{%
+  \def\@normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}%
+  \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{11pt}\ixpt\@ixpt}%
+  \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{9.5pt}\viiipt\@viiipt}%
+  \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{8pt}\viipt\@viipt}%
+  \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{6pt}\vpt\@vpt}%
+  \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{14pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}%
+  \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{18pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}%
+  \def\LARGE{\slide@setsize\LARGE{22pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}%
+  \def\huge{\slide@setsize\huge{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}%
+  \def\Huge{\slide@setsize\Huge{30pt}\xxvpt\@xxvpt}}
+\@namedef{11@semptsize}{%
+  \def\@normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{13.6pt}\xipt\@xipt}%
+  \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}%
+  \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{11pt}\ixpt\@ixpt}%
+  \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{9.5pt}\viiipt\@viiipt}%
+  \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{7pt}\vipt\@vipt}%
+  \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{14pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}%
+  \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{18pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}%
+  \def\LARGE{\slide@setsize\LARGE{22pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}%
+  \def\huge{\slide@setsize\huge{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}%
+  \def\Huge{\slide@setsize\Huge{30pt}\xxvpt\@xxvpt}}
+\@namedef{12@semptsize}{%
+  \def\@normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{14.5pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}%
+  \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{13.6pt}\xipt\@xipt}%
+  \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}%
+  \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{9.5pt}\viiipt\@viiipt}%
+  \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{7pt}\vipt\@vipt}%
+  \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{18pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}%
+  \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{22pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}%
+  \def\LARGE{\slide@setsize\LARGE{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}%
+  \def\huge{\slide@setsize\huge{30pt}\xxvpt\@xxvpt}%
+  \let\Huge\huge}
+\@namedef{14@semptsize}{%
+  \def\@normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{18pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}%
+  \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{14.5pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}%
+  \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{13.6pt}\xipt\@xipt}%
+  \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}%
+  \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{9.5pt}\viiipt\@viiipt}%
+  \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{22pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}%
+  \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}%
+  \def\LARGE{\slide@setsize\LARGE{30pt}\xxvpt\@xxvpt}%
+  \let\huge\LARGE
+  \let\Huge\LARGE}
+\@namedef{17@semptsize}{%
+  \def\@normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{22pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}%
+  \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{18pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}%
+  \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{14.5pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}%
+  \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{13.6pt}\xipt\@xipt}%
+  \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}%
+  \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}%
+  \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{30pt}\xxvpt\@xxvpt}%
+  \let\LARGE\Large
+  \let\huge\Large
+  \let\Huge\Large}
+\def\twoup{\@ifnextchar[{\@twoup}{\@twoup[0]}}
+\ifarticle
+  \ifportrait
+    \def\@twoup[#1]{%
+      \@tempcnta=\the@articlemag\relax
+      \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta
+      \advance\@tempcntb by #1\relax
+      \advance\@tempcntb by -2\relax
+      \ifnum\@tempcntb>-6\relax
+        \@@input 2up.tex
+        \source{\@magstep\@tempcnta}{\paperheight}{\paperwidth}%
+        \target{\@magstep\@tempcntb}{\paperwidth}{\paperheight}%
+        \targetlayout{topbottom}%
+        \printlandscapefalse
+      \else
+        \@seminarerr{Article magnification is too low for
+          \string\twoup\space to handle}\@eha
+      \fi
+      \def\articlemag##1{\@semtwoupmagerr\articlemag}}
+  \else
+    \def\@twoup[#1]{%
+      \@tempcnta=\the@articlemag\relax
+      \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta
+      \advance\@tempcntb by #1\relax
+      \advance\@tempcntb by -2\relax
+      \ifnum\@tempcntb>-6\relax
+        \@@input 2up.tex
+        \source{\@magstep\@tempcnta}{\paperwidth}{\paperheight}%
+        \target{\@magstep\@tempcntb}{\paperheight}{\paperwidth}%
+        \if@twoside
+          \targetlayout{twosided}%
+        \fi
+        \printlandscapetrue
+      \else
+        \@seminarerr{Article magnification is too low for
+          \string\twoup\space to handle}\@eha
+      \fi
+      \def\articlemag##1{\@semtwoupmagerr\articlemag}}
+  \fi
+\else
+  \ifportrait
+    \def\@twoup[#1]{%
+      \@tempcnta=\the@slidesmag\relax
+      \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta
+      \advance\@tempcntb by #1\relax
+      \advance\@tempcntb by -3\relax
+      \ifnum\@tempcntb>-6\relax
+        \@@input 2up.tex
+        \source{\@magstep\@tempcnta}{\paperwidth}{\paperheight}%
+        \advance\@tempcnta by -3
+        \target{\@magstep\@tempcnta}{\paperheight}{\paperwidth}%
+        \printlandscapetrue
+      \else
+        \@seminarerr{Slides magnification is too low for
+          \string\twoup\space to handle}\@eha
+      \fi
+      \def\slidesmag##1{\@semtwoupmagerr\slidesmag}}
+  \else
+    \def\@twoup[#1]{%
+      \@tempcnta=\the@slidesmag\relax
+      \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta
+      \advance\@tempcntb by #1\relax
+      \advance\@tempcntb by -3\relax
+      \ifnum\@tempcntb>-6\relax
+        \@@input 2up.tex
+        \source{\@magstep\@tempcnta}{\paperheight}{\paperwidth}%
+        \target{\@magstep\@tempcntb}{\paperwidth}{\paperheight}%
+        \targetlayout{topbottom}%
+        \printlandscapefalse
+      \else
+        \@seminarerr{Slides magnification is too low for
+          \string\twoup\space to handle}\@eha
+      \fi
+      \def\slidesmag##1{\@semtwoupmargerr\slidesmag}}%
+  \fi
+\fi
+\def\@semtwoupmagerr#1{%
+  \@seminarerr{\string#1 must come before \string\twoup}\@eha}
+\addto@preamblecmds{\twoup\do\@twoup}
+\openin1 seminar.con
+\ifeof1\else\closein1 \relax\@@input seminar.con\fi
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `seminar.sty'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semlayer.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semlayer.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0afc8df9785
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semlayer.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,156 @@
+%% BEGIN semlayer.sty
+%%
+%% This is file `semlayer.sty', generated
+%% on <1993/4/2> with the docstrip utility (2.0r).
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% semlayer.doc
+%%
+\def\fileversion{1.0}
+\def\filedate{93/04/01}
+%%
+%% LaTeX style option `semlayer.sty'.
+%% For use with LaTeX v2.09 and the `seminar' document style.
+%%
+%% COPYRIGHT 1993, by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu
+%%
+%% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of
+%% the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.2 of this license
+%% or (at your option) any later version.  The latest version of this
+%% license is in:
+%% 
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% 
+%% and version 1.2 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version
+%% 1999/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%%
+\addto@hook\before@newslide{%
+  \global\def\overlay@list{}%
+  \setcounter{overlay}{0}}
+\newbox\@@slidebox
+\def\process@@slide{%
+  \ifx\overlay@list\@empty
+    \finish@slide
+    \output@slide
+  \else
+    \setbox\@@slidebox\box\@slidebox
+    \make@overlay{0}%
+    \finish@slide
+    \output@slide
+    {\let\theoverlay\theslide\layer@loop{0}}%
+    \overlay@loop
+  \fi}
+\def\overlay@loop{%
+  \begingroup
+    \overlay@prep
+    \c@overlay=1
+    \@whilenum\c@overlay<10
+      \do{%
+        \test@member{\the\c@overlay}{\overlay@list}%
+        \if@test
+          \make@overlay{\the\c@overlay}%
+          \finish@slide
+          \output@slide
+        \fi
+        \layer@loop{\the\c@overlay}%
+        \advance\c@overlay by 1}%
+  \endgroup}
+\def\layer@loop#1{%
+  \begingroup
+    \layer@prep
+    \@for\currlayer:=\layer@list\do{%
+    \test@member{#1-\currlayer}{\overlay@list}%
+      \if@test
+        \make@overlay{#1-\currlayer}%
+        \finish@slide
+        \output@slide
+      \fi}%
+  \endgroup}
+\def\layer@prep{%
+  \ifarticle\pagestyle{\layer@pagestyle}\fi
+  \let\thepage\thelayer
+  \ifx\thelayerframe\@empty\else\let\theslideframe\thelayerframe\fi
+  \let\slidelabel\layerlabel}
+\def\overlay@prep{%
+  \ifarticle\pagestyle{\overlay@pagestyle}\fi
+  \let\thepage\theoverlay
+  \ifx\theoverlayframe\@empty\else\let\theslideframe\theoverlayframe\fi
+  \let\slidelabel\overlaylabel}
+\def\layerframe{\@slideframe{layer}}
+\def\overlayframe{\@slideframe{overlay}}
+\def\thelayerframe{}
+\def\theoverlayframe{}
+\def\overlaylabel{\bf Overlay \theoverlay}
+\def\layerlabel{\bf Layer \thelayer}
+\newcounter{overlay}
+\def\theoverlay{\theslide-\alph{overlay}}
+\def\currlayer{}
+\def\thelayer{\theoverlay-\currlayer}
+\newif\ifoverlays
+\newif\iflayers
+\@ifundefined{@overlay}%
+  {\let\@overlay\relax}%
+  {\ifarticle\else\overlaystrue\layerstrue\fi}
+\def\nooverlays@err{%
+  \@seminarerr{You need to use additional macros for overlays,
+    e.g., semcolor.sty}\@ehd
+  \global\overlaysfalse
+  \global\layersfalse}
+\@ifundefined{@overlay}{}{}
+\def\overlay#1{%
+  \ifoverlays\ifx\@overlay\relax\nooverlays@err\fi\fi
+  \ifslide
+    \@tempcnta=#1
+    \@testfalse
+    \ifnum\@tempcnta>-1 \ifnum\@tempcnta<10 \@testtrue\fi\fi
+    \if@test
+      \c@overlay=\@tempcnta
+      \ifnum\c@overlay=0
+        \advance\c@slide by -1
+        \refstepcounter{slide}%
+      \else
+        \advance\c@overlay by -1
+        \refstepcounter{overlay}%
+        \ifoverlays
+          \xdef\overlay@list{\overlay@list,\the\c@overlay}%
+        \fi
+      \fi
+      \ifoverlays
+        \@overlay{\the\c@overlay}%
+      \fi
+    \else
+      \@seminarerr{\string\overlay\space argument must be
+        an integer between 0 and 9}\@eha
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \@seminarerr{\string\overlay\space can only be used
+      in slide environments}\@eha
+  \fi
+  \ignorespaces}
+\def\colorlayers#1{%
+  \edef\@tempc{#1}%
+  \edef\layer@list{\layer@list,#1}%
+  \def\@tempa##1{%
+    \@namedef{##1}{%
+      \iflayers\ifx\@overlay\relax\nooverlays@err\fi\fi
+      \ifslide
+        \iflayers
+          \xdef\overlay@list{\overlay@list,\the\c@overlay-##1}%
+          \@overlay{\the\c@overlay-##1}%
+        \fi
+      \else
+        \@seminarerr{Color layer `##1' can only be used in
+          slide environments}\@eha
+      \fi}}
+  \@for\@tempb:=\@tempc\do{%
+    \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\@tempb}}}
+\def\layer@list{}
+\def\overlaypagestyle#1{\@ifgoodps{#1}{\edef\overlay@pagestyle{#1}}}
+\def\layerpagestyle#1{\@ifgoodps{#1}{\edef\layer@pagestyle{#1}}}
+\overlaypagestyle{}
+\layerpagestyle{}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `semlayer.sty'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semlcmss.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semlcmss.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8276f8f179c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semlcmss.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,170 @@
+%% BEGIN semlcmss.sty
+\def\fileversion{1.0 (2e)}
+\def\filedate{94/02/01}
+%%
+%% LaTeX style option `semlcmss.sty' for the `seminar' document style.
+%% For use with LaTeX v2.09 and the New Font Selection Scheme (1 or 2)
+%% or (some day) with LaTeX2e.
+%%
+%% COPYRIGHT 1994, by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu
+%%
+%% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of
+%% the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.2 of this license
+%% or (at your option) any later version.  The latest version of this
+%% license is in:
+%% 
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% 
+%% and version 1.2 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version
+%% 1999/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%%
+%% This file contains the external font information needed to load
+%% the SliTeX sans serif fonts for use by seminar.sty.
+%%
+\csname semlcmss@loaded\endcsname
+\let\semlcmss@loaded\endinput
+\typeout{Style Option: `semlcmss' \fileversion\space <\filedate> (tvz)}
+\@ifundefined{selectfont}
+  {\@seminarerr{`semlcmss' style option can only be used
+    with the New Font Selection Scheme}\@eha\endinput}{}
+%
+\expandafter\ifx\csname DeclareSizeFunction\endcsname\relax
+
+% First, the font definitions:
+\new@fontshape{lcmss}{m}{n}{%
+  <5>lcmss8 scaled 695%
+  <6>lcmss8 scaled 833%
+  <7>lcmss8 scaled 913%
+  <8>lcmss8 %
+  <9>lcmss8 scaled 1095%
+  <10>lcmss8 scaled 1200%
+  <11>lcmss8 scaled 1314%
+  <12>lcmss8 scaled 1440%
+  <14>lcmss8 scaled 1727%
+  <17>lcmss8 scaled 2074%
+  <20>lcmss8 scaled 2488%
+  <25>lcmss8 scaled 2986%
+  }{}
+\extra@def{lcmss}{}{}
+%
+\new@fontshape{lcmss}{m}{it}{%
+  <5>lcmssi8 scaled 695%
+  <6>lcmssi8 scaled 833%
+  <7>lcmssi8 scaled 913%
+  <8>lcmssi8 %
+  <9>lcmssi8 scaled 1095%
+  <10>lcmssi8 scaled 1200%
+  <11>lcmssi8 scaled 1314%
+  <12>lcmssi8 scaled 1440%
+  <14>lcmssi8 scaled 1727%
+  <17>lcmssi8 scaled 2074%
+  <20>lcmssi8 scaled 2488%
+  <25>lcmssi8 scaled 2986%
+  }{}
+\extra@def{lcmss}{}{}
+\subst@fontshape{lcmss}{m}{sl}{lcmss}{m}{it}
+%
+\new@fontshape{lcmss}{bx}{n}{%
+  <5>lcmssb8 scaled 695%
+  <6>lcmssb8 scaled 833%
+  <7>lcmssb8 scaled 913%
+  <8>lcmssb8 %
+  <9>lcmssb8 scaled 1095%
+  <10>lcmssb8 scaled 1200%
+  <11>lcmssb8 scaled 1314%
+  <12>lcmssb8 scaled 1440%
+  <14>lcmssb8 scaled 1727%
+  <17>lcmssb8 scaled 2074%
+  <20>lcmssb8 scaled 2488%
+  <25>lcmssb8 scaled 2986%
+  }{}
+\extra@def{cmssb}{}{}
+\subst@fontshape{lcmss}{bx}{it}{lcmss}{bx}{n}
+\subst@fontshape{lcmss}{bx}{sl}{lcmss}{bx}{n}
+
+%
+% Now define \slidefonts:
+\ifarticle
+  \def\slidefonts{%
+    \def\default@family{lcmss}%
+    \def\rmdefault{lcmss}%
+    \def\sfdefault{lcmss}%
+    \family\default@family\selectfont}
+\else
+    \def\default@family{lcmss}%
+    \def\rmdefault{lcmss}%
+    \def\sfdefault{lcmss}%
+    \family\default@family\selectfont
+\fi
+
+\else
+
+\DeclareFontFamily{OT1}{lcmss}{}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmss}{m}{n}{
+  <5>s*[1.1120]lcmss8
+  <6>s*[1.1107]lcmss8
+  <7>s*[1.0434]lcmss8
+  <8>lcmss8
+  <9>s*[0.9733]lcmss8
+  <10><10.95><12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>s*[0.96]lcmss8}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmss}{m}{sl}{
+  <5>s*[1.1120]lcmssi8
+  <6>s*[1.1107]lcmssi8
+  <7>s*[1.0434]lcmssi8
+  <8>lcmssi8
+  <9>s*[0.9733]lcmssi8
+  <10><10.95><12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>s*[0.96]lcmssi8}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmss}{bx}{n}{
+  <5>s*[1.1120]lcmssb8
+  <6>s*[1.1107]lcmssb8
+  <7>s*[1.0434]lcmssb8
+  <8>lcmssb8
+  <9>s*[0.9733]lcmssb8
+  <10><10.95><12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>s*[0.96]lcmssb8}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmss}{m}{it}{<-> ssub * lcmss/m/sl }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmss}{bx}{it}{<-> sub * lcmss/bx/n }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmss}{bx}{sl}{<-> sub * lcmss/bx/n }{}
+
+% Now define \slidefonts:
+\ifarticle
+  \def\slidefonts{%
+    \def\default@family{lcmss}%
+    \def\rmdefault{lcmss}%
+    \def\sfdefault{lcmss}%
+    \fontfamily\default@family\selectfont}
+\else
+    \def\default@family{lcmss}%
+    \def\rmdefault{lcmss}%
+    \def\sfdefault{lcmss}%
+    \fontfamily\default@family\selectfont
+\fi
+
+\fi
+
+% Now set up a few things for seminar.sty:
+% These fonts are intended to be used with the 10pt font size
+% declarations (and \magstep4), slightly modified:
+\ptsize{10}\slidesmag{4}\articlemag{0}
+\@namedef{10@semptsize}{%
+  \def\@normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}%
+  \def\small{\footnotesize}%
+  \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{9.5pt}\viiipt\@viiipt}%
+  \def\scriptsize{\footnotesize}%
+  \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{6pt}\vpt\@vpt}%
+  \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{14pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}%
+  \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{18pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}%
+  \def\LARGE{\slide@setsize\LARGE{22pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}%
+  \def\huge{\slide@setsize\huge{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}%
+  \def\Huge{\huge}}
+\def\semlcmss@warning#1{%
+  \@warning{Can't use `\string#1' with the semlcmss option!}}
+\def\ptsize#1{\semlcmss@warning\ptsize}
+\def\slidesmag#1{\semlcmss@warning\slidesmag}
+\def\articlemag#1{\semlcmss@warning\articlemag}
+
+\endinput
+%% END semlcmss.sty